Contents

Subaru Baja Sport 2005 Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 469
1 of 469

Summary of Content for Subaru Baja Sport 2005 Owner's Manual PDF

Foreword

Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owners Man- ual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in excel- lent condition and to properly maintain the emission control system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and its operation. For information not found in this Owners Manual, such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact the dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the nearest SUBARU dealer. The information, specifications and illustrations found in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles previously sold. This Owners Manual applies to all models and covers all equipment, in- cluding factory installed options. Some explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your vehicle.

Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need the information found herein.

FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN

is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.

copyright 2004 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.

UBF046AA

1

CONTINUED

Warranties

Warranties for U.S.A. All SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru of Ameri- ca, Inc. and sold at retail by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the United States come with the following warranties:

SUBARU Limited Warranty Emission Control Systems Warranty Emissions Performance Warranty

All warranty information, including details of coverage and exclusions, is in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet. Please read these warranties carefully.

Warranties for Canada All SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by an authorized SUBARU deal- er in Canada come with the following warranties:

SUBARU Limited Warranty Anti-Corrosion Warranty Emission Control Warranty

All warranty information, including details of coverage and exclusions, is in the Warranty and Service Book- let. Please read these warranties carefully.

This vehicle does not contain mer- cury devices or parts.

2

How to use this owners manual

Using your Owners manual Before you operate your vehicle, carefully read this manual. To protect yourself and extend the service life of your vehicle, follow the instructions in this manual. Failure to observe these instructions may result in se- rious injury and damage to your vehicle.

This manual is composed of fourteen chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief table of contents, so you can usually tell at a glance if that chapter contains the information you want.

Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags This chapter informs you how to use the seat and seat- belt and contains precautions for the SRS airbags. Chapter 2: Keys and doors This chapter informs you how to operate the keys, locks and windows. Chapter 3: Instruments and controls This chapter informs you about the operation of instru- ment panel indicators and how to use the instruments and other switches. Chapter 4: Climate control This chapter informs you how to operate the climate control. Chapter 5: Audio

This chapter informs you how to operate your audio system. Chapter 6: Interior and exterior equipments This chapter informs you how to operate interior and exterior equipments. Chapter 7: Starting and operating This chapter informs you how to start and operate your SUBARU. Chapter 8: Driving tips This chapter informs you how to drive your SUBARU in various conditions and explains some safety tips on driving. Chapter 9: In case of emergency This chapter informs you what to do if you have a prob- lem while driving, such as a flat tire or engine over- heating. Chapter 10: Appearance care This chapter informs you how to keep your SUBARU looking good. Chapter 11: Maintenance and service This chapter informs you when you need to take your SUBARU to the dealer for scheduled maintenance and informs you how to keep your SUBARU running properly. Chapter 12: Specifications This chapter informs you about dimension and capac- ities of your SUBARU.

3

CONTINUED

Chapter 13: Consumer information and Reporting safety defects This chapter informs you about Tire information, Uni- form tire quality grading standards and Reporting safety defects. Chapter 14: Index This is an alphabetical listing of all thats in this manu- al. You can use it to quickly find something you want to read.

Safety warnings You will find a number of WARNINGs, CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual. These safety warnings alert you to potential hazards that could result in injury to you or others. Please read these safety warnings as well as all other portions of this manual carefully in order to gain a bet- ter understanding of how to use your SUBARU vehicle safely.

A WARNING indicates a situation in which seri- ous injury or death could result if the warning is ignored.

A CAUTION indicates a situation in which injury or damage to your vehicle, or both, could result if the caution is ignored.

NOTE A NOTE gives information or suggestions how to make better use of your vehicle.

Safety symbol

You will find a circle with a slash through it in this man-

HSF019AA

4

ual. This symbol means Do not, Do not do this, or Do not let this happen, depending upon the context.

Safety precautions when driving

Seatbelt and SRS airbag

All persons in the vehicle should fasten their seatbelts BEFORE the vehicle starts to move. Otherwise, the possibility of serious injury be- comes greater in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

To obtain maximum protection in the event of an accident, the driver and all passengers in the vehicle should always wear seatbelts when the vehicle is moving. The SRS (Supplemental Re- straint System) airbag does not do away with the need to fasten seatbelts. In combination with the seatbelts, it offers the best combined protection in case of a serious accident. Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of severe injury or death in a crash even when the vehicle has the SRS airbag.

The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force. Occupants who are out of proper position when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deploy-

5

CONTINUED

ment, the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full ve- hicle control and the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat.

Carefully read the sections Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags in chapter 1 of this owners manual for in- structions and precautions concerning the seatbelt system and SRS airbag system.

Child safety

Never hold a child on your lap or in your arms while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a colli- sion, because the child will be caught between the passenger and objects inside the vehicle.

While riding in the vehicle, infants and small children should always be placed in the REAR seat in an infant or child restraint system which is appropriate for the childs age, height and weight. If a child is too big for a child restraint

system, the child should sit in the REAR seat and be restrained using the seatbelts. Accord- ing to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating po- sitions than in the front seating positions. Nev- er allow a child to stand up or kneel on the seat.

Put children aged 12 and under in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk being injured from deployment is greater.

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

Always use the child safety locks whenever a child rides in the rear seat. Serious injury could result if a child accidentally opened the door and fell out. Refer to the Door locks section in chapter 2.

Always lock the passengers windows using

6

the lock switch when children are riding in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the power window. Refer to the Power windows section in chapter 2.

Never leave unattended children in the vehi- cle. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, tempera- ture in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to them.

Carefully read the sections Child restraint sys- tems,*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag), and Seatbelts in chapter 1 of this owners manual for instructions and precautions concerning the child restraint system, seatbelt system and SRS airbag system.

Engine exhaust gas (carbon monox- ide)

Never inhale engine exhaust gas. Engine ex-

haust gas contains carbon monoxide, a color- less and odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

Always properly maintain the engine exhaust system to prevent engine exhaust gas from en- tering the vehicle.

Never run the engine in a closed space, such as a garage, except for the brief time needed to drive the vehicle in or out of it.

Avoid remaining in a parked vehicle for a lengthy time while the engine is running. If that is unavoidable, then use the ventilation fan to force fresh air into the vehicle.

Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free from snow, leaves or other obstructions to ensure that the ventilation system always works properly.

If at any time you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, have the problem checked and corrected as soon as possible. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with all windows fully open.

7

CONTINUED

Drinking and driving

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Alcohol in the bloodstream delays your reac- tion and impairs your perception, judgment and attentiveness. If you drive after drinking even if you drink just a little it will increase the risk of being involved in a serious or fatal accident, injuring or killing yourself, your passengers and others. In addition, if you are injured in the accident, alcohol may increase the severity of that injury. Please dont drink and drive.

Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Since alcohol affects all people differently, you may have consumed too much alcohol to drive safely even if the level of alcohol in your blood is below the legal limit. The safest thing you can do is never drink and drive. However if you have no choice but to drive, stop drinking and sober up completely before getting behind the wheel.

Drugs and driving

There are some drugs (over the counter and prescription) that can delay your reaction time and impair your perception, judgment and at- tentiveness. If you drive after taking them, it may increase your, your passengers and other persons risk of being involved in a serious or fatal accident.

If you are taking any drugs, check with your doctor or pharmacist or read the literature that accompanies the medication to determine if the drug you are taking can impair your driving ability. Do not drive after taking any medications that can make you drowsy or otherwise affect your ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If you have a medical condition that requires you to take drugs, please consult with your doctor.

Never drive if you are under the influence of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your own health and well-be- ing, we urge you not to take illegal drugs in the first place and to seek treatment if you are addicted to those drugs.

8

Driving when tired or sleepy

When you are tired or sleepy, your reaction will be delayed and your perception, judgment and attentiveness will be impaired. If you drive when tired or sleepy, your, your passengers and other persons chances of being involved in a serious accident may increase.

Please do not continue to drive but instead find a safe place to rest if you are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you should make periodic rest stops to refresh your- self before continuing on your journey. When possible, you should share the driving with others.

Car phone/mobile phone and driving

Do not use a hand-held phone while driving; it may distract your attention from driving and can lead to an accident. If you use a hand-held phone, pull off the road and park in the safe place before using your phone. In some States/

Provinces, only hands-free phones may legally be used while driving.

Modification of your vehicle

Your vehicle should not be modified. Modifica- tion could affect its performance, safety or du- rability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or perfor- mance problems resulting from modification may not be covered under warranties.

Driving with pets Unrestrained pets can interfere with your driving and distract your attention from driving. In a collision or sudden stop, unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown around inside the vehicle and hurt you or your passengers. Besides, the pets can be hurt under these situations. It is also for their own safety that pets should be properly restrained in your vehicle. Restrain a pet with a special traveling harness which can be se- cured to the rear seat with a seatbelt or use a pet car-

9

CONTINUED

rier which can be secured to the rear seat by routing a seatbelt through the carriers handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers in the front passengers seat. For further information, consult your veterinarian, local an- imal protection society or pet shop.

Tire pressures

Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire pressures can cause the tires to deform severe- ly and to rapidly become hot. A sharp increase in temperature could cause tread separation, and destruction of the tires. The resulting loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.

Check and, if necessary, adjust the pressure of each tire (including the spare) at least once a month and be- fore any long journey.

Check the tire pressure when the tires are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the values shown on the tire placard. Refer to the Tires and wheels section in chapter 11 for detailed information.

California proposition 65 warning

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other repro- ductive harm. In addition, certain fluids in vehi- cles and certain components of product wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

14

9

12

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

13

10

11

Table of contents Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Keys and doors

Instruments and controls

Climate control

Audio

Interior equipment

Starting and operating

Driving tips

In case of emergency

Appearance care

Maintenance and service

Specifications

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Index

12

Illustrated index

Exterior

13 12 11 10 9 8

1 2 3 5 64

7 UBF047BB

1) Hood lock release knob (page 11-5)

2) Headlight switch (page 3-18) 3) Bulb replacement (page 11-64) 4) Wiper switch (page 3-25) 5) Moonroof (page 2-31) 6) Roof rail (page 6-24) 7) Door locks (page 2-3) 8) Tire pressure (page 11-46) 9) Flat tires (page 9-12) 10) Tire chains (page 8-15) 11) Fog light button (page 3-23) 12) Tie-down hooks (page 9-23) 13) Towing hook (page 9-23)

13

CONTINUED

48 5

1 2

367

UBF048BB

1) Rear window defogger button (page 3-26)

2) Fuel filler lid (page 7-4) 3) Child safety locks (page 2-21) 4) Towing hook (page 9-23) 5) Tailgate (page 2-25) 6) Tie-down hooks (page 9-2) 7) Bulb replacement (page 11-61) 8) Licence plate bracket (page 2-

26)

14

Interior Passenger compartment area

1 2

5

4 3 UBF065BB

1) Lower anchorage for child re- straint system (page 2-21)

2) Seatbelt (page 1-14) 3) Parking brake lever (page 7-36) 4) Front seat (page 1-2) 5) Rear seat (page 1-9)

15

CONTINUED

1 2

5 4 3

UBF050BB

1) Moonroof (page 2-31) 2) Interior lights (page 6-2) 3) Sun visors (page 6-3) 4) Map light (page 6-3) 5) Inside mirror (page 3-28)

16

1

7

3

2

1 5

6

4

UBF066BB

1) Cup holder (page 6-7) 2) Center console (page 6-5) 3) Glove box (page 6-5) 4) Cigarette lighter (page 6-9) 5) Ashtray (page 6-12) 6) Accessory power outlet (page 6-

8) 7) Rear center console (page 6-6)

17

CONTINUED

Cargo bed/spare tire/jack

1 2

4 3

6

5

UBF067BB

1) Cargo lamp (page 6-20) 2) Cargo tie-down hooks (page 6-

17) 3) Temporary spare tire (page 9-

10) 4) Switchback door (page 2-27) 5) Jack/Maintenance tools (page

9-3) 6) Cargo bed extender (page 6-17)

18

Instrument panel

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314151617 UBF021BB

1) Door locks (page 2-3) 2) Outside mirror (page 3-30) 3) Light control lever (page 3-18) 4) Combination meter (page 3-6) 5) Wiper control lever (page 3-23) 6) Hazard warning flasher switch

(page 3-5) 7) Climate control (page 4-1) 8) Gear shift lever (MT) (page 7-

12)/Selector lever (AT) (page 7- 15)

9) Audio (page 5-1) 10) Cruise control (page 7-38) 11) Horn (page 3-34) 12) SRS airbag (page 1-47) 13) Tilt steering (page 3-33) 14) Fuse box (page 11-57) 15) Hood lock release knob (page

11-5) 16) Power door locking switch (page

2-5) 17) Power window (page 2-22)

19

CONTINUED

Light control and wiper control levers/switches

1

2

34

57

68 9

10

11

UBF023DB

1) Parking light switch (page 3-22) 2) Windshield wiper (page 3-23) 3) Mist (page 3-25) 4) Windshield washer (page 3-25) 5) Wiper control lever (page 3-25) 6) Illumination brightness control

(page 3-21) 7) Light control lever (page 3-18) 8) Headlight ON/OFF (page 3-18) 9) Headlight flasher High/Low

beam change (page 3-18) 10) Turn signal (for lane change)

(page 3-20) 11) Turn signal (page 3-20)

20

Combination meter Non-turbo models

1 2 3 4

56789

UBF063BB

1) Fuel gauge (page 3-8) 2) Speedometer (page 3-6) 3) Tachometer (page 3-7) 4) Temperature gauge (page 3-8) 5) Clock setting knob (page 3-17) 6) Clock and outside temperature

indicator (page 3-17, 3-7) 7) Selector lever position indicator

(page 3-15) 8) Trip meter A/B selection and trip

meter reset knob (page 3-6) 9) Trip meter and odometer (page

3-6)

21

CONTINUED

Turbo models

1 2 43 5

678910

UBF064BB

1) Fuel gauge (page 3-8) 2) Speedometer (page 3-6) 3) Gear position indicator (page 3-

16) 4) Tachometer (page 3-7) 5) Temperature gauge (page 3-8) 6) Clock setting knob (page 3-17) 7) Clock and outside temperature

indicator (page 3-17, 3-7) 8) Selector lever position indicator

(page 3-15) 9) Trip meter A/B selection and trip

meter reset knob (page 3-6) 10) Trip meter and odometer (page

3-6)

22

Warning and indicator light

Mark Name Page

Seatbelt warning light 3-9

SRS airbag system warning light 3-10

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator lamp

3-10

Charge warning light 3-11

Oil pressure warning light 3-12

AT OIL temperature warning light (if equipped) 3-12

or ABS warning light 3-12

or Brake system warning light 3-13

Door ajar warning light 3-14

Low fuel warning light 3-14

All-Wheel Drive warning light (if equipped) 3-14

Switchback door indicator 3-14

Security system indicator light (if equipped) 3-15

Cargo lamp indicator 3-16

Turn signal indicator lights 3-16

High beam indicator light 3-16

Cruise control set indicator light 7-38

Mark Name Page

1-1

1

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Front seats .................................................... 1-2 Fore and aft adjustment ................................... 1-3 Seat cushion angle and height adjustment

(Power seat only) ........................................... 1-4 Reclining the seatback ..................................... 1-5 Head restraint adjustment ................................ 1-6 Lumbar support (if equipped) .......................... 1-7

Seat heater (if equipped) .............................. 1-7 Rear seats ..................................................... 1-9

Rear headrest .................................................... 1-9 Folding down the rear seat .............................. 1-10

Seatbelts ....................................................... 1-14 Seatbelt safety tips ........................................... 1-14 Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) .............. 1-16 Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor

(A/ELR) ............................................................ 1-16 Seatbelt warning light and chime .................... 1-17 Fastening the seatbelt ...................................... 1-17 Seatbelt maintenance ....................................... 1-21

Seatbelt extender ......................................... 1-22 Front seatbelt pretensioners ....................... 1-24

System monitors ............................................... 1-25 System servicing .............................................. 1-26 Precautions against vehicle modification ...... 1-27

Child restraint systems ................................ 1-28 Where to place a child restraint system ......... 1-29 Choosing a child restraint system .................. 1-31 Installing child restraint systems with A/ELR

seatbelt ............................................................ 1-32

Installation of child restraint systems by use of lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) .... 1-40

Installing a booster seat ................................... 1-45 *SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint

System airbag) ........................................... 1-47 Vehicle with drivers and front passengers

SRS airbags and lap/shoulder restraints ..... 1-47 SRS frontal airbag ............................................ 1-52 SRS airbag system monitors ........................... 1-60 SRS airbag system servicing .......................... 1-61 Precautions against vehicle modification ...... 1-62

1-2

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbagsFront seats

Never adjust the seat while driving to avoid the possibility of loss of vehicle control and of personal injury.

Before adjusting the seat, make sure the hands and feet of rear seat passengers are clear of the adjusting mechanism.

Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits well back and upright in the seat. To reduce the risk of sliding under the seatbelt in a collision, the front seatbacks should be always used in the upright position while the vehicle is running. If the front seat- backs are not used in the upright position in a collision, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious in- ternal injury or death.

The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force. Occupants who are out of proper position when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deploy- ment, the driver should always sit upright and

well back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full ve- hicle control and the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat.

Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are 12 years of age and under and are not

HS1034BA

1-3

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

CONTINUED

restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater. For that reason, we strongly recom- mend that ALL children (including those in child seats and those that have outgrown child restraint devices) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is appropriate for the childs age, height and weight. Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (in- cluding forward facing child seat) in the REAR seats at all times. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat- ing positions than in the front seating posi- tions. For instructions and precautions con- cerning child restraint systems, see the Child restraint systems section in this chapter.

Fore and aft adjustment Power seat (if equipped)

To adjust the seat forward or backward, move the con- trol switch forward or backward.

UB1060BA

1-4

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Manual type

Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to the desired position. Then release the lever and move the seat- back and forth to make sure that it is securely locked into place.

Seat cushion angle and height adjust- ment (Power seat only)

UB1058BA

UB1078BA

1-5

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

CONTINUED

To adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion, move the control switch in the corresponding direction.

Reclining the seatback

Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the seatback to the desired position. Then release the lever and make sure the seat is securely locked into place. The seatback placed in a reclined position can spring back upward with force when released. When operat- ing the reclining lever to return the seatback, hold it lightly so that it may be raised back gradually.

UB1062BA

UB1072BA

1-6

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

To prevent the passenger from sliding under the seatbelt in the event of a collision, always put the seatback in the upright position while the vehicle is in motion. Also, do not place ob- jects such as cushions between the passenger and the seatback. If you do so, the risk of slid- ing under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.

Head restraint adjustment

To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, push the head restraint down while pressing the release button on the top of the seatback. The head restraint should be adjusted so that the cen- ter of the head restraint is closest to the top of the oc- cupants ears.

Never drive the vehicle with the head restraints removed because they are designed to reduce the risk of serious neck injury in the event that

HS1037BA

UB1016BA

1-7

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

CONTINUED

the vehicle is struck from the rear.

Lumbar support (if equipped)

Pull the lever forward or backward. Pulling the lever forward will increase the amount of support for your lower back.

Seat heater (if equipped)

1) Heating element

The seat heater operates when the ignition switch is either in the ACC or ON position.

UB1059BA

1

UB1073BB

1-8

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1) Indicator light

To turn on the seat heater, push the LO or HI posi- tion on the switch, as desired, depending on the tem- perature. Selecting the HI position will make the seat to heat up quickly. LO: Normal heating HI: Rapid heating The indicator located on the switch comes on when the seat heater is in operation. When the vehicles in- terior is warmed enough or before you leave the vehi- cle, be sure to turn the switch off.

There is a possibility that people with delicate skin may suffer slight burns even at low tem- peratures if they use the seat heater for a long period of time. When using the heater, always be sure to warn the persons concerned.

Do not put anything on the seat which insu- lates against heat, such as a blanket, cushion, or similar items. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.

NOTE Use of the seat heater for a long period of time

while the engine is not running can cause battery discharge.

When cleaning the seat, do not use benzine, paint thinner, or any similar materials.

1

LO

HI

UB1093BB

1-9

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

CONTINUED

Rear seats

Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits well back and upright in the seat. Do not put cushions or any other materi- als between occupants and seatbacks or seat cushions. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.

To avoid the possibility of serious injury or death, passengers must never be allowed to sit

on the rear center console while the vehicle is in motion. The rear seat of this vehicle is de- signed for no more than two passengers and is equipped with only two seatbelts.

Make sure that the rear seatback is securely locked. When it is securely locked, the red marking on the lock is no longer visible. If it is not locked, the seatback may move forward when the vehicle is operated.

Rear headrest

Rear headrest are not adjustable, nor removable.

UB0302

UB1153AA

1-10

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Folding down the rear seat

After returning the rear seat to its original po- sition, be certain to place all of the seatbelts and the tab attached to the seat cushion above the seat cushion. And make certain that the shoulder belts are fully visible.

Make sure that the rear seatback is securely locked after returning the seatback to its origi- nal position. When securely locked, the red marking on the lock is no longer visible. If it is not locked securely, the rear seatback may fold down during driving.

Never allow passengers to ride on the folded rear seatback. Doing so may result in serious injury or death.

Secure skis and other lengthy items properly to prevent them from being thrown around in- side the vehicle and causing serious injury dur- ing a sudden stop, a sudden steering maneuver or a rapid acceleration.

Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than the top of the front seatback because it could tumble forward and injure passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

HS8005BA

1-11

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

CONTINUED

Folding down the seatback

Before folding down the seatback, check that there is nothing in the seatback pocket. If there is something in the pocket, it could be damaged or cause damage to the seatback and rear cen- ter console when the seatback is folded.

A) LOCK B) UNLOCK 1) Red

1. Unlock the seatback by pulling the release knob up and then fold the seatback down.

1

A B

UB1109BB

UB1110BA

1-12

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Folding down the seat cushion and seatback

Before folding down the seatback, check that there is nothing in the seatback pocket. If there is something in the pocket, it could be damaged or cause damage to the seatback and rear cen- ter console when the seatback is folded.

1. Move the front seat forward. 2. Store the seatbelts in the seatbelt pockets to pre- vent them from falling below the cushion.

3. Raise the seat cushion by pulling up the tab.

UB1111BA

UB1171BA

UB1172BA

1-13

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

CONTINUED

A) LOCK B) UNLOCK 1) Red

4. Unlock the seatback by pulling the release knob up and fold the seatback down. Confirm that the pin locat- ed at the bottom of the seat cushion is inserted into the slot at the top of the seatback.

Be careful not to pinch your hand or fingers with the seat cushion or the seatback when per- forming the fold down operation.

5. To return the rear seat to its original position, raise the seatback and seat cushion until they lock into

1

A B

UB1112CB UB1113BA

1-14

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

place and make sure that they are securely locked. Make sure that the rear seatbelt buckles are not under the seat cushion or seatback, when returning the seat cushion and the seatback to their original position.

Confirm that the rear seatbelts are stored in the seatbelt pocket prior to returning the seat cush- ion to its original position.

Seatbelts

Seatbelt safety tips

All persons in the vehicle should fasten their seatbelts BEFORE the vehicle starts to move. Otherwise, the possibility of serious injury be- comes greater in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

All belts should fit snugly in order to provide full restraint. Loose fitting belts are not as ef- fective in preventing or reducing injury.

Each seatbelt is designed to support only one person. Never use a single belt for two or more persons even children. Otherwise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result.

Replace all seatbelt assemblies including re- tractors and attaching hardware worn by occu- pants of a vehicle that has been in a serious ac- cident. The entire assembly should be replaced even if damage is not obvious.

Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, espe-

1-15

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

CONTINUED

cially if they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or improperly restrained. Be- cause children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deploy- ment is greater. For all these reasons, we strongly recommend that ALL children (includ- ing those in child seats and those that have out- grown child restraint devices) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is appropriate for the childs height and weight. Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (in- cluding forward facing child seats) in the REAR seats at all times. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat- ing positions than in the front seating posi- tions. For instructions and precautions con- cerning the child restraint system, see the Child restraint systems section in this chap- ter.

Infants or small children Use a child restraint system that is suitable for your ve- hicle. See information on Child restraint systems in this chapter.

Children If a child is too big for a child restraint system, the child should sit in the rear seat and be restrained using the seatbelts. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating po- sitions than in the front seating positions. Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the seat.

If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses the face or neck, move the child closer to the belt buckle to help provide a good shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to securely place the lap belt as low as possible on the hips and not on the childs waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt cannot be properly positioned, a child re- straint system should be used. Never place the shoul- der belt under the childs arm or behind the childs back.

1-16

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Expectant mothers

Expectant mothers also need to use the seatbelts. They should consult their doctor for specific recom- mendations. The lap belt should be worn securely and as low as possible over the hips, not over the waist.

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) The drivers seatbelt has an Emergency Locking Re- tractor (ELR). The emergency locking retractor allows normal body movement but the retractor locks automatically during a sudden stop, impact or if you pull the belt very quick- ly out of the retractor.

Automatic/Emergency Locking Retrac- tor (A/ELR)

Each passengers seatbelt has an Automatic/Emer- gency Locking Retractor (A/ELR). The Automatic/ Emergency Locking Retractor normally functions as an Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR). The A/ELR has an additional locking mode Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode intended to secure a child re- straint system. When the seatbelt is once drawn out completely and is then retracted even slightly, the re- tractor locks the seatbelt in that position and the seat- belt cannot be extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indicate the retractor func- tions as ALR. When the seatbelt is retracted fully, ALR mode is released.

When securing a child restraint system on the passen- gers seats, the seatbelt must be changed over to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode. When the child restraint system is removed, make sure that the retractor is restored to the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) function by allowing the seat- belt to retract fully. For instructions on how to convert the retractor to the ALR mode and restore it to the ELR mode, see the Child restraint systems section in this chapter.

HS1107AA

1-17

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

CONTINUED

Seatbelt warning light and chime Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt warning de- vice at the drivers seat. This device causes the seatbelt warning light on the instrument panel to light up for about six seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position to remind the driver to wear the seatbelt. If the drivers seatbelt is not fastened, a warning chime sounds at the same time.

Fastening the seatbelt

Never use a belt that is twisted or reversed. In an accident, this can increase the risk or sever- ity of injury.

Keep the lap belt as low as possible on your hips. In a collision, this spreads the force of the lap belt over stronger hip bones instead of across the weaker abdomen.

Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits well back and upright in the seat. To reduce the risk of sliding under the seatbelt in a collision, the front seatbacks should be always used in the upright position while the vehicle is running. If the front seat-

backs are not used in the upright position in a collision, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious in- ternal injury or death.

Do not put cushions or any other materials between occupants and seatbacks or seat cushions. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.

HS1049BA

1-18

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Never place the shoulder belt under the arm or behind the back. If an accident occurs, this can increase the risk or severity of injury.

Metallic parts of the seatbelt can become very hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sun- ny weather; they could burn an occupant. Do not touch such hot parts until they cool.

Front seatbelts 1. Adjust the seat position: Drivers seat: Adjust the seatback to the upright posi- tion. Move the seatback as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control. Front passengers seat: Adjust the seatback to the upright position. Move the seat as far back as possi- ble. 2. Sit well back in the seat. 3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If the belt stops before reach- ing the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out

more slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.

4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.

HS1050BA

1-19

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

CONTINUED

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt. 6. Place the lap belt as low as possible on your hips, not on your waist.

Adjusting the front seat shoulder belt anchor height

The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best suited for you. To lower the anchor height, push the release button and slide the anchor down. To raise the anchor height, slide the anchor up. Pull down on the anchor to make sure that it is locked in place. Always adjust the anchor height so that the shoulder belt passes over the middle of the shoulder without touching the neck.

HS1051BA

HS1052BA

1-20

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

When wearing the seatbelts, make sure the shoulder portion of the webbing does not pass over your neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt an- chor to a lower position. Placing the shoulder belt over the neck may result in neck injury dur- ing sudden braking or in a collision.

Unfastening the seatbelt

Push the button on the buckle.

Before closing the door, make sure that the belts are

retracted properly to avoid catching the belt webbing in the door.

Rear seatbelts 1. Sit well back in the seat. 2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If the belt stops before reach- ing the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after giving a strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly again.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.

HS1053BA HS1050BA

1-21

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

CONTINUED

4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt. 5. Place the lap belt as low as possible on your hips, not on your waist.

Unfastening the seatbelt

Push the button on the buckle.

Before closing the door, make sure that the belts are retracted properly to avoid catching the belt webbing in the door.

Seatbelt maintenance

Keep the belts free of polishes, oils, chemi- cals and particularly battery acid.

Never attempt to make modifications or

HS1051BA

HS1053BA

1-22

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

changes that will prevent the seatbelt from op- erating properly.

To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap and lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye the belts because this could seriously affect their strength.

Inspect the seatbelts and attachments including the webbing and all hardware periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes, tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas. Re- place the seatbelts even if only minor damage is found.

Seatbelt extender If the front seatbelts are not long enough to permit the tongue plate to engage with the seatbelt buckle, an optional seatbelt extender is available from your SUBARU dealer. When ordering an extender, only or- der one particularly designed for your vehicle. Several different types of extenders are available to match var- ious varieties of front seatbelt designs. See your SUBARU dealer for assistance.

The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of length and it can be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position.

Be sure to observe the following when using the seatbelt extender. Failure to follow these instructions and warn- ings could reduce the effectiveness of the seat- belt and result in more serious injury in the event of a collision.

Never use the extender when the belt itself is long enough to permit it to be buckled properly. If removal of heavy clothing is all that is needed to permit the seatbelt to be buckled properly, remove the heavy clothing and do not use the

1-23

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

CONTINUED

extender. Do not use the extender if the buckle of the

extender rests over the abdomen. Do not let someone else use the extender.

Use of an extender when it is not needed could reduce the effectiveness of the seatbelt and re- sult in more serious injury in the event of a col- lision.

Use the extender only for the front seatbelts and only for the model for which it was original- ly provided. Never use the extender for the rear seatbelts or for a different model.

NOTE When the seatbelt extender is used by a pregnant passenger, consult a doctor to get approval in ad- vance.

To connect the extender to the seatbelt, insert the tongue plate into the seatbelt buckle so that the PRESS signs on the buckle-release buttons of the extender and the seatbelt are both facing outward as shown in the diagram. You will hear a click when the tongue plate locks into the buckle.

When releasing the seatbelt, press on the buckle-re- lease button on the extender, not on the seatbelt. This helps to prevent damage to the vehicle interior and ex- tender itself.

For the safety of others, the extender should be re- moved after each use, especially if the next person us- ing the seatbelt does not need one.

UZS000BA

1-24

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Front seatbelt pretensioners

The drivers and front passengers seatbelts have a seatbelt pretensioner. The seatbelt pretensioners are designed to be activated in the event of an accident in- volving a moderate to severe frontal collision.

The pretensioner sensor also serves as a SRS frontal airbag sensor. If the sensor detects a certain predeter- mined amount of force during a frontal collision, the front seatbelt is quickly drawn back in by the retractor to take up the slack so that the belt more effectively re- strains the front seat occupant.

When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated, an operat-

ing noise will be heard and a small amount of smoke will be released. These occurrences are normal and not harmful. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.

Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been activated, the seatbelt retractor remains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can not be pulled out and retracted and therefore must be replaced.

NOTE Seatbelt pretensioners are not designed to acti-

vate in minor frontal impacts, in side or in rear im- pacts or in roll-over accidents.

The drivers seat and passengers seat preten- sioners and frontal airbag operate simultaneous- ly.

Pretensioners are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. In the event that a preten- sioner is activated, both the drivers and front pas- sengers seatbelt retractor assemblies must be re- placed and only by an authorized SUBARU dealer. When replacing seatbelt retractor assemblies, use only genuine SUBARU parts.

If either front seatbelt does not retract or cannot be pulled out due to a malfunction or activation of the pretensioner, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

HS1067BA

1-25

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

CONTINUED

If the front seatbelt retractor assembly or sur- rounding area has been damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to ex- plain to the buyer that it has seatbelt pretension- ers by alerting the buyer to the contents of this section.

To obtain maximum protection, occupants should sit in an upright position with their seat- belts properly fastened. Refer to Seatbelts section in this chapter.

Do not modify, remove or strike the front seatbelt retractor assemblies or surrounding area. This could result in accidental activation of the seatbelt pretensioners or could make the system inoperative, possibly resulting in seri- ous injury. Seatbelt pretensioners have no user-serviceable parts. For required servicing of front seatbelt retractors equipped with seat- belt pretensioners, see your nearest SUBARU dealer.

When discarding front seatbelt retractor as- semblies or scrapping the entire vehicle due to collision damage or for other reasons, consult

your SUBARU dealer.

System monitors

SRS airbag system warning light

A diagnostic system continually monitors the readi- ness of the seatbelt pretensioner while the vehicle is being driven. The seatbelt pretensioners share the control module with the airbag system. Therefore, if any malfunction occurs in a seatbelt pretensioner, the SRS airbag system warning light will illuminate. The SRS airbag system warning light will show normal sys- tem operation by lighting for about 6 seconds when

UB4010EA

1-26

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

the ignition key is turned to the ON position.

The following components are monitored by the indi- cator:

Front sub sensor (Right hand side) Front sub sensor (Left hand side) Airbag control module (including impact sensors) Seatbelt pretensioner (Drivers side) Seatbelt pretensioner (Passengers side) All related wiring

If the warning light exhibits any of the following conditions, there may be a malfunction in the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbag sys- tem. Immediately take your vehicle to your nearest SUBARU dealer to have the system checked. Unless checked and properly re- paired, the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbag will not operate properly in the event of a collision, which may increase the risk of inju- ry.

Flashing or flickering of the indicator light. No illumination of the warning light when the

ignition switch is first turned to the ON posi- tion.

Continuous illumination of the warning light.

Illumination of the warning light while driv- ing.

System servicing

When discarding a seatbelt retractor assem- bly or scrapping the entire vehicle damaged by a collision, consult your SUBARU dealer.

Tampering with or disconnecting the sys- tems wiring could result in accidental activa- tion of the seatbelt pretensioner and/or airbag or could make the system inoperative, which may result in serious injury. The wiring har- nesses of the seatbelt pretensioner and SRS airbag systems are covered with yellow insula- tion and the connectors of the system are yel- low for easy identification. Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the seatbelt pretensioner and airbag systems. For required servicing of the seatbelt pretensioner, see your nearest SUBARU dealer.

1-27

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

CONTINUED

The front sub sensors are located in both front fenders and the airbag control module includ- ing the impact sensors is located under the center console. If you need service or repair in those areas or near the front seatbelt retrac- tors, we recommend that you have an autho- rized SUBARU dealer perform the work.

NOTE If the front part of the vehicle is damaged in an ac- cident to the extent that the seatbelt pretensioner does not operate, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

Precautions against vehicle modifica- tion

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you want to in- stall any accessory parts to your vehicle.

Do not perform any of the following modifica- tions. Such modifications can interfere with proper operation of the seatbelt pertensioners.

Attachment of any equipment (bush bar, winches, snow plow, skid plate, etc.) other than genuine SUBARU accessory parts to the front end.

Modification of the suspension system or front end structure.

Installation of a tire of different size and con- struction from the tires specified on the tire placard attached to the door jamb.

1-28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Child restraint systems

Infants and small children should always be placed in an infant or child restraint system in the rear seat while riding in the vehicle. You should use an infant or child restraint system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards, is compatible with your vehicle and is ap- propriate for the childs age and size. All child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt (except those covered under the section in this manu- al, entitled Installation of child restraint systems by use of lower and tether anchorages (LATCH)).

Children could be endangered in an accident if their child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle. When installing the child restraint system, carefully fol- low the manufacturers instructions.

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces require that in- fants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint system at all times while the vehicle is moving.

UB1173BA

HS1069BA

1-29

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

CONTINUED

Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a colli- sion, because the child will be caught between the passenger and objects inside the vehicle. Additionally, holding a child in your lap or arms in the front seat exposes that child to another serious danger. Since the SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force, the child could be injured or even killed.

Children should be properly restrained at all times. Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on any seat. Unrestrained children will be thrown forward during sudden stop or in an ac- cident and can be injured seriously. Additionally, children standing up or kneeling on or in front of the front seat are exposed an- other serious danger. Since the SRS airbag de- ploys with considerable speed and force, the child could be injured or even killed.

Where to place a child restraint system The following are SUBARUs recommendations on where to place a child restraint system in your vehicle.

HS1070BA

1-30

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

A: Front passengers seat You should not install a child restraint system due to the hazard to children posed by the passengers air- bag.

B: Rear seat Recommended positions for all types of child restraint systems. In these positions, Automatic/Emergency Locking Re- tractor (A/ELR) seatbelts and lower anchorage bars are provided for installing a child restraint system.

Put children aged 12 and under in the rear

seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, espe- cially if they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or improperly restrained. Be- cause children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deploy- ment is greater. For that reason, be sure to secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward fac- ing child seats) in the REAR seats at all times. You should choose a restraint device which is appropriate for the childs age, height and weight. According to accident statistics, chil- dren are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions.

UB1170AA

1-31

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

CONTINUED

SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGERS SRS AIRBAG, DO NOT IN- STALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT PASSENGERS SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

Choosing a child restraint system

Choose a child restraint system that is appropriate for the childs age and size (weight and height) in order to provide the child with proper protection. The child re- straint system should meet all applicable requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards for United States or Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards for Canada. It can be identified by locking for the label on the child restraint system or the manufactures state- ment of compliance in the document attached to the system. Also it is important for you to make sure that the child restraint system is compatible with the vehi- cle in which it will be used.

HS1072BA

UBS108AA

1-32

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Installing child restraint systems with A/ELR seatbelt

Child restraint systems and seatbelts can be- come hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check the child restraint system before you place a child in it.

Do not leave an unsecured child restraint system in your vehicle. Unsecured child re- straint systems can be thrown around inside of the vehicle in a sudden stop, turn or accident; it can strike and injure vehicle occupants as well as result in serious injuries or death to the child.

When you install a child restraint system, fol- low the manufacturers instructions supplied with it. After installing the child restraint sys- tem, check to ensure that it is held securely in position. If it is not held tight and secure, the danger of your child suffering personal injury in

the event of an accident may be increased.

Installing a rearward facing child restraint

1. Place the child restraint system in the rear seating position. 2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the child restraint system following the instructions provided by its manufacturer. 3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.

UBS109BA

1-33

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

CONTINUED

4. Take up the slack in the lap belt. 5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the retractor to change the retractor over from the Emergency Lock- ing Retractor (ELR) to the Automatic Locking Retrac- tor (ALR) function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indicate the retractor functions as ALR.

6. Push and pull the child restraint system forward and from side to side to check if it is firmly secured. Sometimes a child restraint can be more firmly se- cured by pushing it down into the seat cushion and then tightening the seatbelt. 7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR properly functioning).

UBS110BA UBS111BA

1-34

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

8. To remove the child restraint system, press the re- lease button on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will return to the ELR mode.

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT PASSENGERS SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

NOTE When the child restraint system is no longer in use, remove it and restore the ELR function of the retractor. The function is restored by retracting the seatbelt fully.

Installing forward facing child restraint sys- tems with seatbelt and tether anchorages

When you install a child restraint system, fol- low the manufacturers instructions supplied with it. After installing the child restraint sys- tem, check to ensure that it is held securely in

UG1089BA

UB1148BA

1-35

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

CONTINUED

position. If it is not held tight and secure, the danger of your child suffering personal injury in the event of an accident may be increased.

1. Place the child restraint system in the seating posi- tion on the rear seat cushion.

2. Pull the seatback locking knob and fold the seat- back forward to see the tether anchorage on the back- side of the seatback.

UB1134CA

1-36

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

3. Connect the tether belt hook onto the tether an- chorage on the backside of the seatback. Take up any slack in the tether belt after connecting it to the tether anchorage.

4. Put the other end of the tether belt through under the headrest. 5. Return the seatback to the locked position. Confirm that the red mark on the locking knob is no longer vis- ible and check that the seatback is securely locked by moving it back and forth. 6. Run the lap and shoulder belt through the child re- straint system following the instructions provided by its manufacturer.

UB1144BA UB1146BA

1-37

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

CONTINUED

7. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle.

8. Take up the slack in the lap belt. 9. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the retractor to change the retractor over from the Emergency Lock- ing Retractor (ELR) to the Automatic Locking Retrac- tor (ALR) function. Then allow the belt to rewind into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indicate the retractor function as ALR.

10.While pushing the child restraint into the seat cush- ion and moving it back and forth and right and left, tighten the seatbelt securely by taking up the slack in the belt.

UB1145BA

UB1155BA

UB1156CA

1-38

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

11.While pushing the child restraint into the seat cush- ion and moving it back and forth, pull the upper tether belt straight up to secure the child restraint system firmly by taking up the slack in the belt. 12.The loose end of the tether belt should be placed into the gap on the backside of the seatback. 13.Before having a child sit in the child restraint sys- tem, move it back and forth and right and left to check if it is firmly secured. 14.To remove the child restraint system, follow the re- verse procedures of installation. Unbuckle the seatbelt and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will return to the ELR mode.

If you have any question concerning proper child re- straint system installation, ask your SUBARU dealer.

NOTE When the child restraint system is no longer in use, remove it and restore the ELR function of the retractor. The function is restored by retracting the seatbelt fully.

Installation of forward facing child restraint by seatbelt only

1. Place the child restraint system on the seat. 2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the child restraint system following the instructions provided by its manufacturer.

UB1147BA

UB1148CA

1-39

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

CONTINUED

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle.

4. Take up the slack in the lap belt. 5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the retractor to change the retractor over from the Emergency Lock- ing Retractor (ELR) to the Automatic Locking Retrac- tor (ALR) function. Then allow the belt to rewind into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indicate the retractor function as ALR.

6. While pushing the child restraint into the seat cush- ion and moving it back and forth and right and left, tighten the seatbelt securely by taking up the slack in the belt. 7. Before having a child sit in the child restraint sys- tem, move it back and forth and right and left to check if it is firmly secured.

UB1145BA

UB1155CA

UB1156BA

1-40

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

8. To remove the child restraint system, press the re- lease button on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will return to ELR mode.

If you have any question concerning proper child re- straint system installation, ask your SUBARU dealer.

NOTE When the child restraint system is no longer in use, remove it and restore the ELR function of the retractor. The function is restored by retracting the seatbelt fully.

Installation of child restraint systems by use of lower and tether anchorages (LATCH)

Child restraint systems and seatbelts can be- come hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check the child restraint system before you place a child in it.

Do not leave an unsecured child restraint system in your vehicle. Unsecured child re- straint systems can be thrown around inside of

the vehicle in a sudden stop, turn or accident; it can strike and injure vehicle occupants as well as result in serious injuries or death to the child.

When you install a child restraint system, fol- low the manufacturers instructions supplied with it. After installing the child restraint sys- tem, check to ensure that it is held securely in position. If it is not held tight and secure, the danger of your child suffering personal injury in the event of an accident may be increased.

1-41

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

CONTINUED

Some types of child restraint systems can be installed on the rear seat of your vehicle without use of the seat- belts. Such child restraint systems are secured to the dedicated anchorages provided on the vehicle body. The lower and tether anchorages are sometimes re- ferred to as the LATCH system (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren).

Your vehicle is equipped with four lower anchorages (bars) on the back panel behind the markings on the bottom part of the rear seatback and two upper an- chorages (tether anchorages) on the back side of the seatback for accommodating such child restraint sys- tems.

The lower anchorages (bars) are used for installing a child restraint system on the rear seat. For each seat- ing position of the rear seat, two lower anchorages are provided. The tether anchorages (upper anchorages) are also provided for each seating position of the rear seat.

You will find marks at the bottom of the rear seat seatbacks. These marks indicate the positions of the lower anchorages (bars).

UB1154CA

UB1174BA

1-42

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Each lower anchorage is located where the seat cush- ion meets the seatback.

1. Place the child restraint system on the rear seat cushion.

2. Unlock the rear seatback locking knob and fold the seatback forward to see the tether anchorages on the backside of the seatback.

UB1133BA

UB1134CA

1-43

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

CONTINUED

3. Connect the hook of the upper tether belt onto the tether anchorage on the backside of the seatback. Do not allow slack in the tether belt.

4. Put the other end of the tether belt through under the headrest. 5. Return the seatback to the locked position. Confirm that the red mark on the locking knob is no longer vis- ible and check if the seatback has been securely locked by moving it back and forth.

UB1144BA UB1146BA

1-44

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

6. While following the instructions supplied by the child restraint system manufacturer, connect the lower hooks onto the lower anchorages located at marks on the bottom of the rear seatback. When the hooks are connected, make sure the adjacent seat- belts are not caught.

7. [If your child restraint system is of a flexible attach- ment type (which uses tether belts to connect the child restraint system properly to the lower anchorages)] While pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion, pull both left and right lower tether belts up to secure the child restraint system firmly by taking up the slack in the belt.

UB1158BA UB1131BA

1-45

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

CONTINUED

8. Pull the upper tether belt straight up to secure the child restraint system firmly by taking up the slack in the belt. 9. Put the loose end of the tether belts behind the seatback. 10.Before seating a child in the child restraint system, try to move seatback and forth and left and right to ver- ify that it is held securely in position. 11.To remove the child restraint system, follow the re- verse procedures of installation.

If you have any question concerning proper child re- straint system installation, ask your SUBARU dealer.

Installing a booster seat

Child restraint systems and seatbelts can be- come hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check the child restraint system before you place a child in it.

Do not leave an unsecured child restraint system in your vehicle. Unsecured child re- straint systems can be thrown around inside of the vehicle in a sudden stop, turn or accident; it can strike and injure vehicle occupants as well as result in serious injuries or death to the child.

When you install a child restraint system, fol- low the manufacturers instructions supplied with it. After installing the child restraint sys- tem, check to ensure that it is held securely in position. If it is not held tight and secure, the danger of your child suffering personal injury in

UB1147BA

1-46

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

the event of an accident may be increased.

1. Place the booster seat in the rear seating position and sit the child on it. The child should sit well back on the booster seat. 2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the booster seat and the child following the instruc- tions provided by its manufacturer. 3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click. Take care not to twist the seatbelt. Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of childs shoulder and that the lap belt is posi- tioned as low as possible on the childs hips.

4. To remove the booster seat, press the release but- ton on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt to retract.

Never use a belt that is twisted or reversed. In an accident, this can increase the risk or sever- ity of injury to the child.

Never place the shoulder belt under the childs arm or behind the childs back. If an ac- cident occurs, this can increase the risk or se- verity of injury to the child.

The seatbelt should fit snugly in order to pro- vide full restraint. Loose fitting belts are not as

UB1128BA

UB1152BA

1-47

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

CONTINUED

effective in preventing or reducing injury. Place the lap belt as low as possible on the

childs hips. A high-positioned lap belt will in- crease the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.

Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of childs shoulder. Placing the shoulder belt over the neck may result in neck injury during sudden braking or in a colli- sion.

*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) *SRS: This stands for supplemental restraint system. This name is used because the airbag system supple- ments the vehicles seatbelts.

Vehicle with drivers and front passen- gers SRS airbags and lap/shoulder re- straints

Your vehicle is equipped with a supplemental restraint system in addition to a lap/shoulder belt at each front seating position. The supplemental restraint system (SRS) consists of two airbags (drivers and front passengers frontal air- bags). These SRS airbags are designed only as a supple- ment to the primary protection provided by the seatbelt. The system also controls front seatbelt pretensioners. For operation, instructions are precautions concerning the seatbelt pretensioner, see the Front seatbelt pre- tensioners section in this chapter.

1-48

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

To obtain maximum protection in the event of an accident, the driver and all passengers in the vehicle should always wear seatbelts when the vehicle is moving. The SRS airbag is designed only as a supplement to the primary protection provided by the seatbelt. It does not do away with the need to fasten seatbelts. In combina- tion with the seatbelts, it offers the best com- bined protection in case of a serious accident. Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of severe injury or death in a crash even when the vehicle has the SRS airbag. For instructions and precautions concerning the seatbelt system, see the Seatbelts sec- tions in this chapter.

Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the SRS airbag. Because the SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed faster than the blink of an eye and force to protect in high speed collisions, the force of an airbag can injure an occupant whose body is too close to SRS air- bag. It is also important to wear your seatbelt to help avoid injuries that can result when the SRS air- bag contacts an occupant not in proper posi-

tion such as one thrown forward during pre-ac- cident braking. Even when properly positioned, there remains a possibility that an occupant may suffer minor injury such as abrasions and bruises to the face or arms because of the SRS airbag deploy- ment force.

The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force. Occupants who are out of proper position when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deploy- ment, the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full ve- hicle control and the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat.

Do not place any objects over or near the SRS airbag cover or between you and the SRS airbag. If the SRS airbag deploys, those objects could interfere with its proper operation and could be propelled inside the vehicle and cause injury.

1-49

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

CONTINUED

Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater. For that reason, we strongly recommend that ALL children (including those in child seats and those that have outgrown child restraint devic-

es) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seat- belt, whichever is appropriate for the childs age, height and weight. Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (in- cluding forward facing child seats) in the REAR seats at all times. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat- ing positions than in the front seating posi- tions. For instructions and precautions concerning the child restraint system, see the Child re- straint systems section in this chapter.

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on the front passengers seat, or never hold a child on your lap or in your arms. The SRS airbag de- ploys with considerable force and can injure or even kill the child.

HS1034BA

1-50

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

When the SRS airbag deploys, some smoke will be released. This smoke could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. If you or your passengers have breathing problems after SRS airbag deploys, get fresh air promptly.

A deploying SRS airbag releases hot gas. Oc- cupants could get burnt if they come into direct contact with the hot gas.

NOTE When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to explain to the buyer that it is equipped with SRS airbags by alerting him to the applicable section in this owners manual.

1-51

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

CONTINUED

Components

2 1 4

3

5

7

6

UB1135BB

1) Airbag control module (including impact sensors)

2) Airbag module (drivers side) 3) Airbag module (passengers

side) 4) Front sub sensor (left hand side) 5) Front sub sensor (right hand

side) 6) Seatbelt pretensioner (drivers

side) 7) Seatbelt pretensioner (passen-

gers side)

1-52

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

SRS frontal airbag The drivers SRS frontal airbag is stowed in the center portion of the steering wheel. The passengers SRS frontal airbag is stowed near the top of the dashboard under an SRS AIRBAG mark.

In a moderate to severe frontal collision, the drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags deploy and supplement the seatbelts by reducing the impact on the drivers and front passengers head and chest.

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on the front passengers seat. The SRS airbag de- ploys with considerable force and can injure or even kill the child.

HS1072BA

HS1070BA

1-53

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

CONTINUED

Never hold a child on your lap or in your arms. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable force and can injure or even kill the child.

The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force. Occupants who are out of proper position when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deploy- ment, the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full ve- hicle control and the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat. It is also important to wear your seatbelt to help

HS1069BA HS1084BA

1-54

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

avoid injuries that can result when the SRS air- bag contacts an occupant not in proper posi- tion such as one thrown toward the front of the vehicle during pre-accident braking.

Do not put any objects over the steering wheel pad and dashboard. If the SRS frontal airbag deploys, those objects could interfere with its proper operation and could be propelled inside the vehicle and cause injury.

Do not attach accessories to the windshield, or fit an extra-wide mirror over the rear view mir- ror. If the SRS airbag deploys, those objects could become projectiles that could seriously injure vehicle occupants.

HS1085BA

HS1086BA

1-55

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

CONTINUED

Operation

A) Drivers side B) Passengers side 1) SRS airbags deploy as soon as a collision occurs. 2) After deployment, SRS airbags start to deflate immediately so that the drivers vision is not obstructed.

A B

1

2

HS1087BB

1-56

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

The SRS airbag can function only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

If the front sub sensors inside the both front fenders and the impact sensors in the airbag control module detect a certain predetermined amount of force during a frontal collision, the control module sends signals to the frontal airbag modules instructing them to inflate the SRS frontal airbags. Then both airbag modules produce gas, which instantly inflates drivers and pas- sengers SRS frontal airbags. After the deployment, the SRS airbags immediately start to deflate so that the drivers vision is not obstructed. The time required from detecting impact to the deflation of the SRS air- bag after deployment is shorter than the blink of an eye.

The front passengers SRS frontal airbag deploys to- gether with drivers SRS frontal airbag even when no one occupies the front passengers seat.

When the SRS frontal airbags deploy, the drivers and front passengers seatbelt pretensioners operate at the same time.

Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS airbag would activate in a non-accident situation, should it occur, the SRS airbag will deflate quickly, not obscuring vi- sion and will not interfere with the drivers ability to

maintain control of the vehicle.

When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and some smoke will be released. These occurrences are normal result of the deployment. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.

Do not touch the SRS airbag system compo- nents around the steering wheel and dash- board with bare hands right after deployment. Doing so can cause burns because the compo- nents can be very hot as a result of deployment.

The SRS frontal airbag is designed to deploy in the event of an accident involving a moderate to severe frontal collision. It is basically not designed to deploy in lesser frontal impacts because the necessary pro- tection can be achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, it is basically not designed to deploy in side or rear im- pacts or in roll-over accidents because deployment of the SRS frontal airbag would not help the occupant in those situations. The SRS airbag is designed to func- tion on a one-time-only basis.

SRS airbag deployment depends on the level of force

1-57

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

CONTINUED

experienced in the passenger compartment during a collision. That level differs from one type of collision to another, and it may have no bearing on the visible damage done to the vehicle itself.

Examples of accident in which the SRS frontal airbag will most likely deploy.

A head-on collision against a thick concrete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19 mph (20 to 30 km/h) or high- er activates the SRS frontal airbag. The SRS frontal airbag will also be activated when the vehicle is ex- posed to a frontal impact similar in fashion and magni- tude to the above-mentioned collision.

Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS frontal airbag will de- ploy.

UB1136BA

UB1137BA

1-58

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

The SRS frontal airbag may be activated when the ve- hicle sustains a hard impact in the undercarriage area from the road surface (such as when the vehicle plunges into a deep ditch, is severely bumped or knocked hard against an obstacle on the road such as a curb).

Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS frontal airbag is unlikely to deploy.

There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require SRS frontal airbag deployment. If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a telephone pole

UB1138BA

UB1161BA

1-59

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

CONTINUED

or sign pole, or if it slides under a trucks load bed, or if it sustains an oblique offset frontal impact, the SRS frontal airbag may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.

Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS frontal airbag will basically not deploy.

The SRS frontal airbag is basically not designed to de- ploy if the vehicle is struck from side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its side or roof, or if it is involved in a low-

UB1162BA

1-60

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

speed frontal collision.

1) First impact! 2) Second impact!!

In an accident where the vehicle is impacted more than once, the SRS frontal airbag deploys only once. Example: In the case of a double collision, first with an- other vehicle, then against a concrete wall in immedi- ate succession, once the SRS frontal airbag is activat- ed on the first impact, it will not be activated on the second.

SRS airbag system monitors

SRS airbag system warning light

A diagnostic system continually monitors the readi- ness of the SRS airbag system (including front seat- belt pretensioners) while the vehicle is being driven. The SRS airbag system warning light AIRBAG will show normal system operation by lighting for about 6 seconds when the ignition key is turned to the ON position.

The following components are monitored by the indi- cator:

Front sub sensor (Right hand side)

1

2 UB1143BB

UB4010EA

1-61

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

CONTINUED

Front sub sensor (Left hand side) Airbag control module (including impact sensors) Frontal airbag module (Drivers side) Frontal airbag module (Front passengers side) Seatbelt pretensioner (Drivers side) Seatbelt pretensioner (Front passengers side) All related wiring

If the warning light exhibits any of the following conditions, there may be a malfunction in the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbag sys- tem. Immediately take your vehicle to your nearest SUBARU dealer to have the system checked. Unless checked and properly re- paired, the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbag will not operate properly in the event of a collision, which may increase the risk of inju- ry.

Flashing or flickering of the indicator light. No illumination of the warning light when the

ignition switch is first turned to the ON posi- tion.

Continuous illumination of the warning light. Illumination of the warning light while driv-

ing.

SRS airbag system servicing

When discarding an airbag module or scrap- ping the entire vehicle damaged by a collision, consult your SUBARU dealer.

The SRS airbag has no user-serviceable parts. Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS airbag system. For required servicing of the SRS airbag, see your nearest SUBARU dealer. Tampering with or disconnecting the systems wiring could re- sult in accidental inflation of the SRS airbag or could make the system inoperative, which may result in serious injury. The wiring harnesses of the SRS airbag system are covered with yellow insulation and system connectors are yellow for easy identification.

If you need service or repair in areas listed be-

1-62

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

low, we recommend that you have an autho- rized SUBARU dealer perform the work. The SRS airbag control module, impact sensors and airbag modules are stored in these areas.

Under the center console Inside each front fender Steering wheel and column and nearby areas Top of the dashboard on front passengers

side and nearby areas Inside each center pillar

In the event that the SRS airbag is deployed, re- placement of the system should be performed only by an authorized SUBARU dealer. When the components of the SRS airbag system are re- placed, use only genuine SUBARU parts. To ensure their long-term reliability, the SRS airbags must be inspected by a SUBARU dealer ten years af- ter the date of manufacture, which is shown on the cer- tification label attached to the drivers door.

NOTE In the following cases, contact your SUBARU deal- er as soon as possible.

The front part of the vehicle was involved in an accident in which the SRS frontal airbags did not

deploy. The pad section of the steering wheel or front

passengers frontal airbag cover is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

Precautions against vehicle modifica- tion

To avoid accidental activation of the system or rendering the system inoperative, which may result in serious injury, no modifications should be made to any components or wiring of the SRS airbag system. This includes following modifications:

Installation of custom steering wheels Attachment of additional trim materials to

the dashboard Installation of additional electrical/electronic

equipment such as a mobile two-way radio on or near the SRS airbag system components and/or wiring is not advisable. This could inter- fere with proper operation of the SRS airbag system.

1-63

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

CONTINUED

Do not perform any of the following modifica- tions. Such modifications can interfere with proper operation of the SRS airbag system.

Attachment of any equipment (brush bar, winches, snow plow, skid plate, etc.) other than genuine SUBARU accessory parts to the front end.

Modification of the suspension system or front end structure.

Installation of a tire of different size and con- struction from the tires specified on the tire placard attached to the drivers door jamb.

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you want to in- stall any accessory parts to your vehicle.

2-1

2

Keys and doors

Keys ............................................................... 2-2 Key number ....................................................... 2-2

Door locks ..................................................... 2-3 Locking and unlocking from the outside ........ 2-3 Locking and unlocking from the inside .......... 2-4

Power door locking switches ...................... 2-5 Remote keyless entry system

(if equipped) .............................................. 2-7 Locking the doors ............................................. 2-8 Unlocking the doors ......................................... 2-8 Illuminated entry ............................................... 2-9 Vehicle finder function ..................................... 2-9 Sounding a panic alarm ................................... 2-9 Selecting audible signal operation .................. 2-9 Replacing the battery ....................................... 2-10 Replacing lost transmitters .............................. 2-11

Security system (if equipped) ..................... 2-15 System operation .............................................. 2-15 Arming the system ............................................ 2-15 Disarming the system ....................................... 2-17 Sounding a panic alarm ................................... 2-18 Valet mode ......................................................... 2-18 Passive arming .................................................. 2-18

Child safety locks ......................................... 2-21 Windows ........................................................ 2-22

Power windows ................................................. 2-22 Tailgate .......................................................... 2-25

License plate bracket ....................................... 2-26 Switchback door ........................................... 2-27

Switchback door indicator light ...................... 2-31

Moonroof (if equipped) ................................. 2-31 Tilting/sliding moonroof ................................... 2-32 Sun shade .......................................................... 2-33

2-2

Keys and doors

Keys and doorsKeys

1) Master key 2) Submaster key 3) Valet key 4) Key number plate

Three types of keys are provided for your vehicle. Master key, submaster key and valet key.

The master key and submaster key fit all locks on your vehicle.

Ignition switch Doors Glove box

The valet key fits only the ignition switch and door locks. You can keep glove box locked when you leave your vehicle and valet key at a parking facility.

NOTE If the key is attached to a keyholder or to a large bunch of other keys, centrifugal force may act on it as the vehicle moves, resulting in unwanted turning of the ignition switch. Also, if a large key- holder is attached to the key, your knees or hands may accidentally touch it in a way that turns the ig- nition switch.

Key number The key number is stamped on the metal plate at- tached to the key set. Write down the key number and keep it in another safe place, not in the vehicle. This number is needed to make a replacement key if you lose your key or lock it inside the vehicle.

1 2 3

4

HS2011BB

2-3

Keys and doors

CONTINUED

Door locks

Locking and unlocking from the out- side

To lock the door from the outside with the key, insert the key into the keyhole and turn the key toward the rear. To unlock the door, turn the key toward the front.

Lift the outside door handle to open an unlocked door.

Locking without the key 1) Rotate the lock lever rearward. 2) Close the door.

OM-U2394

1

2

UB2024BD

2-4

Keys and doors

Locking without the key 1) Push the power door locking switch forward. 2) Close the door.

To lock the door from the outside without the key, ro- tate the lock lever rearward and then close the door.

To lock the door from the outside using the power door locking switch, push the switch forward (LOCK side) and then close the door. In this case, all closed doors are locked at the same time.

Always make sure that all doors are locked before leaving your vehicle.

NOTE Make sure that you do not leave the key inside the vehicle before locking the doors from the outside without the key.

Locking and unlocking from the inside

Keep all doors locked when you drive, especial- ly when small children are in your vehicle. Along with the proper use of seatbelts and child restraints, locking the doors reduces the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in an accident. It also helps prevent passengers from falling out if a door is accidentally opened, and intrud- ers from unexpectedly opening doors and en- tering your vehicle.

1

2

UB2024CB

2-5

Keys and doors

CONTINUED

1) Lock 2) Unlock

To lock the door from the inside, rotate the lock lever rearward. To unlock the door from the inside, rotate the lock lever forward.

The red mark on the lock lever appears when the door is unlocked. Pull the inside door handle to open an unlocked door. Always make sure that all doors are closed and locked before starting to drive.

Power door locking switches

Drivers switch 1) Lock 2) Unlock

1 2

UB2001BC

1

2

UB2008CB

2-6

Keys and doors

Front passengers switch 1) Lock 2) Unlock

All doors can be locked and unlocked by the power door locking switches located at the drivers side and the front passengers side doors.

To lock the doors, push the switch forward. To unlock the doors, push the switch rearward.

When you close the doors after you set the door locks, the doors remain locked.

NOTE Make sure that you do not leave the key inside the

vehicle before locking the doors from the outside using power door locking switches.1

2

UB2009BB

2-7

Keys and doors

CONTINUED

Remote keyless entry system (if equipped)

Do not expose the transmitter to severe shocks, such as those experienced as a result of dropping or throwing.

Do not take the transmitter apart except when replacing the battery.

Do not get the transmitter wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth immediately.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Oper- ation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. Two transmitters are provided for your vehicle.

The keyless entry system has the following functions.

Locking and unlocking the doors without a key Sounding a panic alarm Arming and disarming the security system (if your

vehicle is equipped with an optional security system). See the next section Security system (if equipped) for detailed information.

The operable distance of the keyless entry system is approximately 30 feet (10 meters). However, this dis- tance will vary depending on environmental condi- tions. The systems operable distance will be shorter in areas near a facility or electronic equipment emitting strong radio waves such as a power plant, broadcast station, TV tower, or remote controller of home elec- tronic appliances.

The keyless entry system does not operate when the key is inserted in the ignition switch.

2-8

Keys and doors

A: LOCK/ARM button (Orange) Press to lock all doors. Press and Hold to activate panic alarm. Press three times in a five second period to use vehi- cle finder function.

B: UNLOCK/DISARM button (Blue) 1) Press once to Unlock drivers door. 2) Press a second time to Unlock all other doors.

C: LED

Locking the doors Briefly press the LOCK/ARM button (for less than two seconds) to lock all doors. An electronic chirp will sound once and the turn signal lights will flash once.

If any of the doors is not fully closed, an electronic chirp will sound five times and the turn signal lights will flash five times to alert you that the doors are not prop- erly closed. When you close the door, it will automati- cally lock.

NOTE If the LOCK/ALARM button is pressed for two seconds or longer, the panic alarm will sound. When locking the doors in normal circumstances, press the LOCK/ALARM button for less than two seconds. For details on the panic alarm, refer to Sounding a panic alarm.

Unlocking the doors Briefly press the UNLOCK/DISARM button (for less than two seconds) to unlock the drivers door. An elec- tronic chirp will sound twice and the turn signal lights will flash twice. To unlock all doors, briefly press the UNLOCK/DISARM button a second time within 5 seconds.

NOTE If the interval between the first and second press- es of the UNLOCK/DISARM button (for unlock- ing of all of the doors) is extremely short, the sys- tem may not respond.

C

A

B1 B2

HS2016BB

2-9

Keys and doors

CONTINUED

Illuminated entry The interior (dome) light will illuminate when the UN- LOCK/DISARM button is pressed. These lights stay illuminated for approximately 30 seconds if any of the doors is not opened. If the LOCK/ARM button is pressed before 30 sec- onds have elapsed, these lights will go out. Also, these lights will go out if the key is inserted in the ignition switch. The interior light switch must be set to the mid- dle position in order for this function to operate.

Vehicle finder function Use this function to find your vehicle parked among many vehicles in a large parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet (10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the LOCK/ARM button three times in a five-second peri- od will cause your vehicles horn to sound once and its turn signal lights to flash three times.

Sounding a panic alarm To activate the alarm, keep the LOCK/ARM button pressed for more than two seconds. The horn will sound and the turn signal lights will flash. To deactivate it, press the LOCK/ARM button or UNLOCK/DISARM button. Unless a button on the re- mote is pressed, the alarm will be deactivated after ap-

proximately 30 seconds.

Selecting audible signal operation Using an electronic chirp, the system will give you an audible signal when the doors lock and unlock. If de- sired, you may turn the audible signal off. To turn the audible signal off, unlock the doors by pushing UNLOCK/DISARM button and then simulta- neously depress LOCK/ARM and UNLOCK/DIS- ARM buttons for more than two seconds. An electron- ic chirp will sound twice and the turn signal lights will flash twice to inform you that the audible signal has been turned off. To turn the audible signal on, unlock the doors by pushing UNLOCK/DISARM button and then simulta- neously depress LOCK/ARM and UNLOCK/DIS- ARM buttons for more than two seconds. An electron- ic chirp will sound once and the turn signal lights will flash once to inform you that the audible signal has been turned on.

2-10

Keys and doors

Replacing the battery

Do not let dust, oil or water get on or in the transmitter when replacing the battery.

When the transmitter battery begins to get weak, transmitter range will begin to decrease and the LED will not illuminate. Replace the battery as soon as pos- sible. To replace the battery:

1. Remove the two screws on the back of the trans-

mitter case by using a Phillips screwdriver. 2. Separate the case. 3. Remove the old battery from the holder.

1) Positive (+) side facing up

4. Replace with a new battery (Type CR2032 or equivalent) making sure to install the new battery with the positive (+) side facing up. 5. Install the back half of the transmitter case. 6. Reinstall the two screws on the back of the trans- mitter case.

After the battery is replaced, the transmitter must be synchronized with the keyless entry systems control unit. Press either the LOCK/ARM or UN-

HS2017BA

1

HS2018BB

2-11

Keys and doors

CONTINUED

LOCK/DISARM button six times to synchronize the unit.

Replacing lost transmitters If you lose a transmitter or want to purchase additional transmitters (up to four can be programmed), you should re-program all of your transmitters for security reasons. It is recommended that you have your dealer program all of your transmitters into your system.

Programming the transmitters The keyless entry system is equipped with a special code learning feature that allows you to program new transmitter codes into the system or to delete old ones. The system can learn up to four unique transmit- ter codes. The four transmitter codes may be the same or different.

To enter the programming mode: 0

1. Press UNLOCK/DISARM button to disarm the se- curity system. (if your vehicle is equipped with the op- tional security system.)

HS2016CA

2-12

Keys and doors

2. Open the drivers door and sit in the drivers seat. 3. Close the drivers door.

1) ON 2) LOCK

4. Place the ignition key into the ignition switch and cycle the switch from LOCK to ON ten times within 15 seconds. Be sure to stop at the LOCK position. The horn will sound once to indicate that you are in the transmitter programming mode.

NOTE You must finish the next step (opening the drivers door) within 45 seconds of starting this proce- dures.

3 2

HS2019BD

12

HS2020BB

2-13

Keys and doors

CONTINUED

To program the transmitters: 0

1. Open the drivers door. 2. Close the drivers door.

1) Press any button.

3. Press and release any button on the transmitter that you wish to program into the system. The horn will sound twice to indicate that the transmitter has been programmed.

Any additional transmitters can also be programmed at this time. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for an additional transmitter.

To exit the programming mode: 1. After all of your transmitters are programmed, re- move the key from the ignition switch. The horn will sound three times to indicate that the

1

2

HS2019BE

1

HS2016DB

2-14

Keys and doors

system has exited the programming mode. 2. Make sure that the keyless entry system properly operates by operating each transmitter.

Deleting old transmitter codes The control unit of the keyless entry system has four memory locations to store transmitter codes, giving it the ability to operate with up to four transmitters. When you lose a transmitter, the lost transmitters code re- mains in the memory. For security reasons, lost trans- mitter codes should be deleted from the memory. To delete old transmitter codes, program four trans- mitter codes into the system. If you have only one cur- rent transmitter, program it four times. If you have two current transmitters, program each one twice. If you have three current transmitters, program two of them once and the third one twice. This process will leave only current transmitter codes in the systems memo- ry.

NOTE Make sure no one else is operating their keyless entry system within range of your vehicle when programming transmitters. If someone else were to operate their remote transmitter while you are programming your transmitters, it is possible that their transmitter code will be programmed into your system, allowing them unauthorized access

to your vehicle.

2-15

Keys and doors

CONTINUED

Security system (if equipped) The security system helps to protect your vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn sounds and the turn signal lights flash if someone attempts to break into your vehicle. The starter motor is also interrupted to prevent starting the vehicle without a key.

The system can be armed and disarmed with the re- mote transmitter. The system does not operate when the key is inserted into the ignition switch.

System operation The security system will give the following alarm indi- cations when triggered:

The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will sound intermittently. In addition, the starter motor will not operate.

The alarm automatically resets after 30 seconds; however, the alarm will reactivate if the vehicle is tam- pered with again. The alarm will continue for six times if any sensor continues to be activated.

The alarm is triggered by: Opening a door. Application of physical shock to the vehicle (e.g.

breaking glass or forced entry). Note that there are two alarm levels for shock: warning and alarm. In warning mode, the alarm detects lower level vibrations and triggers 2 warning chirps on the horn and two flashes on the lights as a deterrent to would be vandals. In alarm mode, higher levels of shock are detected and the system will go into full alarm.

Ignition switch being turned on while in armed state.

NOTE The alarm will not be triggered by opening the

switchback door. The alarm may not be triggered when the win-

dow is broken with a sharp-edged tool. With the valet mode selected, the security sys-

tem does not operate and the turn signal lights do not flash when the remote transmitter is used for locking and unlocking. The security system indicator light in the combi- nation meter flashes twice per second to show that the valet mode is selected. For details, refer to Valet mode in this section.

Arming the system To arm the system using remote transmitter

1. Close all windows and moonroof.

2-16

Keys and doors

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 3. Open the doors and get out of the vehicle. 4. Make sure that the engine hood and switchback door are locked. 5. Close all doors.

1) Press to Arm the system. 2) Press to Disarm the system.

1) Security system indicator light

6. Briefly press the LOCK/ARM button (for less than two seconds). All doors will lock, an electronic chirp will sound once, the turn signal lights will flash once and the indicator light starts flashing slowly (approxi- mately once every two seconds).

If any of the doors (except the switchback door) is not fully closed, an electronic chirp sounds five times, the turn signal lights flash five times to alert you that the doors are not properly closed. When you close the door, the system will automatically arm and doors will automatically lock.

1

2

HS2016EB

1

UB2033BB

2-17

Keys and doors

CONTINUED

To arm the system using power door locking switches

1. Close all windows and moonroof. 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 3. Open the doors and get out of the vehicle. 4. Make sure that the engine hood and switchback door are locked. 5. Close the doors but leave only the drivers door or the front passengers door open.

6. Push the power door locking switch forward (LOCK side) to set the door locks. 7. Close the door. An electronic chirp will sound once, the turn signal lights will flash once and the indicator light will start flashing slowly (approximately once ev-

ery two seconds) to inform you that the system has armed.

NOTE The system can be armed even if the engine hood, the windows, the switchback door and/or moon- roof are open. Always make sure that they are fully closed before arming the system.

Disarming the system Briefly press the UNLOCK/DISARM button (for less than two seconds) on the remote transmitter. The driv- ers door will unlock, an electronic chirp will sound twice, the turn signal lights will flash twice and the in- dicator light will go off.

To unlock all other doors, briefly press the UNLOCK/ DISARM button a second time.

Emergency disarming If you cannot disarm the system using the transmitter (i.e. the transmitter is lost, broken or the transmitter battery is too weak), you can disarm the system with- out using the transmitter.

To disarm the system: 1. Unlock the door with the key and then open the door.

6

7

UB2024CC

2-18

Keys and doors

2. The alarm will sound. 3. Insert the key into the ignition switch and cycle it from LOCK to ON three (3) times within 5 sec- onds.

Sounding a panic alarm To activate the alarm, keep the LOCK/ARM button pressed for more than two seconds. The horn will sound and the turn signal lights will flash. To deactivate it, press the LOCK/ARM button or UNLOCK/DISARM button. Unless a button on the remote is pressed, the alarm will be deactivated after approximately 30 seconds.

Valet mode When you choose the valet mode, the security system does not operate. In valet mode, the remote transmit- ter is used only for locking and unlocking the doors and panic activation.

To enter the valet mode, open the drivers door and keep the UNLOCK/DISARM button depressed for more than two seconds. The security system indica- tor light will continue to flash 2 times per second indi- cating that the system is in the valet mode.

To exit valet mode, open the drivers door and keep

the UNLOCK/DISARM button pressed for more than two seconds. The indicator will stop flashing.

Passive arming When passive arming mode has been programmed by the dealer, arming of the system is automatically ac- complished without using the remote transmitter. Note that in this mode, DOORS MUST BE MANUALLY LOCKED.

To enter the passive mode Since programming the passive arming mode is a complicated procedure, have it done by your nearest SUBARU dealer.

Arming the system

In passive mode, the system will automatically activate the alarm but WILL NOT automatically lock the doors. In order to lock the doors you must either lock them as indicated in step 4 be- low or with the key once they have been closed. Failure to lock the doors manually will result in a higher security risk.

2-19

Keys and doors

CONTINUED

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON.

1) ON 2) LOCK

2. Turn the ignition switch from ON to LOCK and remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Open the doors and get out of the vehicle. 4. Before closing the doors, lock all doors with the in- side door lock levers. 5. Close the doors. The system will automatically arm after one minute.

In the passive mode, the system can also be armed with the remote transmitter or with the power door locking switches. If the remote transmitter or power door lock switch is used to lock the vehicle, arming will take place immediately regardless of whether or not the passive mode has been selected.

Disarming the system To disarm the system, briefly press the UNLOCK/

1 2

HS2024BC

4

3

5

UB2024DC

2-20

Keys and doors

DISARM button on the transmitter.

Tripped sensor identification If an electronic chirp sounds four times and the turn signal lights flash four times when you disarm the sys- tem, this indicates that the alarm was triggered. The number of times the indicator light flashes indicates what sensor caused the alarm condition.

To enter identification mode: 1. Open the drivers door and leave it open. 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON twice. (LOCK ON LOCK ON LOCK) 3. The indicator light will start flashing.

The indicator light provides the following indications. Flashing once: Any door has been opened. Flashing three times: The impact sensor in the sys- tems unit has been activated. This may indicate that your vehicle has been shocked or tampered with by some outside force and/or unauthorized person. Flashing four times: The ignition switch has been turned on or the battery has been disconnected.

NOTE The battery must be reconnected before the indi- cator light will flash. To exit this mode, close the door and turn the ignition

switch to ON.

2-21

Keys and doors

CONTINUED

Child safety locks

Always use the child safety lock whenever a child rides in the rear seat. Serious injury could result if a child accidentally opened the door and fell out.

1) Lock 2) Unlock

Each rear door has a child safety lock that prevents

the doors from being opened even if the inside door handle is pulled.

When the child safety lock lever is in the lock position, the door cannot be opened from inside regardless of the position of the inner door handle lock lever. The door can only be opened from the outside.

1

2

UB2002BB

2-22

Keys and doors

Windows

Power windows

To avoid serious personal injury caused by en- trapment, you must do the following.

When operating the power windows, be ex- tremely careful to prevent anyones fingers, arms, neck or head from being caught in the window.

Always lock the passengers windows using the lock switch when children are riding in the vehicle.

Before leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the ignition switch for safety and never allow an unattended child to remain in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the power window.

The power windows operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Drivers side switches

1) Lock switch 2) For drivers window 3) For rear left passengers window 4) For front passengers window 5) For rear right passengers window

All door windows can be controlled by the power win- dow switch cluster at the driver side door.

1

2

3

4

5

UB2008BB

2-23

Keys and doors

CONTINUED

Operating the drivers window

1) Lock 2) Unlock 3) Close 4) Open 5) Automatically open

To open: Push the switch down lightly and hold it. The window will open as long as the switch is held. This switch also has a one-touch auto down feature that allows the window to be opened fully without hold- ing the switch. Push the switch down until it clicks and release it, and the window will fully open. To stop the window half-

way, pull the switch up lightly.

To close: Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The window will close as long as the switch is held.

Operating the passengers windows To open the passengers windows, push the appropri- ate switch down and hold it until the window reaches the desired position. To close the window, pull the switch up and hold it until it reaches the desired posi- tion.

Locking the passengers windows To lock the passengers windows, push the lock switch. When the lock switch is in the LOCK position, the passengers windows cannot be opened or closed.

1

2 3

4

5

3

4

UB2008DB

2-24

Keys and doors

Passengers side switches

Front passengers window switch 1) Open 2) Close

Rear passengers window switches 1) Open 2) Close

To open the window, push the switch down and hold it until the window reaches the desired position. To close the window, pull the switch up and hold it until the window reaches the desired position.

When the lock switch on the power window switch cluster, located on the drivers side door, is in the LOCK position, the passengers windows cannot be operated with the passengers switches.

1

2

UB2009CB

2

1 UB2005BB

2-25

Keys and doors

CONTINUED

Tailgate

Keep the tailgate closed when the vehicle is moving. If you must drive with the tailgate open, use the optional SUBARU Bed Extender and place the License Plate Bracket at its fully lowered/open position. Cargo must not stick out beyond the Extender. Otherwise a danger- ous road hazard or personal injury could result.

Before opening the tailgate, remove any object on the

upper surface of the rear bumper to avoid damaging the tailgate. To open the tailgate, lift up on its handle while pulling the tailgate toward you. The support cables hold the tailgate open.

See Loading your vehicle section in Chapter 8 for precautions in loading cargo.

To close the tailgate, firmly push it upward until it latch- es.

After you put the tailgate back up, pull it back toward you to be sure it latches securely.

UB2050BA

2-26

Keys and doors

License plate bracket

When you drive with the tailgate open and with the bed extender used, the license plate bracket must be placed at its fully lowered/open position to make the rear license plate visible.

In order to avoid damaging the license plate bracket or the bumper, the license plate bracket must be in its fully lowered/open position be- fore the tailgate is lowered.

To use the license plate bracket at its lowered/open

UB2051BA

UBB096BA

UB2053BA

2-27

Keys and doors

CONTINUED

position, push the two release buttons and pull the li- cense plate bracket up until it clicks. And then open the tailgate.

If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer hitch, remove the ball mount from the hitch receiver tube before opening the tailgate. Failure to follow this procedure could result in damage to the license plate bracket.

When you drive with the tailgate closed, the license plate bracket must be restored to its original position. To restore the license plate bracket to its original posi- tion, close the tailgate, and then pull the license plate bracket down until it clicks.

If the license plate bracket is hard to be restored to its original position, mud may have accumulated on the back of the license plate bracket. Remove accumulat- ed mud before pulling the license bracket down.

In order to avoid damaging the license plate bracket or the bumper, the license plate bracket must be restored to its original position until it clicks.

Switchback door

With the switchback door open, you can increase the usable cargo space and can carry long objects.

Secure long objects properly to prevent them from sliding forward and causing serious injury during a sudden stop or sharp cornering. Tie long objects down with a rope or something equivalent.

UB2052BA

2-28

Keys and doors

Pay attention that your fingers do not get pinched with the switchback door when open- ing and closing it.

To open the switchback door:

1. Pull up the rear seat cushion. Refer to Rear seats section in Chapter 1 for operating details.

1) Red A) LOCK B) UNLOCK

UB1172BA

1

A B

UB1112CB

2-29

Keys and doors

CONTINUED

2. Unlock the rear seatback by pulling up on the knob and fold down the rear seatback. Confirm that the pins located at the bottom of the seat cushion is inserted into the slots at the top of the seatback.

3. Fold down the switchback door by releasing the

UB1113BA UB1114BA

UB1115BA

2-30

Keys and doors

lock knob. Then you can have a flat and larger cargo space. 4. Place the long object on the cargo bed through the switchback door opening. Be sure all items are secured in place.

NOTE When opening the switchback door in snow, ac-

cumulated snow in the cargo bed may enter the passenger compartment which could result in dampness in the passenger compartment. Prior to opening of the switchback door, brush off the snow completely.

Close the switchback door whenever you leave the vehicle to prevent unauthorized entry.

The switchback door should be kept complete- ly shut when the vehicle is idling in an enclosed or partially enclosed area to avoid the possibil- ity of exhaust gas entering the passenger com- partment. Engine exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is extremely dangerous, or even lethal if in- haled. To ensure that exhaust gas cannot pen- etrate the switchback door, make certain that there are no obstructions between the door and

the vehicle body that prevent the door from ful- ly closing or that crimp the weather strip around the door.

To close the switchback door, firmly push it upward until it latches. Return the seatback and seat cushion to their original positions and make sure they are securely locked.

After returning the seatback to its original posi- tion, make sure that the rear seatback has been securely locked. When securely locked, the red marks on the locking knobs are no longer visi- ble.

2-31

Keys and doors

CONTINUED

Switchback door indicator light

While the ignition switch is in the ON position, the switchback door indicator light comes on when the switchback door is open. While the ignition switch is in the LOCK or ACC po- sition, the switchback door indicator light flashes for about 20 seconds and goes off when the switchback door is open.

Moonroof (if equipped)

Never let anyones hands, arms, head or any objects protrude from the moonroof. A person could be seriously injured if the vehicle stops suddenly or turns sharply or if the vehicle is in- volved in an accident.

To avoid serious personal injury caused by en- trapment, you must do the following.

Before closing the moonroof, make sure that no ones hands, arms, neck, head or other ob- jects will be accidentally caught in the moon- roof.

Before leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the ignition switch for safety and never allow an unattended child to remain in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the moonroof.

Do not sit on the edge of the open moonroof.

UB7023EA

2-32

Keys and doors

Do not operate the moonroof if falling snow or extremely cold conditions have caused it to freeze shut.

Tilting/sliding moonroof The moonroof has both tilting and sliding functions. The moonroof operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

1) Open/Close switch 2) Tilt switch

To raise or lower the moonroof The tilting function will only operate when the moon-

roof is fully closed.

Push the rear side of the Tilt switch to raise the moonroof. Push the front side of the Tilt switch to lower the moonroof. Release the switch after the moonroof has been raised or has been lowered completely. Pushing the switch continuously may cause damage to the moon- roof.

To open or close the moonroof Push the Open/Close switch rearward to open the moonroof. The sun shade will be also opened together with the moonroof. Push the Open/Close switch forward to close the moonroof. The moonroof will stop halfway if you con- tinue to press on the switch. Release the switch once and push it again to close the moonroof completely.

After washing the vehicle or after it rains, wipe away water on the roof prior to opening the moonroof to pre- vent water drops from falling into the passenger com- partment.

NOTE If the moonroof cannot be closed through the switch operation because of system failure, it can

1

2 UB2034BB

2-33

Keys and doors

CONTINUED

be closed manually using a hex-headed wrench. For the procedure, refer to Moonroof if the moonroof cannot be closed in Chapter 9 In case of emergency.

Sun shade

The sun shade can be slid forward or backward by hand while the moonroof is closed. If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade also moves back.

UG2510BA

3-1

3

Instruments and controls

Ignition switch .............................................. 3-2 LOCK .................................................................. 3-2 ACC .................................................................... 3-3 ON ....................................................................... 3-3 START ................................................................ 3-4 Key reminder chime .......................................... 3-4 Ignition switch light (if equipped) .................... 3-4 Key interlock release (AT vehicles) ................. 3-4

Hazard warning flasher ................................ 3-5 Meters and gauges ....................................... 3-6

Speedometer ..................................................... 3-6 Odometer/Trip meter ........................................ 3-6 Tachometer ........................................................ 3-7 Outside temperature indicator (if equipped) .. 3-7 Fuel gauge ......................................................... 3-8 Temperature gauge ........................................... 3-8

Warning and indicator lights ....................... 3-9 Seatbelt warning light and chime .................... 3-9 SRS airbag system warning light .................... 3-10 CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction

indicator lamp ................................................. 3-10 Charge warning light ........................................ 3-11 Oil pressure warning light ................................ 3-12 AT OIL TEMPerature warning light

(AT vehicles) ................................................... 3-12 ABS warning light ............................................. 3-12 Brake system warning light ............................. 3-13 Door ajar warning lights ................................... 3-14 Switchback door indicator light ...................... 3-14 Low fuel warning light ...................................... 3-14 All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT vehicles) ... 3-14

Security system status indicator light (if equipped) .................................................... 3-15

Selector lever position indicator (AT vehicles) ................................................... 3-15

Gear position indicator (Turbo-AT vehicles) .. 3-16 Turn signal indicator lights .............................. 3-16 High beam indicator light ................................. 3-16 Cargo lamp indicator light ............................... 3-16 Cruise control set indicator light .................... 3-16

Clock .............................................................. 3-17 Light control switch ...................................... 3-18

Headlights ......................................................... 3-18 High/low beam change (dimmer) .................... 3-19 Headlight flasher ............................................... 3-19 Daytime running light system ......................... 3-20

Turn signal lever ........................................... 3-20 Illumination brightness control ................... 3-21 Parking light switch ...................................... 3-22 Fog light button ............................................. 3-23 Wiper and washer ......................................... 3-23

Windshield wiper and washer switches ......... 3-25 Rear window defogger button ..................... 3-26 Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped) ........ 3-27 Mirrors ............................................................ 3-28

Inside mirror ...................................................... 3-28 Outside mirrors ................................................. 3-30

Tilt steering wheel ......................................... 3-33 Horn ................................................................ 3-34

3-2

Instruments and controls

Instruments and controlsIgnition switch

Never turn the ignition switch to LOCK while the vehicle is being driven or towed because that will lock the steering wheel, preventing steering control. And when the engine is turned off, it takes a much greater effort than usual to steer.

The ignition switch has four positions: LOCK, ACC, ON and START.

NOTE Keep the ignition switch in the LOCK position

when the engine is not running. Using electrical accessories for a long time with

the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position can cause the battery to go dead. If the ignition switch will not move from the LOCK position to the ACC position, turn the steering wheel slightly to the left and right as you turn the ignition switch.

If the key is attached to a keyholder or to a large bunch of other keys, centrifugal force may act on it as the vehicle moves, resulting in unwanted turning of the ignition switch. Also, if a large key- holder is attached to the key, your knees or hands may accidentally touch it in a way that turns the ig- nition switch.

LOCK The key can only be inserted or removed in this posi- tion. The ignition switch will lock the steering wheel when you remove the key. If turning the key is difficult, turn the steering wheel slightly to the right and left as you turn the key.

UB4000CA

3-3

Instruments and controls

CONTINUED

Automatic transmission vehicles The key can be turned from ACC to LOCK only when the selector lever is in the P position.

Manual transmission vehicles

The key can be turned from ACC to LOCK only when the key is pushed in while turning it.

ACC In this position the electrical accessories (radio, ciga- rette lighter socket, etc.) can be used.

ON This is the normal operating position after the engine

HS3015BA

HS2020CA

HS2020DA

3-4

Instruments and controls

is started.

START

Do not turn the ignition switch to the START position while the engine is running.

The engine is started in this position. The starter cranks the engine to start it. When the key is released (after the engine has started), the key automatically returns to the ON position.

Key reminder chime The reminder chime sounds when the drivers door opens and the key is in the LOCK or ACC positions. The chime stops when the key is removed from the ig- nition switch.

Ignition switch light (if equipped) For easy access to the ignition switch in the dark, the ignition switch light comes on when drivers door is opened. The light remains on for 10 seconds and goes out after drivers door is closed or if the key is turned

to the ON position.

Key interlock release (AT vehicles) If the key can not be turned to the LOCK position even when the selector lever is in the P position: 1. Take out the screwdriver from the tool bag.

2. Remove the cover under the steering column using a Phillips screwdriver.

HS3016BA

3-5

Instruments and controls

CONTINUED

3. Turn the ignition key while pressing the key inter- lock release lever.

Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU dealer im- mediately to have the key interlock system repaired.

Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher is used to warn other driv- ers when you have to park your vehicle under emer- gency conditions. The hazard warning flasher works with the ignition switch in any position.

To turn on the hazard warning flasher, push the haz- ard warning button on the instrument panel. To turn off the flasher, push the button again.

NOTE When the hazard warning flasher is on, the turn signals do not work.

UG3025BA

UB8002BA

3-6

Instruments and controls

Meters and gauges

Speedometer The speedometer shows the vehicle speed.

Odometer/Trip meter

To ensure safety, do not attempt to change the function of the indicator during driving, as an accident could result.

1) Trip meter 2) Odometer

Odometer The odometer shows the total distance that the vehicle has been driven.

1

2 UB3026BB

3-7

Instruments and controls

CONTINUED

Double trip meter

1) A trip meter 2) B trip meter

The trip meter shows the distance that the vehicle has been driven since you last set it to zero. To change the mode indication, briefly push the knob. Each press of the knob changes the function alter- nately.

To set the trip meter to zero, select either the A trip or B trip meter and push the knob and keep it pushed for

more than 1 second.

NOTE If the connection between the combination meter and battery is broken for any reason such as vehi- cle maintenance or fuse replacement, the data re- corded on the trip meter will be lost.

Tachometer

Do not operate the engine with the pointer of the tachometer in the red zone. In this range, fuel injection will be cut by the engine control module to protect the engine from overrevving. The engine will resume running normally after the engine speed is reduced below the red zone.

The tachometer shows the engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute.

Outside temperature indicator (if equipped)

The outside temperature indicator shows the outside

1

2

UB3027BB

A trip meter B trip meter

3-8

Instruments and controls

temperature in a range from 22 to 122F (30 to 50C).

The indicator can give a false reading under any of the following conditions:

When there is too much sun. During idling; while running at low speeds in a traffic

jam; when the engine is restarted immediately follow- ing a shutdown.

When the actual outside temperature falls outside the specified indicator range.

Fuel gauge The fuel gauge shows the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the tank. The gauge does not return to E even though the ig- nition switch is in the ACC or LOCK position.

The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning or acceleration due to fuel level movement in the tank.

Temperature gauge

If the pointer exceeds the normal operating range, safely stop the vehicle as soon as possi-

ble. See In case of emergency in chapter 9.

1) Normal operating range

The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temper- ature when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The coolant temperature will vary in accordance with the outside temperature and driving conditions.

We recommend that you drive moderately until the pointer of the temperature gauge reaches near the middle of the range. Engine operation is optimum with

1

UB2012BB

3-9

Instruments and controls

CONTINUED

the engine coolant at this temperature range and high revving operation when the engine is not warmed up enough should be avoided.

Warning and indicator lights Several of the warning and indicator lights come on momentarily and then go out when the ignition switch is initially turned to the ON position. This permits checking the operation of the bulbs. Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The following lights come on:

Seatbelt warning light SRS airbag system warning light CHECK ENGINE warning light / Malfunction indica- tor lamp Charge warning light Oil pressure warning light AT OIL temperature warning light (AT vehicles) ABS warning light Brake system warning light All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT vehicles)

If any lights fail to come on, it indicates a burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the corresponding system. Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer for repair.

Seatbelt warning light and chime When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the seatbelt warning light will come on and the remind-

3-10

Instruments and controls

er chime will sound for about six seconds to remind the driver to fasten the seatbelt. The seatbelt warning light remains on for about six seconds and turns off automatically after six seconds. The seatbelt reminder chime will turn off when the drivers side seatbelt is buckled or it will turn off auto- matically after six seconds.

SRS airbag system warning light

If the warning light exhibits any of the following conditions, there may be a malfunction in the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbag sys- tem. Immediately take your vehicle to your nearest SUBARU dealer to have the system checked. Unless checked and properly re- paired, the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbag will not operate properly in the event of a collision, which may increase the risk of inju- ry.

Flashing or flickering of the indicator light. No illumination of the warning light when the

ignition switch is first turned to the ON posi- tion.

Continuous illumination of the warning light. Illumination of the warning light while driv-

ing.

When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the SRS airbag system warning light will come on for about six seconds and go out. This shows the SRS frontal airbag and seatbelt pretensioners are in normal operation.

CHECK ENGINE warning light/ Malfunction indicator lamp

If the CHECK ENGINE light comes on while you are driving, have your vehicle checked/repaired by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could cause serious damage, which may not be covered by your vehicles warranty.

If this light comes on steadily or blinks while the engine

3-11

Instruments and controls

CONTINUED

is running, it may indicate that there is a problem or po- tential problem somewhere in the emission control system.

If the light comes on steadily: If the light comes on steadily while driving or does not go out after the engine starts, an emission control sys- tem malfunction has been detected. You should have your vehicle checked by an autho- rized SUBARU dealer immediately.

NOTE This light also comes on when the fuel filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.

If you have recently refueled your vehicle, the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indica- tor lamp coming on could be a loose or missing fuel fill- er cap. Remove the cap and retighten it until it clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the cap will not make the CHECK EN- GINE warning light turn off immediately. It may take several driving trips. If the light does not go out, take your vehicle to your authorized SUBARU dealer im- mediately.

If the light is blinking: If the light is blinking while driving, an engine misfire condition has been detected which may damage the

emission control system. To prevent serious damage to the emission control system, you should do the following:

Reduce vehicle speed. Avoid hard acceleration. Avoid steep uphill grades. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possible. Stop towing a trailer as soon as possible.

The CHECK ENGINE warning light may stop blinking and come on steadily after several driving trips. You should have your vehicle checked by an authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.

Charge warning light If this light comes on when the engine is running, it may indicate that the charging system is not working properly.

If the light comes on while driving or does not go out after the engine starts, stop the engine at the first safe opportunity and check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose, broken or if the belt is in good condition but the light remains on, contact your nearest SUBARU deal- er immediately.

3-12

Instruments and controls

Oil pressure warning light

Do not operate the engine with the oil pressure warning light on. This may cause serious en- gine damage.

If this light comes on when the engine is running, it may indicate that the engine oil pressure is low and the lubricating system is not working properly. If the light comes on while driving or does not go out after the engine starts, stop the engine at the first safe opportunity and check the engine oil level. If the oil lev- el is low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is at the proper level but the light remains on, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.

AT OIL TEMPerature warning light (AT vehicles)

The AT oil temperature warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and goes out after about two seconds. If this light comes on when the engine is running, it may indicate that the automatic transmission fluid tem- perature is too hot.

If the light comes on while driving, it is unnecessary to stop the vehicle, but avoid driving up steep grades or in stop and go traffic.

Automatic transmission control system warn- ing

If the light flashes after the engine starts, it may indi- cate that the automatic transmission control system is not working properly. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer for service immediately.

ABS warning light The ABS warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and goes out after about two seconds. This is an indication that the ABS system is working properly.

If the warning light behaves as follows, the ABS system may not work properly. When the warning light is on, the ABS function shuts down; however, the conventional brake system continues to operate normally.

The warning light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

(U.S.) (Canada)

3-13

Instruments and controls

CONTINUED

The warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, but it does not go out even when the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 8 mph (12 km/h).

The warning light comes on during driving.

If these occur, have the ABS system repaired at the first available opportunity by your SUBARU dealer.

NOTE If the warning light behavior is as described be- low, the ABS system may be considered normal.

The warning light comes on right after the en- gine is started but goes out immediately, remain- ing off.

The warning light remains on after the engine has been started, but it goes out when the vehicle speed reaches about 8 mph (12 km/h).

The warning light comes on during driving, but it goes out immediately and remains off. When driving with an insufficient battery voltage such as when the engine is jump started, the ABS warning light may come on. This is due to the low battery volt- age and does not indicate a malfunction. When the battery becomes fully charged, the light will go out.

Brake system warning light

Driving with the brake system warning light on is dangerous. This indicates your brake sys- tem may not be working properly. If the light re- mains on, have the brakes inspected by a SUBARU dealer immediately.

If at all in doubt about whether the brakes are operating properly, do not drive the vehicle. Have your vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.

This light has the following two functions:

Parking brake warning The light comes on with the parking brake applied while the ignition switch is in the ON position. It goes out when the parking brake is fully released.

Brake fluid level warning This light comes on when the brake fluid level has dropped to near the MIN level of the brake fluid res- ervoir with the ignition switch in the ON position and with the parking brake fully released.

(U.S.) (Canada)

3-14

Instruments and controls

If the brake system warning light should come on while driving (with the parking brake fully released and with the ignition switch positioned in ON), it could be an indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn brake pads. If this occurs, immediately stop the vehicle at the near- est safe place and check the brake fluid level. If the flu- id level is below the MIN mark in the reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Have the vehicle towed to the near- est SUBARU dealer for repair.

Door ajar warning lights The specific door ajar warning light comes on if any door is not fully closed.

Always make sure this light is out before you start to drive.

Switchback door indicator light While the ignition switch is in the ON position, the switchback door indicator light comes on when the switchback door is open. While the ignition switch is in the LOCK or ACC po- sition, the switchback door indicator light flashes for about 20 seconds and goes off when the switchback door is open.

Low fuel warning light The low fuel warning light comes on when the tank is nearly empty about 2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, or 2.2 Imp gal). It only operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

NOTE This light does not go out unless the tank is re- plenished up to an internal fuel quantity of about 3.7 US gal (14 liters, 3.1 Imp gal).

Promptly put fuel in the tank whenever the low fuel warning light comes on. If the engine mis- fired as a result of an empty tank, resulting cat- alyzer damage could cause damage to the tur- bocharger.

All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT vehicles)

The All-Wheel Drive warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and goes out after about two seconds.

3-15

Instruments and controls

CONTINUED

Turbo models This light flashes if the vehicle is driven with tires of dif- ferent diameters or with the air pressure excessively low in any of its tires.

Non-turbo models This light comes on when All-Wheel Drive is disen- gaged and the drive mechanism is switched to Front Wheel Drive for maintenance or similar purposes. This light flashes if the vehicle is driven with tires of dif- ferent diameters or with the air pressure excessively low in any of its tires.

Continued driving with the AWD warning light flashing can lead to powertrain damage. If the AWD warning light flashes, promptly park in a safe place then check whether all four tires are the same diameter and whether any of the tires has a puncture or has lost air pressure for some other reason.

Security system status indicator light (if equipped)

This light is found at the bottom center of the combina- tion meter panel. On vehicles equipped with a security system, it blinks to show the driver the operational status of the security system. For detailed information, refer to the Security system (if equipped) in Chapter 2.

Selector lever position indicator (AT vehicles)

This indicator shows the position of the selector lever.

UB3025AA

3-16

Instruments and controls

Gear position indicator (Turbo-AT ve- hicles)

When the selector lever is in the manual gate, this in- dicator shows the currently selected gear.

Turn signal indicator lights These lights show the operation of the turn signal or lane change signal. If the indicator lights do not blink or blink rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Refer to the Replacing bulbs section in chapter 11.

High beam indicator light This light shows that the headlights are in the high beam mode. This indicator light also comes on when the headlight flasher is operated.

Cargo lamp indicator light

Do not switch on the cargo lamp while driving to avoid distracting other drivers.

This indicator light shows that the cargo lamp comes on.

Cruise control set indicator light Non-turbo models

The light comes on when vehicle speed has been set.

Turbo models The cruise set indicator light comes on when the igni- tion switch is turned to the ON position and goes out after about three seconds. The light comes on when vehicle speed has been set.

UBS094AA

3-17

Instruments and controls

CONTINUED

NOTE If you move the cruise control lever while turn-

ing the ignition switch ON, the cruise control function is deactivated and the cruise control set indicator light flashes. To reactivate the cruise control function, turn the ignition switch back to the ACC or LOCK position, and then turn it again to the ON position.

If this indicator light and the indicator light flash simultaneously during driving, have the vehicle checked by your nearest SUBARU dealer.

Clock

To set the time, turn the setting knob clockwise to ad- vance and counterclockwise to retard the time.

To ensure safety, do not attempt to set the time while driving, as an accident from inadequate attention to the road could result.

UB2013BA

3-18

Instruments and controls

Light control switch

To prevent battery discharge resulting from ac- cidentally leaving your lights on when your ve- hicle is parked, the light switch operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON posi- tion. In any other position, the vehicles lights will be out. If you park your vehicle on a roadside at night, use the hazard warning flasher to alert the other drivers.

The light switch operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Headlights

To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on the end of the turn signal lever.

first position Parking lights, instrument panel illumination, tail lights and license plate light are on.

second position Headlights, parking lights, instrument panel illumina- tion, tail lights, and license plate light are on.

HS3026BA

3-19

Instruments and controls

CONTINUED

High/low beam change (dimmer)

To change from low beam to high beam, push the turn signal lever forward. When the headlights are on high beam, the high beam indicator light on the in- strument panel is also on. To switch back to low beam, pull the lever back to the detent position.

Headlight flasher

Do not hold the lever in the flashing position for more than just a few seconds.

To flash the headlights, pull the lever toward you and then release it. The high beam will stay on for as long as you hold the lever. The headlight flasher works even though the lighting switch is in the OFF posi- tion.

When the headlights are on high beam, the high beam

HS3026CA HS3026DA

3-20

Instruments and controls

indicator light on the instrument panel also comes on.

Daytime running light system

The tail lights, parking lights, and side marker lights are not turned on by the daytime running light system. The light switch must always be turned to the position when it is dark outside.

The low beam headlights will automatically come on at reduced brightness when the engine has started, un- der the following conditions:

The parking brake is fully released. The light switch is in the OFF or position.

Turn signal lever

1) Right turn 2) Left turn

To activate the right turn signal, push the turn signal le- ver up. To activate the left turn signal, push the turn signal lever down. When the turn is finished, the lever will return automatically. If the lever does not return af- ter cornering, return the lever to the neutral position by hand.

To signal a lane change, push the turn signal lever up or down slightly and hold it during the lane change. The turn signal indicator lights will flash in the direction

1

2

HS3027BC

3-21

Instruments and controls

CONTINUED

of the turn or lane change. The lever will return auto- matically to the neutral position when you release it.

Illumination brightness control

1) Brighten 2) Darken

When the lighting switch is in the or position, you can adjust brightness of the instrument panel illumination for better visibility. To brighten, turn the control dial counterclockwise. To darken, turn the control dial clockwise.

1

2

HS3028BB

3-22

Instruments and controls

Parking light switch

The parking light switch operates regardless of the ig- nition switch position.

By pushing the front end of this switch, following lights will come on. Parking lights Front and rear side marker lights Tail lights License plate lights

To turn off, push the rear end of the parking light switch. Avoid leaving these lights on for a long time because

that will run down the battery.

P

HS3029BA

3-23

Instruments and controls

CONTINUED

Fog light button

The fog lights operate only when the headlights are on low beam. Push the fog light button to turn the fog lights on. Press the button again to turn them off. The indicator light located on the button will illuminate when the fog lights are on.

Wiper and washer

In freezing weather, do not use the windshield washer until the windshield is sufficiently warmed by the defroster. Otherwise the washer fluid can freeze on the windshield, blocking your view.

Do not operate the washer continuously for more than ten seconds, or when the washer flu- id tank is empty. This may cause overheating of the washer motor. Check the washer fluid level frequently, such as at fuel stops.

Do not operate the wipers when the wind- shield or rear window is dry. This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield or rear window, always use the windshield washer.

In freezing weather, be sure that the wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield or rear window before switching on the wipers. At-

UB3030BA

3-24

Instruments and controls

tempting to operate the wiper with the blades frozen to the window glass could cause not only the wiper blades to be damaged but also the wiper motor to burn out. If the wiper blade is frozen to the window glass, be sure to oper- ate the defroster, wiper deicer (if equipped) or rear window defogger before turning on the wiper.

If the wipers stop during operation because of ice or some other obstruction on the window, the wiper motor could burn out even if the wiper switch is turned off. If this occurs, promptly stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and clean the window glass to allow proper wiper operation.

Use clean water if windshield washer fluid is unavailable. In areas where water freezes in winter, use SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid or the equivalent. (See Windshield washer flu- id section in chapter 11.) Also, when driving the vehicle when there are freezing temperatures, use non-freezing type wiper blades.

Do not clean the wiper blades with gasoline or a solvent, such as paint thinner or benzene. This will cause deterioration of the wiper

blades.

NOTE The wiper operates only when the ignition

switch is in the ON or ACC position. Clean your wiper blades and window glass peri-

odically with a washer solution to prevent streak- ing, and to remove accumulations of road salt or road film. Keep the washer button depressed at least for 1 second so that washer solution will be sprinkled all over the windshield or rear window.

Grease, wax, insects or other material on the windshield or the wiper blades results in jerky wip- er operation and streaking on the glass. If you can- not remove those streaks after operating the washer or if the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer surface of the windshield or rear window and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning, rinse the window glass and wiper blades with clean water. The glass is clean if no beads form on the glass when you rinse with wa- ter.

If you cannot eliminate the streaking even after following this procedure, replace the wiper blades with new ones. Refer to the Replacement of wind-

3-25

Instruments and controls

CONTINUED

shield wiper blades section (chapter 11) for re- placement instructions.

Windshield wiper and washer switches Windshield wipers

1) MIST

To turn the wipers on, push the wiper control lever down.

: Intermittent LO: Low speed HI: High speed

To turn the wipers off, return the lever to the OFF po-

sition.

Mist (for a single wipe) For a single wipe of the wipers, pull the lever toward you. The wipers operate until you release the lever.

Wiper intermittent time control (if equipped)

When the wiper switch is in the position, turn the dial to adjust the operating interval of the wiper. The operating interval can be adjusted continuously from the shortest interval to the longest. Two click stop positions of the dial may help you to aim at your desired interval.

PULLL

MIST

OFF

INT

LO

HI

1

UB3022BB

PULLL MIST

UB3024BA

3-26

Instruments and controls

Washer

To wash the windshield, push the washer button at the end of the wiper control lever. The washer fluid sprays until you release the washer button. The wipers oper- ate while you push the button.

Rear window defogger button

Do not use sharp instruments or window cleaner containing abrasives to clean the inner surface of the rear window. They may damage the conductors printed on the window.

To prevent the battery from being dis- charged, do not operate the defogger continu- ously for any longer than necessary.

The rear window defogger operates only when the ig- nition switch is in the ON position. The rear window defogger button is located on the cli- mate control panel.

The defogger will automatically shut off after about 15 minutes. If the window clears before that time, push the button to turn it off. It also turns off when the igni- tion switch is turned to the ACC or LOCK position. If defrosting or defogging is desired when you restart your vehicle, you have to push the button to turn it on again.

PULLL

MIST

UB3023BA

3-27

Instruments and controls

CONTINUED

To turn on the defogger, push the button. To turn it off, push the button again. The indicator light located on the button lights up while the rear window defogger is operating.

Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)

To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not operate the windshield wiper deicer con- tinuously for any longer than necessary.

The windshield wiper deicer operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Before turning on the windshield wiper deicer, remove any snow from the windshield. To turn on the wind-

UB3028BA

UB3029BA

3-28

Instruments and controls

shield wiper deicer, push the button. The indicator light located on the button lights up while the windshield wiper deicer is operating. The windshield wiper deicer will automatically shut off after about 15 minutes. If the wiper blades have been deiced completely before that time, push the button to turn it off. It also turns off when the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or LOCK position. If deicing is not complete when you restart your vehicle, you have to push the button to turn the deicer on again.

Mirrors Always check that the inside and outside mirrors are properly adjusted before you start driving.

Inside mirror

1) Tab

The inside mirror has a day and night position. Pull the tab at the bottom of the mirror toward you for the night position. Push it away for the day position. The night position reduces glare from headlights.

1 HS3036BB

3-29

Instruments and controls

CONTINUED

Auto-dimming mirror/compass (if equipped)

1) Left button 2) Auto dimming indicator 3) Photosensor 4) Right button

The auto-dimming mirror/compass has an anti-glare feature which automatically reduces glare coming from headlights of vehicles behind you. It also con- tains a built-in compass.

By pressing and releasing the left button, the auto- matic dimming function is toggled on or off. When the automatic dimming function is on, the auto dimming in- dicator light (green) located to the right of the button

will illuminate. By pressing and releasing the right button, the com-

pass display is toggled on or off. When the compass is on, an illuminated compass reading will appear in the lower part of the mirror.

Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode, the mirror sur- face turns bright if the transmission is shifted into re- verse. This is to ensure good rearward visibility during reversing.

Photosensors

The mirror has a photosensor attached on both the front and back sides. If the glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you strikes the mirror, these sensors

1

2 3

4

HS3037BB

HS3038BA

3-30

Instruments and controls

detect it and make the reflection surface of the mirror dimmer to help prevent you from being blinded. For this reason, use care not to cover the sensors with stickers, or other similar items. Periodically wipe the sensors clean using a piece of dry soft cotton cloth or an applicator.

Compass calibration 1. For optimum calibration, switch off all nonessential electrical accessories (rear window defogger, heater/ air conditioning system, spotlight, etc.) and ensure all doors are shut. 2. Drive to an open, level area away from large metal- lic objects or structures and make certain the ignition switch is in the ON position. 3. Press and hold the left button for 3 seconds then re- lease, and the compass will enter the calibration mode. CAL and direction will be displayed. 4. Drive slowly in a circle until CAL disappears from the display (about two or three circles). The compass is now calibrated. 5. Further calibration may be necessary should out- side influences cause the mirror to read inaccurately. You will know that this has occurred if your compass begins to read in only limited directions. Should you encounter this situation, return to step one of the above procedure and recalibrate the mirror.

Compass zone adjustment 1. The zone setting is factory preset to Zone 8. Refer to the Compass calibration zone map at the end of this manual to verify that the compass zone setting is correct for your geographical location. 2. Press and hold the right button for 3 seconds then release, and the word ZONE will briefly appear and then the zone number will be displayed. 3. Press the right hand button repeatedly to cycle the display through all possible zone settings. Stop cycling when the correct zone setting for your location is dis- played. 4. Releasing the button for 3 seconds will exit the zone setting mode.

Outside mirrors Convex mirror (Passenger side)

Objects look smaller in a convex mirror and far- ther away than when viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use the convex mirror to judge the distance of vehicles behind you when changing lanes. Use the inside mirror (or glance backwards) to determine the actual size and distance of ob-

3-31

Instruments and controls

CONTINUED

jects that you view in convex mirror.

Adjusting mirrors

To adjust the mirrors by hand, push where indicated by the arrows.

Remote control mirror switch The remote control mirrors operate only when the ig- nition switch is in the ON or ACC position.

1) Selection switch 2) Direction control switch

1. Press either end of the selection switch, L for the left, R for the right. 2. Move the direction control switch in the direction you want to move the mirror. 3. Return the selection switch to the neutral position to prevent unintentional operation.

The mirrors can also be adjusted manually.

OM-U2737

1

2

UB4004BB

3-32

Instruments and controls

Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)

To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not operate the defogger continuously for any longer than necessary.

The outside mirror defogger operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position.

1) Indicator light

To turn on the outside mirror defogger, push the but- ton while the engine is running.

The indicator light located on the button will come on when the outside mirror defogger heater in operation.

To turn it off, push the button again.

1

UB4004CB

3-33

Instruments and controls

CONTINUED

Tilt steering wheel

Do not adjust the steering wheel tilt position while driving. This may cause loss of vehicle control and result in personal injury.

1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to the Front seats section (chapter 1). 2. Pull the tilt lock lever down. 3. Move the steering wheel to the desired level. 4. Push the lever up to lock the steering wheel in

place. 5. Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked by moving it up and down.

HS3043BA

3-34

Instruments and controls

Horn

To sound the horn, push the horn pad.

HS3044BA

4-1

4

Climate control

Ventilator ....................................................... 4-2 Drivers side ventilators ................................... 4-2 Center ventilators ............................................. 4-2 Front passengers side ventilators ................. 4-3 Air flow selection .............................................. 4-4

Manual heating and air conditioning system ........................................................ 4-5 Control panel ..................................................... 4-5 Heater operation ............................................... 4-7 Air conditioner operation ................................. 4-10

Operating tips for heater and air conditioner ................................................. 4-11

Air filtration system (if equipped) ................ 4-13

4-2

Climate control

Climate controlVentilator

Drivers side ventilators

1) Open 2) Close

Move the thumb-wheel up and down or right and left to adjust the flow direction.

Center ventilators

Move the thumb-wheel up and down or right and left to adjust the flow direction.

1 2 UB4038BB

UB4039BA

4-3

Climate control

CONTINUED

Front passengers side ventilators

1) Open 2) Close

Move the thumb-wheel up and down or right and left to adjust the flow direction.

1

2 UB4040BB

4-4

Climate control

Air flow selection

UB4036BA

4-5

Climate control

CONTINUED

Manual heating and air conditioning system

Control panel

1) Temperature control dial 2) Fan speed control dial 3) Air flow control dial 4) Air conditioner button 5) Air inlet selection button 6) Rear window defogger button (Refer to Rear window

defogger button in chapter 3.)

Temperature control dial This dial regulates the temperature of air flow from the

air outlets over a range from the blue area (cool) to red area (warm).

Fan speed control dial The fan operates only when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. The fan speed control dial is used to select four fan speeds.

Air flow control dial This dial has the following five positions:

: Air flows through the instrument panel outlets.

: Air flows through the instrument panel outlets and the foot outlets.

: Air flows through the foot outlets and some through the windshield defroster outlets.

: Air flows through the windshield defroster outlets and foot outlets.

: Air flows through the windshield defroster out- lets.

1

6 5 4

2 3

UB5004BC

4-6

Climate control

NOTE When the dial is placed in the or po- sition, the air conditioner compressor operates automatically regardless of the position of the air conditioner button to defog the windshield quick- ly. At the same time, the air inlet selection is auto- matically set to Outside air mode. In this state, you cannot select recirculation mode by manually pressing the air inlet selection button.

Air conditioner button

The air conditioner operates only when the engine is running.

Push the air conditioner button while the fan is in op- eration to turn on the air conditioner. The indicator light will come on.

Push it again to turn off the air conditioner.

Air inlet selection button

Continued operation in the ON position may fog up the windows. Switch to the OFF position as soon as the outside dusty condition clears.

UG4507BA

UB4041BA

4-7

Climate control

CONTINUED

ON position (Recirculation): Interior air is recirculat- ed inside the vehicle. Push the air inlet selection but- ton to the ON position. The indicator light will come on. Push the air inlet selection button to the ON position for fast cooling with the air conditioner or when driving on a dusty road. OFF position (Outside Air): Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment. Push the air inlet selec- tion button again to the OFF position. The indicator light will go off. Push the air inlet selection button to the OFF position when the interior has cooled to a comfortable temper- ature and the road is no longer dusty.

Heater operation Defrosting or defogging the windshield

To direct warm air to the windshield and front door win- dows: 1. Set the air flow control dial to . 2. Turn the temperature control dial all the way to the right. 3. Set the fan speed control dial to the highest speed.

NOTE Warm air also comes out from the right and left air outlets. To stop warm air flow from these outlets, turn the corresponding thumb-wheel to the

UB5011AA

4-8

Climate control

position. Heating and defrosting

To direct warm air toward the floor and the windshield: 1. Set the air flow control dial to . 2. Set the temperature control dial to the desired tem- perature level. 3. Set the fan speed control dial to the desired speed.

NOTE Warm air also comes out from the right and left air outlets. To stop warm air flow from these outlets, turn the corresponding thumb-wheel to the position.

Heating

To direct warm air toward the floor: 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the OFF posi- tion. 2. Set the air flow control dial to . 3. Set the temperature control dial to the desired tem- perature level. 4. Set the fan speed control dial to the desired speed.

NOTE Warm air also comes out from the right and left air outlets. To stop warm air flow from these outlets, turn the corresponding thumb-wheel to the position.

UB5012AA

UB5013AA

4-9

Climate control

CONTINUED

Bi-level heating

This setting allows you to direct air of different temper- atures from the instrument panel and foot outlets. The air from the foot outlets is slightly warmer than from the instrument panel outlets. 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the OFF posi- tion. 2. Set the air flow control dial to . 3. Set the temperature control dial to the desired tem- perature level. 4. Set the fan speed control dial to the desired speed.

Setting the temperature control dial fully turned to the red area or blue area decreases the temperature dif-

ference between the air from the instrument panel out- lets and the air from the foot outlets.

Ventilation

To force outside air through the instrument panel out- lets: 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the OFF posi- tion. 2. Set the air flow control dial to . 3. Set the temperature control dial all the way left. 4. Set the fan speed control dial to the desired speed.

When driving on a dusty road, set the air inlet control button to the ON position.

UB5014AA

UB5015AA

4-10

Climate control

Continued operation with the air inlet selection button in the ON position may fog up the win- dows. Switch to the OFF position as soon as the outside dusty condition clears.

Air conditioner operation Cooling or dehumidifying

1) ON position

For cooling and dehumidification of the passenger

compartment, performing the following steps will allow air to flow through the instrument panel outlets: 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the OFF posi- tion. 2. Set the air flow control dial to . 3. Set the air conditioner button to the ON position. 4. Set the temperature control dial to the blue area. 5. Set the fan speed control dial at the desired speed.

Defrosting or defogging

1) ON position

To direct warm air to the windshield and front door win- dows: 1. Set the air outlet control dial to .

1 UB5016BB

1 UB5011BB

4-11

Climate control

CONTINUED

2. Set the temperature control dial to the red area. 3. Set the fan speed control dial at the highest speed.

Operating tips for heater and air con- ditioner

Cleaning ventilator grille

Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions to ensure efficient heating and defrosting. Since the condenser is located in front of the radiator, this area should be kept clean because cooling performance is impaired by any ac- cumulation of insects and leaves on the condenser.

Efficient cooling after parking in direct sunlight After parking in direct sunlight, drive with the windows

UB4037BA

4-12

Climate control

open for a few minutes to allow outside air to circulate into the heated interior. This results in quicker cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the windows closed during the operation of the air conditioner for maximum cool- ing efficiency.

Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant cir- cuit

Operate the air conditioner compressor at a low en- gine speed (at idle or low driving speeds) a few min- utes each month during the off-season to circulate its oil.

Checking air conditioning system before sum- mer season

Check the air conditioner unit for refrigerant leaks, hose conditions, and proper operation each spring. This check is best performed by your SUBARU dealer.

Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and low temperature weather condition

Under certain weather conditions (high relative humid- ity, low temperatures, etc.) a small amount of water vapor emission from the air outlets may be noticed. This condition is normal and does not indicate any problem with the air conditioning system.

Air conditioner compressor shut-off when en- gine is heavily loaded

To improve acceleration and gas mileage, the air con- ditioner compressor is designed to temporarily shut off during air conditioner operation whenever the acceler- ator is fully depressed such as during rapid accelera- tion or when driving on a steep upgrade.

Refrigerant for your climate control system Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly refrigerant HFC134a. Therefore, the method of adding, changing or checking the refrigerant is different from the method for CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU dealer for service. Repairs needed as a result of using the wrong refrigerant are not covered under warranty.

4-13

Climate control

CONTINUED

Air filtration system (if equipped) If your vehicles air conditioning system is equipped with a optional air filtration system, replace the filter el- ement according to the replacement schedule shown below. This schedule should be followed to maintain the filters dust collection ability. Under extremely dusty conditions, the filter should be replaced more frequently. Have your filter checked or replaced by your SUBARU dealer.

Replacement schedule: Every 12 months or 9,300 miles (15,000 km) whichev- er comes first

NOTE The filter can influence the air conditioning, heat- ing and defroster performance if not properly maintained.

5-1

5

Audio

Antenna system ............................................ 5-2 Pillar mounted antenna (Non-turbo models) .. 5-2 Roof mounted antenna (Turbo models) ......... 5-2 FM reception ..................................................... 5-3

Installation of accessories ........................... 5-4 Audio set ........................................................ 5-4

Type A audio set ............................................... 5-4 Type B audio set ............................................... 5-5 In-dash 6 CD auto changer

(Optional audio unit if equipped) ............... 5-5 AM/FM radio with CD player ........................ 5-6

Radio operation ................................................ 5-6 Compact disc player operation ....................... 5-11 CD changer control (if optional in dash CD

changer is connected) ................................... 5-13 Type B audio set (if equipped) ..................... 5-17

Radio operation ................................................ 5-17 Built-in CD changer operation ......................... 5-23

In-dash 6 CD auto changer (if equipped) .... 5-27 Precautions to observe when handling

a compact disc .......................................... 5-30

5-2

Audio

AudioAntenna system

Pillar mounted antenna (Non-turbo models)

Pull the antenna out to extend it to its full length.

Roof mounted antenna (Turbo models)

UB5070BA

UB5073BA

UB5074BA

5-3

Audio

CONTINUED

Stand the roof antenna up for use. You can detach the roof antenna by turning it counterclockwise. When fit- ting the roof antenna, turn it clockwise and tighten it securely.

When working on the cargo bed, be careful not to get poked in the eye by the roof antenna.

NOTE Detach the roof antenna before putting the vehi-

cle in a garage and before washing it in an auto- matic car wash.

After detaching the roof antenna, keep the mounting hole free of dirt and dust. If any dirt or dust sticks to the hole, remove it before attaching the roof antenna.

When detaching the roof antenna, grasp and turn the roof antenna at the base.

To avoid damaging the roof antenna, be careful not to overtighten it when attaching it.

Radio reception is not possible with the roof an- tenna folded down. Also, reception deteriorates if metallic objects are placed near the roof antenna.

FM reception Although FM is normally static free, reception can be affected by the surrounding area, atmospheric condi- tions, station strength and transmitter distance. Build- ings or other obstructions may cause momentary stat- ic, flutter or station interference. If reception continues to be unsatisfactory, switch to a stronger station.

5-4

Audio

Installation of accessories Always consult your SUBARU dealer before installing a citizen band radio or other transmitting device in your vehicle. Such devices may cause the electronic control system to malfunction if they are incorrectly in- stalled or if they are not suited for the vehicle.

Audio set Your SUBARU may be equipped with one of the fol- lowing audio sets. See the pages indicated in this sec- tion for operating details.

Type A audio set

Radio operation: refer to page 5-6 CD (compact disc) player operation: refer to page 5-

11 CD changer control: refer to page 5-13

UB5066AA

5-5

Audio

CONTINUED

Type B audio set

Radio operation: refer to page 5-17 Built-in CD changer operation: refer to page 5-23

In-dash 6 CD auto changer (Optional audio unit if equipped)

Inserting and removing a disc or all discs: refer to page 5-27

UB5075AA

HS5011AA

5-6

Audio

AM/FM radio with CD player The audio set will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Radio operation

(1) (2)

(6) (5) (4) (3)

UB5067BB

(1) Power switch/Volume, Tone, Balance, Fader control dial

(2) BAND button (3) Tuning buttons (4) Preset buttons (5) AUDIO button (6) SCAN button

5-7

Audio

CONTINUED

Power switch and volume/bass/treble/fader/ balance control

Power switch and volume control (PWR/VOL) The dial (1) is used for both power (ON/OFF) and vol- ume control. The radio is turned ON and OFF by push- ing the dial and the volume is controlled by turning the dial.

Tone and balance control (AUDIO) The volume control dial (1) normally functions as a vol- ume control. This dial becomes a control for Bass, Treble, Fader or Balance when you select the appro- priate tone and balance control mode. Choose desired volume level for each mode by turning the volume control dial. The control function returns to volume control mode after about 5 seconds.

To change control modes: Each brief press of the AUDIO button (5) changes control modes in the fol- lowing sequence starting from volume control mode. (When the radio is first turned on, the control mode is in the volume control.)

The AUDIO button (5) is used for selecting the fol- lowing control modes:

Volume Bass Treble Balance

Fader

5-8

Audio

Display Control mode

Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise

BAS Bass control For less bass sound For more bass sound

TRE Treble control For less treble sound For more treble sound

BAL Balance control To increase left speaker volume and decrease right speaker volume

To increase right speaker volume and decrease left speaker volume

FAD Fader control To increase rear speaker volume and decrease front speaker volume

To increase front speaker volume and decrease rear speaker volume

VOL Volume control For less volume For more volume

HS5014BA

5-9

Audio

CONTINUED

Waveband selection FM/AM selection

Push the BAND button (2) to select FM1, FM2 or AM reception. The display indicates which one is currently selected.

Stereo indicator The stereo indicator ST will come on when an FM stereo broadcast is received.

Tuning (TUNE)

Manual tuning (TUNE) Press the side of the tuning button (3) to in- crease the tuning frequency and press the side of the button to decrease it. Each time the button is pressed, the frequency interval can be changed between 10 kHz in the AM mode and 0.2 MHz in the FM mode.

Seek tuning (SEEK) If the tuning button (3) is pressed for longer than half of a second, the radio will begin to automatically search for receivable frequencies and will stop at the first one found. This function may not be available, however, when radio signals are weak. In such a situ- ation, perform manual tuning to select the desired sta- tion.

Automatic tuning (SCAN) Press the SCAN button (6) to change the radio to the SCAN mode. In this mode, the radio scans through the radio band until a station is found. The radio will stop at the station for five seconds while displaying the fre- quency, after which scanning will continue until the en- tire band has been scanned from the low end to the high end. Press the SCAN button again to cancel the SCAN mode and to stop on any displayed frequency. When the SCAN button is pressed for automatic tun- ing, stations are scanned in the direction of low fre- quencies to high frequencies only. Automatic tuning may not function properly if the sta- tion reception is weakened by distance from the sta- tion or proximity to tall buildings and hills.

Selecting preset stations Presetting a station with a Preset button (4) allows you to select that station in a single operation. Up to six AM, FM1 and FM2 stations each may be preset.

How to preset stations 1. Press the BAND button (2) to select FM1, FM2 or AM reception. 2. Press the SCAN button or tune the radio manually until the desired station frequency is displayed. 3. Press one of the Preset buttons for more than 2

5-10

Audio

seconds to store the frequency. At this time, there will momentarily be no sound from the radio. If the button is pressed for less than 2 seconds, the preceding se- lection will remain in memory.

NOTE If the connection between the radio and battery

is broken for any reason such as vehicle mainte- nance or radio removal, all stations stored in the preset buttons are cleared. If this occurs, it is nec- essary to reset the preset buttons.

If a mobile telephone is placed near the radio, it may cause the radio to emit noise when it receives calls. This noise does not indicate a radio fault.

5-11

Audio

CONTINUED

Compact disc player operation

(8)(7) (9)

(14) (15) (13) (12) (11) (10)

UB5067CB

(7) Disc slot (8) CD button (9) Eject button (10) Fast-forwarding and track up

button (11) Fast-reversing and track down

button (12) Random button (13) Repeat button (14) Scan button (15) PWR (power) switch

5-12

Audio

To playback a compact disc When CD is not in the player

Hold a disc with a finger in the center hole while grip- ping the edge of the disc, then insert it in to the slot (with the label side up) and the player will automatical- ly pull the disc into position. A 8 cm/3 inch CD may also be used without any adapt- er.

NOTE DO NOT INSERT TWO DISCS INTO THE DISC IN-

SERTION SLOT AT A TIME. Make sure to always insert a disc with the label

side up. If a disc is inserted with the label side down, it might be ejected or the player might shut off.

After the last song finishes, the player will auto- matically return to track 1 (the first song on the disc).

When CD is in the player When the CD button (8) is pressed, the player will start playback.

NOTE After the last song finishes, the player will auto- matically return to track 1 (the first song on the

disc).

To stop playback of a CD When the PWR button (15) is pressed during play- back of a CD, the CD stops playing temporarily. To let the CD resume playing, press the button again.

To select a song from its beginning

Forward direction Briefly press the side of the button (10) to skip to the beginning of the next track. Each time this side of the button is pressed, the indicated track number will increase.

Backward direction Briefly press the side of the button (11) to skip to the beginning of the current track. Each time this side of the button is pressed, the indicated track num- ber will decrease.

Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing Fast-forwarding

Press the side of the button (10) continuously for more than 0.5 second to fast-forward the disc. Release the button to stop fast-forwarding.

5-13

Audio

CONTINUED

Fast-reversing Press the side of the button (11) continuously for more than 0.5 second to fast-reverse the disc. Release the button to stop fast-reversing.

Repeat playback Use this to play a certain track repeatedly. During playback, press the RPT button (13) and release it in less than 2 seconds. The RPT indicator will come on and the song will be played continuously. To cancel the repeat mode, press the button again. Then the RPT indicator goes out, and normal playback mode is restored.

Random playback Use this to play the tracks on the disc in random order. During playback, press the RAND button (12) and hold it in for more than 2 seconds. The RAND indica- tor will come on and all songs on the disc will be played in a random order. To cancel the random mode, press the button again. Then the RAND indicator goes out, and normal play- back mode is restored.

Scan Press the SCAN button (14) and release it in less than 2 seconds, and you can hear the first 10 seconds of each track to search for the desired program. To

continue listening to the program, press the SCAN button again. After all tracks on the disc has been scanned, normal playback mode is restored.

To eject a disc from the player When a disc is being played back or when a disc is in the player, press the Eject button (9). The disc will be ejected. The disc may be removed even when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position.

NOTE Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD sticking out,

because vibration might make it fall out. To protect the disc, the disc is automatically

loaded if it is left in the ejected position for more than approximately 15 seconds (Auto Reload). In this case, the disc is not played.

CD changer control (if optional in dash CD changer is connected)

An optional CD changer can be connected to this au- dio unit. See your SUBARU dealer for more informa- tion. For procedures for loading and unloading CDs, refer to In-dash 6 CD auto changer (Optional audio unit if equipped) in this chapter.

5-14

Audio

(16)

(20) (19) (18) (17)

UB5067DB

(16) CD button (17) Track selection buttons (18) RAND (Random) button (19) RPT (Repeat) button (20) SCAN button

5-15

Audio

CONTINUED

To start playback Press the CD button (16). The CD indicator will come on and the disc number will appear on the dis- play and the CD changer will start playback.

NOTE If the CD button is pressed during a radio

broadcast, the CD changer will interrupt the broadcast.

At the end of the disc, playback automatically continues with the next disc.

After playback on the last disc finishes, the play- er will automatically return to the first disc.

If you have loaded fewer than 6 discs, any miss- ing disc is automatically skipped.

Selection of a desired disc Discs cannot be selected using the main audio unit. To select a disc, press one of the Disc select buttons (these are numbered from 1 to 6) on the CD changer unit. The disc will begin to play.

To select a song from its beginning Briefly press the side of the track selection but- ton (17) to skip to the beginning of the next track and briefly press the side of the button to skip to the beginning of the current track.

Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing Press the side of the track selection button (17) continuously for more than a half second to fast-for- ward the disc. Press the side of the button continuously for more than a half second to fast-reverse the disc. Release the button to stop fast-forwarding or fast-re- versing.

Repeat playback Press the RPT button (19) while a song is playing to play the song repeatedly. The RPT indicator will come on and the song will be played continuously. To cancel the repeat mode, press the button again. Then the RPT indicator goes out, and normal playback mode is restored.

Random playback Press the RAND button (18) while a disc is being played back to play all songs on the disc in a random order. The RAND indicator will come on and all songs on the disc will be played in a random order. To cancel the random mode, press the button again. Then the RAND indicator goes out, and normal play- back mode is restored.

5-16

Audio

Scan (a convenient way to become familiar with a disc)

1. Press the SCAN button (20). The display shows SCAN and the track number being scanned. You hear the first 10 seconds of each track. The operation is automatically cleared after play- ing all programs. Then, normal playback starts.

2. Press the SCAN button again when you hear a track you like.

Normal playback resumes.

To stop playback To stop playback and switch over to the radio mode, press the BAND button.

5-17

Audio

CONTINUED

Type B audio set (if equipped) The radio will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Radio operation (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

(6)(7)(8) UB5072BB

(1) Power switch, Volume control, Bass/Midrange/Treble control and Fader/Balance control dial

(2) AUDIO (audio mode) button (3) Fader/Balance selection button (4) FM button (5) AM button (6) Preset buttons (7) Tuning buttons (8) SCAN button

5-18

Audio

Power switch and volume/bass/treble/fader/ balance control (PWR/VOL)

The dial (1) is used for both power (ON/OFF) and vol- ume control. The radio is turned ON and OFF by push- ing the dial and the volume is controlled by turning the dial.

This dial is used for bass/midrange/treble controls when the AUDIO button (2) is in the depressed posi- tion. It is also used for fader/balance controls when the BAL button (3) is in the depressed position.

5-19

Audio

CONTINUED

Display Control mode

Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise

BASS Bass control For less bass sound For more bass sound

MIDDLE Midrange control For less midrange sound For more midrange sound

TREBLE Treble control For less treble sound For more treble sound

FADER Fader control To increase rear speaker volume and de- crease front speaker volume

To increase front speaker volume and de- crease rear speaker volume

BALANCE Balance control To increase left speaker volume and de- crease right speaker volume

To increase right speaker volume and de- crease left speaker volume

VOLUME Volume control For less volume For more volume

HS5014BA

5-20

Audio

Tone control The volume control dial (1) normally function as vol- ume control. The dial become a control for Bass, Midrange or Treble when you select the appropriate tone control mode. Choose desired volume level for each mode by turning the volume control dial. The control function returns to volume control mode after about 5 seconds.

To change control modes: Each brief press of the AUDIO button (2) changes control modes in the fol- lowing sequence starting from bass control mode. (When the radio is first turned on, the control mode is in the volume control.)

Fader and balance control The volume control dial (1) normally function as vol- ume control. The dial become the controls for Fader or Balance when you select the appropriate fader and balance control mode. Choose desired setting for each mode by turning the volume control dial. The control function returns to vol- ume control mode after about 5 seconds.

To change control modes: Each brief press of the

BAL button (3) changes control modes in the follow- ing sequence starting from fader control mode. (When the radio is turned on, the control mode is in the vol- ume control.)

Display illumination dimness cancellation (BRIGHT)

The brightness of the radio display dims when the light switch is in the or positions. If this makes the display difficult to read, press the volume dial for more than 1.5 seconds to return the display to original brightness. Subsequently pressing the volume dial again for more than 1.5 seconds or if you can safely do so, turning the light switch to the OFF position and back to the or position makes the radio display dim again.

FM/AM selection button FM button

Press the FM button (4) for FM reception. The radio will toggle between FM1 and FM2 settings each time the FM button (4) is subsequently pressed.

VolumeBass Midrange Treble

VolumeFader Balance

5-21

Audio

CONTINUED

AM button Press the AM button (5) for AM reception.

Stereo indicator The stereo indicator ST will come on when an FM stereo broadcast is received.

Manual tuning (TUNE)

Manual tuning for AM and FM Push the side of the tuning button (7) to in- crease the tuning frequency and press the side of the button to decrease it. Each time the button is pressed, the frequency chang- es 10 KHz in the AM waveband and 0.2 MHz in the FM waveband.

Seek tuning (SEEK) If the tuning button (7) is pressed for longer than half of a second, the radio will begin to automatically search for receivable frequencies and will stop at the first one found. This function may not be available, however, when radio signals are weak. In such a situ- ation, perform manual tuning to select the desired sta- tion.

Automatic tuning (SCAN) Press the SCAN button (8) to change the radio to the

SCAN mode. In this mode, the radio scans through the radio band until a station is found. The radio will stop at the station for five seconds while displaying the fre- quency, after which scanning will continue until the en- tire band has been scanned from the low end to the high end. Press the SCAN button again to cancel the SCAN mode and to stop on any displayed frequency. When the SCAN button is pressed for automatic tun- ing, stations are scanned in the direction of low fre- quencies to high frequencies only. Automatic tuning may not function properly if the sta- tion reception is weakened by distance from the sta- tion or proximity to tall buildings and hills.

Selecting preset stations Presetting a station with a Preset button (6) allows you to select that station in a single operation. Up to six AM, FM1 and FM2 stations each may be preset.

How to preset stations 1. Press the FM/AM selection button to select AM, FM1 or FM2 reception. 2. Press the SCAN button (8) or tune the radio man- ually until the desired station frequency is displayed. 3. Press one of the Preset buttons (6) for at least 1.5 seconds to store the frequency. The frequency of the station will flash once on the display at this time. If the

5-22

Audio

button is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds, the pre- ceding selection will remain in memory.

NOTE If the connection between the radio and battery

is broken for any reason such as vehicle mainte- nance or radio removal, all stations stored in the preset buttons are cleared. If this occurs, it is nec- essary to reset the preset buttons.

If a mobile telephone is placed near the radio, it may cause the radio to emit noise when it receives calls. This noise does not indicate a radio fault.

5-23

Audio

CONTINUED

Built-in CD changer operation

(9) (10) (11) (12)

(15)(16)(17)

(13) (14)

UB5072CB

(9) Eject button (10) Disc slot (11) CD (CD player selection) button (12) Repeat button (13) Random button (14) LOAD button (15) Disc select buttons (16) Track selection buttons (17) SCAN button

5-24

Audio

NOTE Make sure to always insert a disc with the label side up. If a disc is inserted with the label side down, it might be ejected or the player might shut off.

How to insert a CD(s) Inserting a CD

1. Press LOAD button (14). If the magazine in the player has an idle position where you can insert a disc, the DISC indicator associated with the idle position will blink. If no indicator blinks, it means that there is no idle po- sition in the magazine. 2. As soon as the DISC indicator begins to blink, the IN will appear on display for a period of 15 seconds. Insert a disc during the period. The disc will be then automatically drawn in, and the player will begin to play back the first track of the disc.

To insert more discs in succession, repeat Steps 1 and 2. The magazine will be loaded with discs in the ascending order of position number. If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds after you have pressed the LOAD button, the player will begin to play back the first track of the last disc you have in- serted.

The disc indicator steadily lights up if a disc is al- ready inserted in the corresponding position of the magazine.

While the player is in the loading mode, if you press the FM button (4) or AM button (5), the player will enter the standby mode. Press the CD button (11) to start playback.

Inserting a disc in a desired position 1. Press the LOAD button. If the magazine in the player has an idle position where you can insert a disc, the DISC indicator associated with the idle position will blink. The positions in the magazine the indicator of which steadily lights up are already loaded with discs. 2. Press the Disc select button (15) at the position where you want to insert a disc. The associated DISC indicator will blink, and the IN will be dis- played. 3. If you insert a disc during the 15-second period while the IN is on display, the disc will be automati- cally drawn in, and the player will start playback of the disc, beginning with the first track.

To insert more discs in succession, repeat Steps 1 and 2.

While the player is in the loading mode, if you press the FM button (4) or AM button (5), the player will

5-25

Audio

CONTINUED

enter standby mode. Press the CD button to start playback.

Loading all the magazine (Full disc loading mode)

1. If you continue to press the LOAD button for more than 1.5 seconds, the player will produce beep sound and will enter the full disc loading mode. 2. A DISC indicator will blink, and the IN will be on display for a period of 15 seconds. If a disc is success- fully loaded during this period, the DISC indicator will stop blinking and will steadily light. 3. When the loading of a disc is complete, the next DISC indicator will blink. Then repeat Step 2. 4. When the magazine is filled with discs by repeating Steps 2 and 3, the player will start playback of the discs, beginning with the one inserted first. If you fail to insert any disc during each 15 seconds in- terval, the full disc loading mode will be canceled, and the player will start playback of the disc inserted first.

How to play back a CD or make a pause When there is no CD inserted:

Insert a CD by referring to How to insert a CD(s). When a CD is loaded, the player will start playback of the CD, beginning with the first track.

When there are CDs loaded: Press a desired one of the Disc select buttons (15) the DISC indicator of which steadily lights up. The player will then start playback of the selected CD, be- ginning with the first track.

To select a song from its beginning Forward direction

Briefly press the side of the button (16) to skip to the beginning of the next track. Each time the button is pressed, the indicated track number will increase.

Backward direction Briefly press the side of the button (16) to skip to the beginning of the current track. Each time the but- ton is pressed, the indicated track number will de- crease.

Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing Fast-forwarding

Press the side of the button (16) continuously for more than 0.5 second to fast-forward the disc. Release the button to stop fast-forwarding.

Fast-reversing Press the side of the button (16) continuously for more than 0.5 second to fast-reverse the disc.

5-26

Audio

Release the button to stop fast-reversing.

Repeat playback Press the RPT button (12) while a song is playing to play the song repeatedly. The RPT indicator will come on and the song will be played continuously. To cancel the repeat mode, press the button again. Then the RPT indicator goes out, and normal playback mode is restored.

Random playback Press the RAND button (13) while a disc is being played back to play all songs on the disc in a random order. The RAND indicator will come on and all songs on the disc will be played in a random order. To cancel the random mode, press the button again. Then the RAND indicator goes out, and normal play- back mode is restored.

Scan When the SCAN button (17) is pressed while the disc is being played back, you can hear the first 10 seconds of each track to search for the desired program. To continue listening to the program, press the SCAN button again. After all tracks on the disc have been scanned, normal playback mode is restored.

How to unload CDs from the player

Ejecting a CD from the player Of the discs loaded, you can select and remove only one disc. 1. Press the Disc select button (15) of the disc whose DISC indicator is ON. 2. Press the Eject button (9). Then the DISC indi- cator associated with the disc you have selected will blink, and the disc will be ejected. To remove more discs in succession, repeat Steps 1 and 2.

Ejecting all discs from the player (All disc ejec- tion mode)

1. If you continue to press the Eject button (9), the player will produce beep sound and will enter the all disc ejection mode. 2. Remove the disc that has been ejected. The other discs loaded will then be ejected one after another. If you do not remove the disc that has been ejected, the All disc ejection mode will be canceled.

NOTE Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD sticking out, because vibration might make it fall out.

5-27

Audio

CONTINUED

In-dash 6 CD auto changer (if equipped)

(1) (2)

(3)(4)

HS5016BB

(1) Disc slot (2) Disc indicators (disc No.1 to 6) (3) Disc select buttons (disc No.1 to

6) (4) Eject button

5-28

Audio

Do not attempt to insert two or more discs into the slot at a time. Doing so can cause me- chanical damage to the CD changer.

Use only music CDs identified by a mark.

Do not use CDs listed below which could cause damage to the CD player.

3 inch (8 cm) compact disc. Any disc with a peel-off or seal on it. Any disc with scratches and/or dust. Bent disc. Cleaning disc. CD accessory. (E.g., 3 inch (8 cm) disc

adapter) Do not insert or remove any disc when the

automatic transmission selector lever is in the park position; the selector lever in that position can interfere with disc insertion or removal, causing scratches on the disc surface (for AT vehicles).

To insert a disc 1. Press one of the Disc select buttons (3) (num- bered from 1 to 6) for which the disc indicator light (2)

is OFF. The Disc indicator lights are located directly above the corresponding Disc select buttons. 2. The indicator will begin blinking. The blinking will last for 15 seconds. During this period, insert a desired disc, and the disc will begin to play. (If any disc is not inserted during this period, the Disc slot (1) door will close. Repeat Step 1.) Be sure to hold a disc with the label side (the side where titles are printed) up. 3. To insert another disc, repeat Steps 1 and 2 choos- ing a different disc select button.

To insert six discs at a time 1. Press and hold the Disc select button number 1 until all disc indicators begin blinking (about 1.5 sec- onds). 2. The indicators will blink for 15 seconds. During this period, insert desired six discs. 3. When all discs are loaded, the first disc will begin to play. (If no disc is inserted within this 15 seconds, the entire disc load sequence will be canceled.)

To remove a disc 1. Press the desired one of the Disc select buttons (3) (numbered from 1 to 6) for which the disc indicator light is on.

5-29

Audio

CONTINUED

2. Press the Eject button (4). The selected disc will be ejected and the indicator light will begin blinking. 3. To remove another disc, repeat Steps 1 and 2 choosing a different Disc select button. (To remove discs when the ignition switch is in the Lock position, press the Eject button, and the first disc will be ejected. Press the Eject button again, and the next disc will be ejected and so on. At this time, the Disc select buttons are disabled.)

To remove all discs at one time 1. Press and hold the Eject button (4) until all Disc indicators begin blinking (about 1.5 seconds), and the first disc will be ejected. 2. When the disc is removed, the next one will be ejected, and so on.

To replace a playing disc with another Simply press the desired one of Disc select buttons (3) (numbered from 1 to 6) or press the DISC UP or DISC DOWN button on the radio unit to select the desired disc, and the disc will begin to play.

Disc indicators Lit: when the corresponding storage tray is occupied by a disc. Blinking: Disc player is either in loading, eject or changing mode.

OFF: No disc is loaded or the ignition switch is in the LOCK position.

Function control Refer to CD player control operating instructions de- scribed in the AM/FM radio with CD player section.

5-30

Audio

Precautions to observe when han- dling a compact disc Use only compact discs (CDs) that have the mark shown below. CD-RWs cannot be used. Also, some CD-Rs cannot be played.

In cold and/or rainy weather, dew can form inside the CD player, preventing normal operation. If this happens, eject the CD and wait for the player to dry out.

Skipping may occur when the CD player is subject- ed to severe vibration (for example, when the vehicle is driven on a rough surface).

To remove a disc from the case, press the center of the case and hold both edges of the disc. If the disc surface is touched directly, contamination could cause poor tone quality. Do not touch the disc surface.

Use a clean disc whenever possible. If there are de- posits, wipe the disc surface from the center outward with a dry, soft cloth. Be sure not to use a hard cloth, thinner, benzene, alcohol, etc.

Do not use any disc that is scratched, deformed, or cracked. Also, do not use any disc that has a non-stan- dard shape (for example, a heart shape). Malfunctions or problems might result.

A disc is vulnerable to heat. Never keep it either in places exposed to direct sunlight, near heaters or in vehicles parked in the sun or hot days.

HS5017AA

5-31

Audio

CONTINUED

HS5018BA

6-1

6

Interior and exterior equipments

Interior light .................................................. 6-2 Dome light ......................................................... 6-2

Map light ........................................................ 6-3 Sun visors ..................................................... 6-3

Vanity mirror (if equipped) ............................... 6-4 Storage compartment .................................. 6-4

Glove box ........................................................... 6-5 Center console .................................................. 6-5 Rear center console .......................................... 6-6 Coin compartment ............................................ 6-6

Cup holder .................................................... 6-7 Front cup holder ............................................... 6-7 Rear passengers cup holder ........................... 6-8

Accessory power outlet ............................... 6-8 Cigarette lighter socket ................................ 6-9

Use with a cigarette lighter .............................. 6-10 Using as an accessory power outlet ............... 6-11

Ashtray .......................................................... 6-12 Convenience hook ....................................... 6-13

Coat hook .......................................................... 6-13 Cargo net hooks ................................................ 6-13

Floor mat (if equipped) ................................. 6-15 Cargo bed ...................................................... 6-16

Cargo tie-down hooks ...................................... 6-17 Bed extender (if equipped) .......................... 6-17

Operation ........................................................... 6-18 Bed extender removal ...................................... 6-19

Cargo lamp .................................................... 6-20 Soft bed cover (if equipped) ........................ 6-21

Securing the cover ........................................... 6-21 Cover removal ................................................... 6-22 Cover reinstallation .......................................... 6-23

Roof rail and crossbar .................................. 6-24 Installing carrying attachments on the

crossbars ........................................................ 6-25 Removal and installation of the crossbars .... 6-25

Sport activity lights (if equipped) ................ 6-30

6-2

Interior and exterior equipments

Interior and exterior equipmentsInterior light

Dome light

The dome light switch has three positions: ON: The light stays on continuously. DOOR (middle position): The light comes on when any of the doors is open. The light remains on for sev- eral seconds and gradually goes out after all doors are closed.

The light also can be turned on by use of the keyless entry transmitter. See the Remote keyless entry sys- tem (if equipped) in chapter 2 for detailed information. OFF: The light stays off.

When leaving your vehicle, make sure the light goes out to avoid battery discharge.

ON

DOOR

OFF

HS6025BB

6-3

Interior and exterior equipments

CONTINUED

Map light

1) Switches 2) Map lights

To turn on the map light, push the switch. To turn it off, push the switch again.

When leaving the vehicle, make sure the light is turned off to avoid battery discharge.

Sun visors

To block out glare, swing down the visors. To use the sun visor at a side window, swing it down and move it sideways.

1

2 UG6021CB UB7001BA

6-4

Interior and exterior equipments

Vanity mirror (if equipped)

To use the vanity mirror, swing down the sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.

The light beside the vanity mirror comes on when the ignition switch is either in the ACC or ON position and the mirror cover is opened.

Storage compartment Your vehicle has some storage compartments such as a glove box, a center console and so forth, for storage of small items that you often use.

Always keep the storage compartment closed while driving to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden stops or an accident.

Do not store spray cans, containers with flammable or corrosive liquids or any other dangerous items in the storage compartment.UB6017AA

6-5

Interior and exterior equipments

CONTINUED

Glove box

1) Lock 2) Unlock

To open the glove box, pull the handle. To close it, push the lid firmly upward. To lock the glove box, insert the key and turn it clock- wise.

Center console

To open the lid, pull up the lock release.

1

2

HS6030BB UB6022BA

6-6

Interior and exterior equipments

Rear center console

To open the lid, push the button.

Coin compartment

To open the coin compartment, pull the upper edge of the lid.

UB6028BA HS6055BA

6-7

Interior and exterior equipments

CONTINUED

Cup holder

Do not pick up a cup from the cup holder or put a cup in the holder while you are driving, as this may distract you and lead to an accident.

Take care to avoid spills. Beverages, if hot, might burn you or your passengers. Spilled beverages may also damage upholstery, car- pets or audio equipment.

Front cup holder

A dual cup holder is built in the center console, beside the parking brake lever.

UB6030BA

6-8

Interior and exterior equipments

Rear passengers cup holder

A dual cup holder is built in the rear center console.

Accessory power outlet

The accessory power outlet is located at the rear of the center console. Electrical power (12V DC) from the battery is available at the socket when the ignition switch is either in the ACC or ON position. You can use an in-car use electrical appliance by con- necting it to the accessory power outlet.

Do not attempt to use a cigarette lighter in the accessory power outlet.

UB6029BA UB6057BA

6-9

Interior and exterior equipments

CONTINUED

Do not place any foreign objects, especially metal ones such as coins or aluminum foil, into the accessory power outlet. That could cause a short circuit. Always put the cap on the acces- sory power outlet when it is not in use.

Use only electrical appliances which are de- signed for 12V DC and which consume less than 120W. Overloading the accessory power outlet can cause a short circuit. Do not use dou- ble adapters or more than one electrical appli- ance.

If the plug on your electric appliance is either too loose or too tight for the accessory power outlet, this can result in a poor contact or cause the plug to get stuck. Only use plugs that fit properly.

Use of an electric appliance in the accessory power outlet for a long period of time while the engine is not running can cause battery dis- charge.

Do not raise the rear seat cushion while an electric appliance is plugged into the accessory power outlet. The rear seat cushion would hit the electric appliance, possibly damaging the accessory power outlet and the electric appli- ance.

Cigarette lighter socket

The electrical power socket located on the lower part of the instrument panel is originally designed to use a genuine SUBARU cigarette lighter plug. Do not use non-genuine cigarette lighter plugs in the socket. Doing so may cause a short-circuit and overheating, resulting in a fire.

If the socket is ever used for a plug-in acces- sory such as a mobile phone, they may damage the portion of the sockets internal mechanism that causes a cigarette lighter plug to pop out after its lighter element is heated. Therefore, do not place a cigarette lighter plug in a socket that has been used, even once, to power a plug- in accessory. Doing so may cause the plug to stick and overheat, creating a potential fire haz- ard.

Do not place any foreign objects, especially metal ones such as coins or aluminum foil, into the socket. That could cause a short circuit.

6-10

Interior and exterior equipments

The electrical power socket located on the lower part of the instrument panel can be used as cigarette light- er socket. A cigarette lighter plug is an optional acces- sory. It is available from your SUBARU dealer. The cigarette lighter socket may also be used as a power source for an in-car use electrical appliance.

Use with a cigarette lighter

To avoid being burned, never grasp the lighter by the end with the heating element. Doing so could result in injury and could also damage

the heating element.

Do not hold the lighter pushed in, because it will overheat.

The cigarette lighter operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON and ACC positions. To use the cigarette lighter, push in the knob and wait a few moments. It will automatically spring up when ready for use.

UB6011BA

UB6011DA

6-11

Interior and exterior equipments

CONTINUED

Using as an accessory power outlet Electrical power (12V DC) from the battery is available at the socket when the ignition switch is either in the ACC or ON position. If you use the socket as an accessory power outlet, take the following precautions. When the socket is not in use, always put the cap on the socket to prevent any foreign object from entering it.

Use only in-car use electrical appliances which are designed for 12V DC and which con- sume less than 120W. Overloading the socket can cause a short circuit. Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical appliance.

If the plug on your electric appliance is either too loose or too tight for the socket, this can re- sult in a poor contact or cause the plug to get stuck. Only use plugs that fit properly.

Use of an electric appliance in the socket for a long period of time while the engine is not running can cause battery discharge.

Before driving your vehicle, make sure that the plug and the cord on your electrical appli- ance will not interfere with your shifting gears

and operating the accelerator and brake pedals. If they do, do not use the electrical appliance while driving.

If the socket has been used for electrical appliances, damage may have been done to the internal mecha- nism that cause a cigarette lighter to pop-out after its element has been heated. For that reason, a cigarette lighter, even if it is a genuine part, should not be used in the socket. If you want to use the socket for a ciga- rette lighter again, or to protect your purchaser before you sell your vehicle, have your SUBARU dealer re- place the socket with a new one.

6-12

Interior and exterior equipments

Ashtray

Do not use ashtrays as waste receptacles or leave a lighted cigarette in an ashtray. This could cause a fire.

Fully close the ashtray after using it to help reduce re- sidual smoke.

To open the ashtray, pull the lid out.

To remove the ashtray for cleaning, open it and pull it

out while pushing the inner plate down.

UB6011CA

6-13

Interior and exterior equipments

CONTINUED

Convenience hook

Coat hook

Never hang anything on the coat hook that might obstruct the drivers view or that could cause injury in sudden stops or in a collision. And do not hang items on the coat hook that weigh 2.2 lbs (1 kg) or more.

The coat hook is attached to each rear passengers

hand grip.

Cargo net hooks

HS6040BA

UB6031BA

6-14

Interior and exterior equipments

There are four hooks on the back panel behind the rear seatback. These hooks can be used for installing a cargo net so that small and light items can be held next to the back panel when the rear seatback is in the down position.

Fold the rear seatback forward by pulling the release knob up for access to the hooks.

There are two hooks on the back of the rear seatback. Using these hooks and the two hooks at the bottom of the back panel, it is possible to use a cargo net to re- tain luggage on the folded-down rear seatback.

After returning the seatback to its original posi- tion, make sure that the rear seatback has been securely locked. When securely locked, the red marks on the locking knobs are no longer visi- ble.

UB6054BA

6-15

Interior and exterior equipments

CONTINUED

Floor mat (if equipped)

Make sure the drivers floor mat is placed back in its proper location and correctly secured on its retaining pin. If the floor mat slips forward and interferes with the movement of the pedals during driving, it could cause an accident.

A retaining pin is located on the drivers side of the ve- hicle. The floor mat is secured using the built-in grom- met, by placing the grommet over the pin and pushing downward.

HS6039BA

HS6038BA

6-16

Interior and exterior equipments

Cargo bed

Never fill gasoline containers on the cargo bed. Static electricity may ignite gasoline vapor when filling portable containers. Approved containers must be removed from the vehicle and placed on the ground when filling. Do not fill any portable container on a vehicle.

Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo bed. It is not designed for passengers. They should ride in the seats with the seatbelts securely fas- tened. Otherwise they are much more likely to

suffer serious injury or death in a sudden brak- ing or in a collision.

Do not exceed the cargo load rating of your vehicle. Refer to the Loading your vehicle section in Chapter 8.

Be sure cargo is secured properly. Unse- cured cargo in the cargo bed can be thrown around during sudden braking, in a sharp turn or during rapid acceleration, which could cre- ate a dangerous road hazard.

To avoid creating a dangerous road hazard or causing personal injury, cargo must not stick out beyond the tailgate.

Never drive the vehicle with the tailgate open unless the optional SUBARU Bed Extender is used.

Cargo should be placed in the cargo bed. Make sure all items are secured in place. Be careful to keep the vehicle balanced. Locating the weight as low and far forward as possible helps main- tain balance. There are two water drain holes at both sides of the

UB1149BA

6-17

Interior and exterior equipments

CONTINUED

front end of the cargo bed. Keep those holes clear and free from obstructions.

Cargo tie-down hooks

The cargo bed is equipped with four tie-down hooks so that cargo can be secured with a luggage net or ropes.

Bed extender (if equipped) The bed extender is designed to increase the usable cargo area of the bed.

When the tailgate and bed extender are in the open/outward position, the license plate bracket must be lowered and locked into posi- tion before the vehicle is driven (see section License plate bracket under the heading of Tailgate in Chapter 2 for more information on the function of the license plate bracket). In or- der to avoid damaging the license plate bracket or the bumper, make certain that the license plate bracket is in its fully lowered/open posi- tion before the tailgate is lowered.

Do not exceed the cargo load rating of your vehicle. Refer to Loading your vehicle sec- tion in Chapter 8.

Locking buckles must be engaged into the tailgate latch while the vehicle is in motion.

When the bed extender is not in use, the tail- gate should be closed.

Do not use the bed extender or tailgate to se- cure cargo.

UB6032BA

6-18

Interior and exterior equipments

Remove the bed extender for vehicle Off Road use.

To avoid creating a dangerous road hazard or causing personal injury, cargo must not stick out beyond the bed extender.

To avoid damage, the tailgate and bed ex- tender must remain in the closed/inward posi- tion when towing with a trailer hitch.

To avoid damage, clean the bed extender only with soap, water and a soft brush.

Operation

Open/Outward Position To use the bed extender in the open/outward position, simply lower your license plate bracket (see section License plate bracket un- der heading of Tailgate in Chapter 2), open your tail- gate, and rotate the bed extender until it sits on the tail- gate.

After you have rotated the bed extender, lock the black buckle pin into the tailgate latch by pushing downward until you hear two clicks. Then tighten the tether straps. Repeat this process for the other side. When you want to return the tailgate and the bed extender to the closed/inward position, pull on the tailgate release handle to disengage the tethers.UB8032AA

UB8033AA

6-19

Interior and exterior equipments

CONTINUED

NOTE Use care when rotating bed extender. Do not per- mit the buckles to come in contact with vehicle sheet metal and bed trim. Closed/Inward Position With the tailgate closed and the bed extender in the inward position, small loads can be placed inside the vehicle bed between the tailgate and the extender (groceries, ice chests, etc.).

The bed extender should be secured to the rear set of vehicle cargo hooks. Latch the buckle onto the rear cargo hooks and then tighten the tether straps. To dis- engage the tethers, loosen the tether straps and de-

press the latch pin.

Bed extender removal

The bed extender can be removed from the vehicle by rotating the extender into a vertical position then lifting straight up.

UB8035AA

UB8036BA

6-20

Interior and exterior equipments

Cargo lamp

The cargo lamp comes on and goes off whenever the cargo lamp switch is pushed regardless of the position of the ignition switch. The cargo lamp indicator light lo- cated in the meter panel will illuminate when the cargo lamp is on. When leaving your vehicle, make sure the lamp is turned off to avoid battery discharge.

Do not switch on the cargo lamp while driving to avoid distracting other drivers.

UB3018AA

UB7023DA

6-21

Interior and exterior equipments

CONTINUED

Soft bed cover (if equipped)

Before installing the soft bed cover, carefully read the warning labels on the inside wall of the cargo bed.

Do not place cargo on top of the bed cover. Do not use the hard bed cover section as a

step.

Do not use the bed cover to secure cargo. To avoid damage, clean the bed cover with

only soap, water and a soft brush. Remove the soft portion of the bed cover be-

fore taking the vehicle through a car wash.

The bed cover is designed to cover the cargo area of the bed. The bed cover is water resistant, but not wa- terproof.

Securing the cover

UB6061BA

UB6033AA

6-22

Interior and exterior equipments

To secure the soft portion of the bed cover to the bed, simply start from either side of the vehicle and place the plastic strip under the rail. Slide your hand down the side of the vehicle pushing the plastic strip under the rail as you go. Continue this around the entire length of the bed. Fasten both closeout wraps with Velcro around the rear chrome bars so that they are secure. Your cover should be tight and ready to con- ceal items in the bed from view.

Cover removal

UB6034BA

UB6035BA

UB6036BA

6-23

Interior and exterior equipments

CONTINUED

The soft portion of the bed cover can be removed from the bed covers hard section for cleaning or storage. Unfasten the Velcro on the tube closeout wraps and firmly pull the cover out to one side.

Cover reinstallation

The soft portion of the bed cover can be reinstalled onto the bed covers hard section. Start by inserting the left front edge of the soft portion into the right side of the hard cover. This area is flared out to ease instal- lation.

As you insert (and pull) the soft portion of the bed cov- er into the bed covers hard section, make sure the next 10 to 15 inches (250 to 380 mm) of the soft por- tion are straight and ready to enter the flared out por- tion of the hard section.

Once you have pulled the soft portion of the bed cover onto the bed covers hard section, make sure the soft portion is equally centered on both sides. To complete the installation, refer to Securing the cover.

UB6037BA

UB6038BA

6-24

Interior and exterior equipments

Roof rail and crossbar

For cargo carrying purposes, the roof rail must be used together with a roof crossbar kit and the appropriate carrying attachment. The roof rail must never be used alone to carry car- go. Otherwise, damage to the roof or paint or a dangerous road hazard due to loss of cargo could result.

When using the roof crossbar kit, make sure that the total weight of the crossbars, carrying attachment and cargo does not exceed the maximum load limit. Overloading may cause damage to the vehicle and create a safety haz- ard.

1) Crossbar kit

The roof rail is not designed to carry cargo by itself. Cargo can be carried after securing the roof crossbar kit to the roof rail and installing the appropriate carry- ing attachment. When installing the roof crossbar kit, follow the manufacturers instructions.

When you carry cargo on the roof using the roof cross- bar kit and a carrying attachment, never exceed the maximum load limit explained below. You should also be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). See the Loading your vehicle section in Chapter 8 for information on

1

UB8037BB

6-25

Interior and exterior equipments

CONTINUED

loading cargo into or onto your vehicle. The maximum load limit of the cargo, crossbars and carrying attach- ment must not exceed 100 lbs (45 kg). Place the heaviest load at the bottom, nearest the roof, and evenly distribute the cargo. Always properly secure all cargo.

Installing carrying attachments on the crossbars

When installing any carrying attachment such as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak carrier, cargo basket, etc. on the crossbars, follow the manufacturers in- structions and make sure that the attachment is se- curely fixed to the crossbars. Use only attachments designed specifically for the crossbars. A set of the crossbars is designed to carry loads (cargo and at- tachment) of not more than 100 lbs (45 kg). Before operating the vehicle, make sure that the cargo is properly secured on the attachment.

NOTE Remember that the vehicles center of gravity is al- tered with the weight of the load on the roof, thus affecting the driving characteristics. Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind effects will be in- creased.

Removal and installation of the cross- bars

Do not carry cargo on the roof when the cross- bars are removed. Luggage on the roof will be thrown forward or backward in sudden stops or rapid accelerations, resulting in a dangerous road hazard.

The crossbars can be removed when you do not use the roof to carry cargo.

6-26

Interior and exterior equipments

To remove the crossbar 1. Loosen and remove the T-30 torx head screw from the side of each crossbar end support. 2. Move the end support and inner clamp to unhook each side of the crossbar from the roof rail. 3. Carefully raise the crossbar from roof rails.

NOTE It may be necessary to move the Front crossbar rearward, near the center of the roof rail for easier removal. Use care not to cross-thread the screw in the insert if it has been removed.

To install the crossbar

NOTE Both Crossbars have a label indicating the direc- tion of mount. If they are not present, orient with the larger section of the Crossbar towards the front of vehicle (see below). The Front Crossbar also has a MAXIMUM LOAD Label affixed to it.

UB6047BA

UB6048BA

6-27

Interior and exterior equipments

CONTINUED

1) Front 2) Rear 3) Crossbar (section)

Front crossbar: Front crossbar has 100 LBS. Load Label on left hand side.

1) Load label

1 2

3

UB6055BB 1

UB6051BB

6-28

Interior and exterior equipments

1. Before placing the crossbar on the roof rails, make sure that the T-30 torx head screw is fully loosened from each end support. 2. Spread the inner clamp and the end support as far apart as possible. 3. With the front direction arrow label on the top right side of the crossbar pointing toward the front of the ve- hicle, carefully place the crossbar across the top of the vehicle so that the crossbar end supports rest on the top of the roof rails 7 inches (180 mm) rearward in the front radius of the roof rail. 4. Move the end support and inner clamp to hook un- der the end of the roof rail on both sides and loosely assemble the T-30 torx head screw with the tool pro-

vided into the threaded insert in the inner clamp on each end of the crossbar.

NOTE It may be necessary to start the inner clamp and end support at the center of the roof rail for easier installation, then move the crossbar forward. Use care not to cross-thread the screw in the insert if it has been removed.

5. Adjust the alignment of the crossbar on the roof rails, and if available, use a T-30 torx bit and torque wrench and tighten the T-30 torx head screws to 30 to 35 lbfin (3.4 to 4.0 Nm, 0.35 to 0.41 kgfm) of torque (or tighten securely with the torx wrench pro-

7 in (180 mm)

UB6052BB

UB6053BA

6-29

Interior and exterior equipments

CONTINUED

vided).

Rear crossbar:

Install the rear crossbar in the same manner as the front crossbar.

NOTE The rear crossbar should be positioned just in

front of the rear radius in the roof rail. Before each use of the roof crossbar, make sure

the four T-30 crossbar clamp screws have been checked, and retightened if necessary to 35 lbfin (4.0 Nm, 0.41 kgfm), as outlined in Step #5 above.

0 in (0 mm)

UB6049BB

UB6050BA

6-30

Interior and exterior equipments

Sport activity lights (if equipped)

1) Indicator light

The sport activity lights will operate only when the parking brake is engaged. Push the SPORT LIGHTS switch to turn the sport activity lights on. Press the switch again to turn them off.

The indicator light located on the switch will illuminate when the sport activity lights are on.

NOTE In most states, the sport activity lights must

have stone shields installed when the vehicle is

operated on public roads. In most states, the sport activity lights may not

be operated when the vehicle is in motion on a public road.

The sport activity lights mount to the vehicle front cross bar. The sport activity lights cross bar wire har- ness connects to the roof wire harness and then to the vehicles electrical system.

A tool is provided which will activate the sport activity lights positioning to be modified, so that each lamp can be aimed or rotated. The lamps can be mounted in two positions, upright (normal) or forward (down- ward). The lamps should be rotated to the forward

1

UB6041BB

UB3019AA

6-31

Interior and exterior equipments

CONTINUED

(downward) position when washing your vehicle. If you choose to remove sport activity lights, the follow- ing sequence should be utilized:

1. Disconnect the roof harness from the cross bar har- ness connector. 2. Attach the water proof connector cap to the roof harness connector. 3. Care should be used when removing or installing this electrical product.

7-1

7

Starting and operating

Fuel ................................................................ 7-2 Fuel requirements ............................................. 7-2 Fuel filler door and cap .................................... 7-4

State emission testing (U.S. only) ............... 7-7 Preparing to drive ......................................... 7-9 Starting the engine ....................................... 7-9

Manual transmission vehicle ........................... 7-9 Automatic transmission vehicle ...................... 7-10

Stopping the engine ..................................... 7-12 Manual transmission .................................... 7-12

Shifting speeds ................................................. 7-13 Driving tips ........................................................ 7-14

Automatic transmission (Non-turbo models) ................................... 7-15 Selector lever .................................................... 7-16 Driving tips ........................................................ 7-19 Shift lock release .............................................. 7-20

Automatic transmission (Turbo models) ... 7-21 Selector lever .................................................... 7-22 Selector lever reverse inhibiting function ...... 7-25 Selection of SPORTSHIFT mode

(manual mode) ................................................ 7-27 Driving tips ........................................................ 7-29 Shift lock release .............................................. 7-30

Limited slip differential (LSD) ...................... 7-31 Power steering .............................................. 7-31 Braking .......................................................... 7-32

Braking tips ....................................................... 7-32 Brake system ..................................................... 7-32

Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ........ 7-33 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ..................... 7-33

ABS system self-check .................................... 7-34 ABS warning light ............................................. 7-34

Parking your vehicle ..................................... 7-36 Cruise control ................................................ 7-38

To set cruise control ........................................ 7-38 To temporarily cancel the cruise control ....... 7-39 To turn off the cruise control ........................... 7-40 To change the cruising speed ......................... 7-40 Cruise control set indicator light .................... 7-41

7-2

Starting and operating

Starting and operatingFuel

Use of a fuel which is low in quality or use of an inappropriate fuel additive may cause engine damage.

Fuel requirements Non-turbo models

The 2.5-liter engine is designed to operate using un- leaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI or higher.

Turbo models The 2.5-liter turbo engine is designed to operate using premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI or higher. If premium unleaded gasoline is not available, regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI or higher may be temporarily used. For optimum engine performance and driveability, it is required that you use premium grade unleaded gaso- line.

Fuel octane rating This octane rating is the average of the Research Oc- tane and Motor Octane numbers and is commonly re- ferred to as the Anti Knock Index (AKI). Using a gasoline with a lower octane rating can cause persistent and heavy knocking, which can damage the engine. Do not be concerned if your vehicle some- times knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or when you accelerate. See your dealer or a qualified service technician if you use a fuel with the specified octane rating and your vehicle knocks heavily or persistently.

Unleaded gasoline The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler nozzle. Under no cir- cumstances should leaded gasoline be used because it will damage the emission control system and may impair driveability and fuel economy.

Gasoline for California-certified LEV Your vehicle was certified to Californias low emission vehicle (LEV) standards as indicated on the under- hood tune-up label. It is designed to optimize engine and emission control system performance with gaso- line that meets the clean burning low-sulfur California gasoline specifications. If you live in any other state than California, your vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting Federal specifications. Gasoline sold outside

7-3

Starting and operating

CONTINUED

California is permitted to have higher sulfur levels, which may affect the performance of your vehicles catalytic converter and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or smell. SUBARU recommends that you try a different brand of unleaded gasoline having lower sul- fur to determine if the problem is fuel related before re- turning your vehicle to an authorized dealer for ser- vice.

MMT Some gasoline contains an octane-enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tri- carbonyl). If you use such fuels, your emission control system performance may deteriorate and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If this happens, return to your authorized SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty.

Gasoline for cleaner air Your use of gasoline with detergent additives will help prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel system. This helps keep your engine in tune and your emission control system working properly, and is a way of doing your part for cleaner air. If you continu- ously use a high quality fuel with the proper detergent and other additives, you should never need to add any

fuel system cleaning agents to your fuel tank.

Many gasolines are now blended with materials called oxygenates. Use of these fuels can also help keep the air cleaner. Oxygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol (ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in your vehicle, but should con- tain no more than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the proper operation of your SUBARU.

In addition, some gasoline suppliers are now produc- ing reformulated gasoline, which is designed to reduce vehicle emissions. SUBARU approves the use of re- formulated gasoline.

If you are not sure what the fuel contains, you should ask your service station operators if their gasoline con- tains detergents and oxygenates and if they have been reformulated to reduce vehicle emissions.

As additional guidance, only use fuels suited for your vehicle as explained below.

Fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that specified in this manual.

Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline. Methanol can be used in your vehicle ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel mixture AND if it is accompanied by sufficient quantities of the proper cosolvent and corrosion inhib-

7-4

Starting and operating

itors required to prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT under these conditions.

If undesirable driveability problems are experienced and you suspect they may be fuel related, try a differ- ent brand of gasoline before seeking service at your SUBARU dealer.

Fuel system damage or driveability problems which result from the use of improper fuel are not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

Fuel filler door and cap Refueling

Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. Before refueling, always first stop the engine and make sure that there are no lighted cigarettes, open flames or electrical sparks in the adjacent area.

When opening the cap, do not remove the cap quickly. Fuel may be under pressure and spray out of the fuel filler neck especially in hot weather, which may cause injury.

Never fill gasoline containers on the cargo bed. Static electricity may ignite gasoline vapor when filling portable containers. Approved

containers must be removed from the vehicle and placed on the ground when filling. Do not fill any portable container on a vehicle.

Never add any cleaning agents to the fuel tank. The addition of a cleaning agent may cause damage to the fuel system.

Make sure that the cap is tightened until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.

Do not let fuel spill on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Fuels may cause paint damage, which is not covered under the SUBARU Limit- ed Warranty.

Always use a genuine SUBARU fuel filler cap. If you use the wrong cap, it may not fit or have proper venting, and your fuel tank and emis- sion control system might be damaged.

7-5

Starting and operating

CONTINUED

0

1. To open the fuel filler door, pull it outward. 1) Open 2) Close

2. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it slowly coun- terclockwise. 3. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler pump auto- matically clicks off. Do not add any more fuel. 4. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise until you hear a clicking sound. Be certain not to catch the tether un- der the cap while tightening. 5. Close the fuel filler door completely. If you spill any fuel on the painted surface, rinse it off immediately. Otherwise, the painted surface could be damaged.

UB7034BA

1 2

UB7030BB

7-6

Starting and operating

NOTE

You will see the FUEL DOOR sign in the combination meter. This indicates that the fuel fill- er door (lid) is located on the right side of the ve- hicle.

If the fuel filler cap is not tightened until it clicks or if the tether is caught under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE warning light may come on. Refer to the Warning and indicator lights section located in chapter 3.

(Turbo models only) Promptly put fuel in the tank whenever the low fuel warning light comes on. If the engine misfired as a result of an empty tank, resulting catalyzer damage could cause

damage to the turbocharger.

HS3023AA

7-7

Starting and operating

CONTINUED

State emission testing (U.S. only)

Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehicle must NEVER be performed on a single two-wheel dy- namometer. Attempting to do so will result in uncontrolled vehicle movement and may cause an accident or injuries to persons nearby.

Resultant vehicle damage due to improper test- ing is not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty and is the responsibility of the state inspection program or its contractors or licens- ees.

At state inspection time, remember to tell your in- spection or service station in advance not to place your SUBARU AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dyna- mometer. Otherwise, serious transmission dam- age will result. Some states have started using dynamometers in their state inspection programs in order to meet their

obligation under federal law to implement stricter vehi- cle emission standards to reduce air pollution from ve- hicles. A dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like test- ing device that allows your vehicles wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in one place. Depending on the severity of a states air pollution problems, the states must adopt either a basic or enhanced vehi- cle emission inspection test. Normally, a portion of the basic emission test consists of an emission inspector inserting an analyzer probe into the exhaust pipe of an idling vehicle for a short period of time. States with more severe air pollution problems are required to adopt an enhanced vehicle emission test. This test simulates actual driving conditions on a dynamometer and permits more accurate measurement of tailpipe emitted pollution than the basic emission test. The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel dynamometers in their emis- sion testing programs have EXEMPTED SUBARU AWD vehicles from the portion of the testing program that involves a two-wheel dynamometer.

There are some states that use four-wheel dynamom- eters in their testing programs. When properly used, that equipment will not damage an AWD SUBARU ve- hicle.

Under no circumstances should the rear wheels be

7-8

Starting and operating

jacked off the ground, nor should the driveshaft be dis- connected for state emission testing.

The EPA has issued regulations for inspecting the On- Board Diagnostic (OBD) system as part of the state emissions inspection. The OBD system is designed to detect engine and transmission problems that might cause vehicle emissions to exceed allowable limits. These inspections apply to all 1996 model year and newer passenger cars and light trucks.

The inspection of the OBD system consists of a vi- sual operational check of the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) and an examination of the OBD system with an electronic scan tool while the engine is running.

A vehicle passes the OBD system inspection if proper the CHECK ENGINE warning light/MIL illu- mination is observed, there is no stored diagnostic trouble codes, and the OBD system readiness moni- tors are complete.

A vehicle fails the OBD inspection if the CHECK ENGINE warning light/MIL is not properly operating or there is one or more diagnostic trouble codes stored in vehicles computer with the CHECK ENGINE warning light/MIL illuminated.

A state emission inspection may reject (not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of OBD system readiness

monitors Not Ready is greater than three. Under this condition, the vehicle operator should be instruct- ed to drive his/her vehicle for a few days to set the monitors and return for an emission re-inspection.

Owners of rejected or failing vehicles should contact their SUBARU Dealer for service.

7-9

Starting and operating

CONTINUED

Preparing to drive You should perform the following checks and adjust- ments every day before you start driving.

1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and lights are clean and unobstructed. 2. Check the appearance and condition of the tires. Also check tires for proper inflation. 3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of leaks. 4. Check that the hood is fully closed. 5. Check the adjustment of the seat. 6. Check the adjustment of the inside and outside mir- rors. 7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your passengers have fastened their seatbelts. 8. Check the operation of the warning and indicator lights when the ignition switch is turned to the ON po- sition. 9. Check the gauges, indicator and warning lights af- ter starting the engine.

NOTE Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, washer flu- id and other fluid levels should be checked daily, weekly or at fuel stops.

Starting the engine

Do not operate the starter motor continuously for more than ten seconds. If the engine fails to start after operating the starter for five to ten seconds, wait for ten seconds or more before trying again.

Manual transmission vehicle 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories. 3. Press the clutch pedal to the floor and shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor while starting the en- gine. The starter motor will only operate when the clutch pedal is pressed fully to the floor. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and check the operation of the warning and indicator lights. Refer to the Warning and indicator lights section (chapter 3). 5. Turn the ignition switch to the START position without depressing the accelerator pedal. Release the key immediately after the engine has started.

7-10

Starting and operating

If the engine does not start, try the following: 1)Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait for at least 10 seconds. After checking that the parking brake is firmly set, turn the ignition switch to the START position while depressing the acceler- ator pedal slightly (about a quarter of the full stroke). Release the accelerator pedal as soon as the en- gine starts. 2) If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition switch back to the OFF position and wait for at least 10 seconds. Then fully depress the accelerator pedal and turn the ignition switch to the START position. If the engine starts, quickly release the ac- celerator pedal. 3) If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition switch again to the OFF position. After waiting for 10 seconds or longer, turn the ignition switch to the START position without depressing the accelera- tor pedal. 4) If the engine still refuses to start, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer for assistance.

6. Confirm that all warning and indicator lights have gone off after the engine has started. The fuel injection system automatically lowers the idle speed as the en- gine warms up.

NOTE (Turbo models) The engine may be difficult to start when the bat-

tery has been disconnected and reconnected (for maintenance or other purposes). This difficulty is caused by the electronically controlled throttles self-diagnosis function. To overcome it, keep the ignition switch in the ON position for approxi- mately 10 seconds before starting the engine.

Automatic transmission vehicle

If you restart the engine while the vehicle is moving, shift the selector lever into the N po- sition. Do not attempt to place the selector lever of a moving vehicle into the P position.

1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories. 3. Shift the selector lever to the P or N position (preferably P position). The starter will only operate when the select lever is at the P or N position. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and check the operation of the warning and indicator lights. Refer to the Warning and indicator lights section (chapter 3). 5. Turn the ignition switch to the START position

7-11

Starting and operating

CONTINUED

without depressing the accelerator pedal. Release the key immediately after the engine has started. If the engine does not start, try the following:

1)Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait for at least 10 seconds. After checking that the parking brake is firmly set, turn the ignition switch to the START position while depressing the acceler- ator pedal slightly (about a quarter of the full stroke). Release the accelerator pedal as soon as the en- gine starts. 2) If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition switch back to the OFF position and wait for at least 10 seconds. Then fully depress the accelerator pedal and turn the ignition switch to the START position. If the engine starts, quickly release the ac- celerator pedal. 3) If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition switch again to the OFF position. After waiting for 10 seconds or longer, turn the ignition switch to the START position without depressing the accelera- tor pedal. 4) If the engine still refuses to start, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer for assistance.

6. Confirm that all warning and indicator lights have gone out after the engine has started. The fuel injec- tion system automatically lowers the idle speed as the engine warms up.

While the engine is warming up, make sure that the selector lever is at the P or N position and that the parking brake is applied.

NOTE (Turbo models) The engine may be difficult to start when the bat- tery has been disconnected and reconnected (for maintenance or other purposes). This difficulty is caused by the electronically controlled throttles self-diagnosis function. To overcome it, keep the ignition switch in the ON position for approxi- mately 10 seconds before starting the engine.

7-12

Starting and operating

Stopping the engine

Do not stop the engine when the vehicle is mov- ing. This will cause loss of power to the power steering and the brake booster, making steer- ing and braking more difficult. It could also re- sult in accidental activation of the LOCK po- sition on the ignition switch, causing the steer- ing wheel to lock.

The ignition switch should be turned off only when the engine is idling.

Manual transmission

Do not drive the vehicle with the clutch disen- gaged (i.e., when the clutch pedal is depressed) or with the shift lever in the neutral position. Engine braking has no effect in either of these conditions and the risk of an accident is conse- quently increased.

Shift into reverse ONLY when the vehicle has completely stopped. It may cause damage to the transmission to try shifting into reverse when the vehicle is moving.

The manual transmission is a fully synchromeshed, 5- forward-speeds and 1-reverse-speed transmission.

7-13

Starting and operating

CONTINUED

The shift pattern is shown on the shift lever knob. When shifting from 5th gear to reverse gear, first re- turn the shift lever to the neutral position then shift into reverse gear.

To change gears, fully depress the clutch pedal, move the shift lever, and gradually let up on the clutch pedal. If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the transmission in neutral, release the clutch pedal momentarily, and then try again.

Shifting speeds Recommended shifting speeds

The best compromise between fuel economy and ve- hicle performance during normal driving is ensured by shifting up at the speeds listed in the following table.

Maximum allowable speeds

When shifting down a gear, ensure that the ve- hicle is not travelling at a speed exceeding the Maximum Allowable Speed for the gear which is about to be selected. Failure to observe this precaution can lead to engine over-revving and this in turn can result in engine damage. In addition, sudden application of engine brakes when the vehicle is travelling on a slip-

1 3 5 2 4 R

N

1

3 5 2

4 R

HS7008BA

Shift up mph (km/h)

1st to 2nd 15 (24)

2nd to 3rd 25 (40)

3rd to 4th 40 (65)

4th to 5th 45 (73)

7-14

Starting and operating

pery surface can lead to wheel locking; as a consequence, control of the vehicle may be lost and the risk of an accident increased.

The following table shows the maximum speeds that are possible with each different gear.

Never exceed the speed limit below for each gear po- sition except for brief acceleration in an emergency. The tachometers needle will enter the red area if these speeds are exceeded. Failure to observe this precaution can lead to excessive engine wear and poor fuel economy.

mph (km/h)

Never exceed posted speed limits.

Driving tips Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to hold your vehicle at a standstill on an upgrade. Either of those actions may cause clutch damage. Do not drive with your hand resting on the shift lever. This may cause wear on the transmission compo- nents.

When it is necessary to reduce vehicle speed due to slow traffic, turning corners, or driving up steep hills, downshift to a lower gear before the engine starts to labor.

On steep downgrades, downshift the transmission to 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear as necessary; this helps to main- tain a safe speed and to extend brake pad life. In this way, the engine provides a braking effect. Re- member, if you ride (over use) the brakes while de- scending a hill, they may overheat and not work prop- erly.

The engine may, on rare occasions, knock when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This phenomenon does not indicate a fault.

Gear Non-turbo models Turbo models

1st 31 (50) 29 (47)

2nd 52 (84) 48 (78)

3rd 74 (119) 71 (114)

7-15

Starting and operating

CONTINUED

Automatic transmission (Non-turbo models)

Do not shift from the P or N position into the D, 3, 2, 1 or R position while de- pressing the accelerator pedal. This may cause the vehicle to jump forward or backward.

Shift into the P or R position only after the vehicle is completely stopped. Shifting while the vehicle is moving may cause damage to the transmission.

Do not race the engine for more than five sec- onds in any position except the N or P po- sition when the brake is set or the tires are on blocks. This may cause the automatic transmis- sion fluid to overheat.

Avoid shifting from one of the forward driving positions into the R position or vice versa un- til the vehicle has completely stopped. Such shifting may cause damage to the transmis-

sion.

The automatic transmission is electronically controlled and provides 4 forward speeds and 1 reverse speed.

NOTE Immediately after a disconnected battery is recon- nected or ATF (automatic transmission fluid) is re- placed, you may feel that the automatic transmis- sion operation is somewhat unusual. This results from erasure or invalidation of data the on-board computer has collected and stored in memory to allow the transmission to shift at the most appropriate times for the current condition of your vehicle. Optimized shifting will be restored as the vehicle continues to be driven for a while.

7-16

Starting and operating

Selector lever

: With the brake pedal depressed, move the lever along the gate.

: Move the lever along the gate.

The selector lever has seven positions.

P (Park) This position is for parking the vehicle and starting the engine.

In this position, the transmission is mechanically locked to prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.

When you park the vehicle, first set the parking brake fully, then shift into the P position. Do not hold the ve- hicle with only the transmission.

P

R N D 3 2 1

HS7009AA

HS7010BA

7-17

Starting and operating

CONTINUED

A shift interlock function is employed in the automatic transmission system to ensure safe starting of the ve- hicle.

To shift the selector lever from the P to the any other position, you have to depress the brake pedal fully when the ignition switch is in the ON position. This prevents the vehicle from lurching when it is started.

If the shift lever does not move from the P position with the brake pedal depressed, refer to the Shift lock release section in this chapter.

R (Reverse) This position is for backing the vehicle.

To shift from N to R position, first stop the vehicle completely then move the lever to R position.

N (Neutral)

Do not drive the vehicle with the selector lever in the N (neutral) position. Engine braking has no effect in this condition and the risk of an accident is consequently increased.

This position is for restarting a stalled engine.

In this position the wheels and transmission are not locked. In this position, the transmission is neutral; the vehicle will roll freely, even on the slightest incline un- less the parking brake or foot brake is on. Avoid coasting with the transmission neutral. During coasting, the engine braking does not act.

D (Drive) This position is for normal driving. The transmission automatically shifts into a suitable gear from 1st to 4th according to the vehicle speed and the acceleration you require.

When more acceleration is required in this position, press the accelerator pedal fully to the floor and hold that position. The transmission will automatically downshift to 3rd, 2nd or 1st gear. When you release the pedal, the transmission will return to the original gear position.

While climbing a grade When driving up a hill, undesired upshift to 4th gear is prevented from taking place when the accelerator is released. This minimizes the chance of subsequent downshifting to a lower gear when accelerating again. This prevents repeated upshifting and downshifting re- sulting in a smoother operation of the vehicle.

7-18

Starting and operating

NOTE The transmission may downshift to 2nd or 1st gear, depending on the way the accelerator pedal is pressed to accelerate the vehicle again.

While going down a hill When descending a steep hill, depressing the brake pedal will cause the transmission to downshift to 3rd gear, thus applying engine braking. Reacceleration for a short time will cause the transmission to upshift nor- mally.

NOTE In some cases, depressing the brake pedal on a downhill grade does not result in an automatic downshift to 3rd gear. This can happen when the automatic transmission fluid temperature is very low, for example, during driving shortly after the vehicle has been parked for an extended period of time. When the ATF temperature has risen to a cer- tain level, automatic downshift normally takes place. In the meantime, downshift manually for en- gine braking as required. Also, downshifting when braking downhill will not occur at speeds above approximately 50 mph (80 km/h).

3 (Third) This position is for using engine braking when going down a hill or for climbing a grade. The transmission automatically shifts into a suitable gear from 1st to 3rd according to the vehicle speed and the acceleration you require.

When more acceleration is required in this position, press the accelerator pedal fully to the floor and hold that position. The transmission will automatically downshift to 2nd or 1st gear. When you release the pedal, the transmission will return to the original gear position.

2 (Second) This position is for using engine braking when going down a hill or for climbing a steep grade. In this position, the transmission holds in the 2nd gear. Use this position when starting off from a standstill on slippery road surfaces such as mud or snow. It will en- sure greater traction.

1 (First) This position is for driving up or down very steep grades, or driving through mud or sand, or on slippery surfaces. In this position, the transmission holds in the 1st gear.

7-19

Starting and operating

CONTINUED

Maximum speeds

When shifting down a gear, ensure that the ve- hicle is not travelling at a speed exceeding the Maximum Allowable Speed for the gear which is about to be selected. Failure to observe this precaution can lead to engine over-revving and this in turn can result in engine damage. In addition, sudden application of engine brakes when the vehicle is travelling on a slip- pery surface can lead to wheel locking; as a consequence, control of the vehicle may be lost and the risk of an accident increased.

The following tables show the maximum speeds that are possible with each different gear.

When shifting down a gear, it is important to confirm that the current vehicle speed is not in excess of the Maximum Allowable Speed of the gear which is about to be selected.

mph (km/h)

Never exceed posted speed limits.

NOTE In order to prevent over-revving during decelera- tion of the vehicle, the transmission will remain in the current gear if the speed of the vehicle is in ex- cess of the Maximum Allowable Speed for the gear to which the selector lever has been moved.

Driving tips Always apply the foot or parking brake when the ve-

hicle is stopped in the D, 3, 2, 1 or R position. Always set the parking brake when parking your ve-

hicle. Do not hold the vehicle with only the transmis- sion.

Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary position on an uphill grade by using the D, 3, 2, or 1 position. Use the brake instead.

Position Non-turbo models

1 23 (38)

2 55 (89)

3 91 (147)

7-20

Starting and operating

The engine may, on rare occasions, knock when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This phenomenon does not indicate a fault.

Shift lock release If the selector lever does not move from the P posi- tion with the brake pedal depressed and the ignition switch in the ON position, perform the following steps: To override the shift lock: 1. Set the parking brake and stop the engine. 2. Take out the screwdriver from the tool bag. 3. Remove the cover by prying on the edge with the flat-head screwdriver.

4. Insert the screwdriver into the hole.

P

R N D 3 2 1

HS7009BA

HS7011BA

7-21

Starting and operating

CONTINUED

5. Push down on the screwdriver and move the selec- tor lever from the P to the N position. 6. Remove the screwdriver from the hole. Depress the brake pedal and start the engine.

Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU dealer im- mediately to have the system repaired.

Automatic transmission (Turbo mod- els)

Do not shift from the P or N position into the D, 3, 2, 1 or R position while de- pressing the accelerator pedal. This may cause the vehicle to jump forward or backward.

Shift into the P or R position only after the vehicle is completely stopped. Shifting while the vehicle is moving may cause damage to the transmission.

Do not race the engine for more than five sec- onds in any position except the N or P po- sition when the brake is set or when wheel blocks are used. This may cause the automatic transmission fluid to overheat.

Avoid shifting from one of the forward driving positions into the R position or vice versa un- til the vehicle has completely stopped. Such shifting may cause damage to the transmis-

7-22

Starting and operating

sion.

The automatic transmission is electronically controlled and provides 4 forward speeds and 1 reverse speed. Also, it has a manual mode.

NOTE Immediately after ATF (automatic transmission fluid) is replaced, you may feel that the automatic transmission operation is somewhat unusual. This results from invalidation of data which the on-board computer has collected and stored in memory to allow the transmission to shift at the most appropriate times for the current condition of your vehicle. Optimized shifting will be restored as the vehicle continues to be driven for a while.

Selector lever

1) Release button

1

UB7026BB

7-23

Starting and operating

CONTINUED

: When the brake pedal depressed, shift while pressing the button in.

: Shift while pressing the button in. : Shift without pressing the button.

The selector lever has seven positions, P, R, N, D, 3, 2 and 1, and also has a manual gate for us- ing SPORTSHIFT mode. The release button must be pushed to select the P, R, or 2 positions.

P (Park) This position is for parking the vehicle and starting the engine. In this position, the transmission is mechanically

locked to prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.

When you park the vehicle, first set the parking brake fully, then shift into the P position. Do not hold the ve- hicle with only the transmission.

A shift interlock function is employed in the automatic transmission system to ensure safe starting of the ve- hicle.

To shift the selector lever from the P to any other po- sition, you have to depress the brake pedal fully then push the release button on the selector lever when the ignition switch is in the ON position. This prevents the vehicle from lurching when it is started.

If the shift lever does not move from the P position with the brake pedal depressed, the release button pushed in, and the ignition switch in the ON position, refer to the Shift lock release section in this chapter.

R (Reverse) This position is for backing the vehicle.

To shift from the N to R position, first stop the vehi- cle completely then move the lever to the R position while pushing the release button.

UB7025BA

7-24

Starting and operating

N (Neutral)

Do not drive the vehicle with the selector lever in the N (neutral) position. Engine braking has no effect in this condition and the risk of an accident is consequently increased.

This position is for restarting a stalled engine. In this position the wheels and transmission are not locked. In this position, the transmission is neutral; the vehicle will roll freely, even on the slightest incline un- less the parking brake or foot brake is on. Avoid coasting with the transmission neutral. During coasting, there is no engine braking effect.

NOTE If the selector lever is in the N position when you stop the engine for parking, you may not subse- quently be able to move it to the R and P posi- tions. If this happens, turn the ignition switch to the ON position. You will then be able to move the selector lever to the P position.

D (Drive) This position is for normal driving.

The transmission automatically shifts into a suitable gear from 1st to 4th according to the vehicle speed and the acceleration you require.

When more acceleration is required in this position, press the accelerator pedal fully to the floor and hold that position. The transmission will automatically downshift to 3rd, 2nd or 1st gear. When you release the pedal, the transmission will return to the original gear position. To use the SPORTSHIFT mode, move the lever from this position into the manual gate.

While climbing a grade When driving up a hill, undesired upshift to 4th gear is prevented from taking place when the accelerator is released. This minimizes the chance of subsequent downshifting to a lower gear when accelerating again. This prevents repeated upshifting and downshifting re- sulting in a smoother operation of the vehicle.

NOTE The transmission may downshift to 2nd or 1st gear, depending on the way the accelerator pedal is pressed to accelerate the vehicle again.

While going down a hill When descending a steep hill, depressing the brake pedal will cause the transmission to downshift to 3rd

7-25

Starting and operating

CONTINUED

gear, thus applying engine braking. Reacceleration for a short time will cause the transmission to upshift nor- mally.

NOTE In some cases, depressing the brake pedal on a downhill grade does not result in an automatic downshift to 3rd gear. This can happen when the automatic transmission fluid temperature is very low, for example, during driving shortly after the vehicle has been parked for an extended period of time. When the ATF temperature has risen to a cer- tain level, automatic downshift normally takes place. In the meantime, downshift manually for en- gine braking as required. Also, downshifting when braking downhill will not occur at speeds above approximately 50 mph (80 km/h).

3 (Third) This position is for using engine braking when going down a hill or for climbing a grade. The transmission automatically shifts into a suitable gear from 1st to 3rd according to the vehicle speed and the acceleration you require.

When more acceleration is required in this position, press the accelerator pedal fully to the floor and hold

that position. The transmission will automatically downshift to 2nd or 1st gear. When you release the pedal, the transmission will return to the original gear position.

2 (Second) To shift from the 3 to 2 position, push the release button.

This position is for using engine braking when going down a hill or for climbing a steep grade.

In this position, the transmission holds in the 2nd gear. Use this position when starting off from a standstill on slippery road surfaces such as mud or snow. It will en- sure greater traction.

1 (First) This position is for driving up or down very steep grades, or driving through mud or sand, or on slippery surfaces. In this position, the transmission holds in the 1st gear.

Selector lever reverse inhibiting func- tion

This function prevents accidental movement of the se- lector lever to the R position while the vehicle is mov- ing.

7-26

Starting and operating

The function becomes operational when the vehicle reaches a speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Once operational, it prevents the selector lever from being moved from the N position to the R position. When the vehicle speed drops below 6 mph (10 km/h), the function is canceled. The selector lever can then be moved to the R and P positions.

When the ignition switch has been turned to the OFF position, movement of the selector lever from the N position to the R position is possible for a limited time period and then becomes impossible. Also, the selec- tor lever cannot be moved to the R position when it has been placed in the P position and then placed again in the N position. When movement of the se- lector lever from the N position to the R position has become impossible, turn the ignition switch back to the ON position then move the selector lever to the P position. Pressing the selector lever release button also makes it possible to move the selector lever to the P position at this time.

Selector lever release button

If you inadvertently have turned the ignition switch to the OFF position with the selector lever in the N po- sition, proceed as follows. By referring to the Shift lock release section in this chapter, remove the shift lock release cover. Then, with the screwdriver inserted into the hole, move the selector lever to the P posi- tion. If the selector lever reverse inhibiting function fails, have the vehicle inspected by the nearest SUBARU dealer.

UB7039BA

7-27

Starting and operating

CONTINUED

Selection of SPORTSHIFT mode (man- ual mode)

1) Selector lever

1. Select the SPORTSHIFT mode by moving the se- lector lever into the manual gate from the D position with the vehicle stationary or moving.

1) Lamp showing whether upshift is possible 2) Lamp showing whether downshift is possible 3) Indication of currently selected gear

2. Once the SPORTSHIFT mode is selected, the cur- rently selected gear is shown by the shift position indi- cator in the meter cluster. Next to this indication, ar- row-shaped lamps show whether an upshift is possi- ble and whether a downshift is possible. Lamps showing whether upshifting and downshifting are possible: The and lamps show whether upshifting and downshifting are possible. When both lamps are off, SPORTSHIFT operation is not possible. When both lamps are on, upshifting and downshifting are both

1

UB7027BB

1

2 3 UBS094BB

7-28

Starting and operating

possible. When only the lamp is on, only upshift- ing is possible. When only the lamp is on, only downshifting is possible.

3. Perform gearshifts using the selector lever. You can shift by one gear at a time in the 1st-to-4th-gear range.

Upshifting Shift to the next-higher gear (in the 1st-to-4th-gear range) by pushing the selector lever toward the + end of the manual gate.

Downshifting Shift to the next-lower gear (in the 1st-to-4th-gear range) by pushing the selector lever toward the end of the manual gate.

4. To deselect the SPORTSHIFT mode, return the se- lector lever to the D position from the manual gate.

NOTE Please read the following points carefully and bear them in mind when using the SPORTSHIFT mode.

When the temperature of the automatic trans- mission fluid is lower or higher than normal, warn- ing beeps are emitted and the shift position indica- tor shows . If these warnings are issued, dese- lect the SPORTSHIFT mode to protect the auto-

matic transmission from damage. Automatic gearshifts do not take place in the

SPORTSHIFT mode. Perform gearshifts in accor- dance with road conditions so that the tachometer needle does not enter the red zone. If the engine speed reaches a predetermined level, a fuel-cut function will operate. Shift up if this happens.

If you attempt to shift down when the engine speed is too high, i.e., when a downshift would push the tachometer needle beyond the red zone, beeps will be emitted to warn you that the down- shift is not possible.

If you attempt to shift up when the vehicle speed is too low, the transmission will not respond.

You can perform a skip-shift (for example, from 4th to 2nd or from 2nd to 4th) by operating the se- lector lever twice in rapid succession.

The transmission automatically selects 1st gear when the vehicle stops moving. It will not permit a standing start in 2nd gear.

Maximum speeds

When down shifting a gear, ensure that the ve- hicle is not travelling at a speed exceeding the Maximum Allowable Speed for the gear which

7-29

Starting and operating

CONTINUED

is about to be selected. Failure to observe this precaution can lead to engine over-revving and this in turn can result in engine damage. In addition, sudden application of engine brak- ing caused by downshifting when the vehicle is travelling on a slippery surface can lead to wheel locking; as a consequence, control of the vehicle may be lost and the risk of an accident increased.

The following tables show the maximum speeds that are possible with each different gear.

When down shifting, it is important to confirm that the current vehicle speed is not in excess of the Maximum Allowable Speed of the gear which is about to be se- lected.

mph (km/h)

*: SPORTSHIFT mode

Never exceed posted speed limits.

NOTE In order to prevent over-revving during acceler-

ation of the vehicle, the transmission will automat- ically shift to the next higher gear if the Maximum Allowable Speed for the current gear is reached.

Similarly, in order to prevent over-revving dur- ing deceleration of the vehicle, the transmission will remain in the current gear if the speed of the vehicle is in excess of the Maximum Allowable Speed for the gear to which the selector lever has been moved.

Driving tips Always apply the foot or parking brake when the ve-

hicle is stopped in the D, 3, 2, 1, or R position. Always set the parking brake when parking your ve-

hicle. Do not hold the vehicle with only the transmis- sion.

Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary position on an uphill grade by using the D, 3, 2 or 1 position. Use the brake instead.

The engine may, on rare occasions, knock when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This phenomenon does not indicate a fault.

Position Turbo models

1 29 (47), 36 (58)*

2 60 (96), 62 (100)*

3 102 (164), 102 (164)*

7-30

Starting and operating

Shift lock release If the selector lever does not move from the P posi- tion with the brake pedal depressed and the ignition switch in the ON position, perform the following steps: To override the shift lock: 1. Set the parking brake and stop the engine. 2. Take out the screwdriver from the tool bag. 3. Remove the cover by prying on the edge with the flat-head screwdriver.

4. Insert the screwdriver into the hole. 5. Push down on the screwdriver, push down the but- ton and move the selector lever from the P to the N position. 6. Remove the screwdriver from the hole. Depress the brake pedal and start the engine.

Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU dealer im- mediately to have the system repaired.

UB7041BA

UB7040BA

7-31

Starting and operating

CONTINUED

Limited slip differential (LSD)

Never start the engine while a tire on one side is jacked up, as the vehicle may move.

If one rear tire is spinning in mud, avoid con- tinued spinning at high speed as this could ad- versely affect the LSD.

If a different size rear tire is temporarily used (as in an emergency), it will adversely affect the LSD. Always replace it with a regular size tire as soon as possible.

The LSD provides optimum distribution of power ac- cording to the difference in revolutions between the right and left rear wheels that may be caused by cer- tain driving conditions, thereby improving driving sta- bility on snow-covered, muddy or other slippery roads.

Power steering

Do not hold the steering wheel at the fully locked position left or right for more than five seconds. This may damage the power steering pump.

The power steering system operates only when the engine is running. If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system fails to function, you can steer but it will take much more effort.

NOTE Right after the engine has been started and before it has warmed up, you may hear a noise coming from areas adjacent to the power steering pump which is located at the right-front area of the en- gine compartment. This noise is normal. It does not indicate power steering system trouble.

7-32

Starting and operating

Braking

Braking tips

Never rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This can cause dangerous overheating of the brakes and needless wear on the brake pads and linings.

When the brakes get wet When driving in rain or after washing the vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a result, brake stopping dis- tance will be longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehi- cle at a safe speed while lightly depressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.

Use of engine braking Remember to make use of engine braking in addition to foot braking. When descending a grade, if only the foot brake is used, the brakes may start working im- properly because of brake fluid overheating, caused by overheated brake pads. To help prevent this, shift into a lower gear to get stronger engine braking.

Braking when a tire is punctured Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly when a tire is punctured. This could cause a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe place.

Brake system Two separate circuits

Your vehicle has a dual circuit brake systems. Each circuit works diagonally across the vehicle. If one cir- cuit of the brake system should fail, the other half of the system still works. If one circuit fails, the brake pedal will go down much closer to the floor than usual and you will need to press it down much harder. And a much longer distance will be needed to stop the vehi- cle.

Brake booster The brake booster uses engine manifold vacuum to assist braking force. Do not turn off the engine while driving because that will turn off the brake booster, re- sulting in poor braking power. The brakes will continue to work even when the brake booster completely stops functioning. If this happens, however, you will have to push the pedal much harder

7-33

Starting and operating

CONTINUED

than normal and the braking distance will increase.

Disc brake pad wear warning indica- tors

The disc brake pad wear warning indicators on the disc brakes give a warning noise when the brake pads are worn. If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard from the disc brakes while braking, immediately have your vehicle inspected by the nearest SUBARU dealer.

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Always use the utmost care in driving over- confidence because you are driving with an ABS equipped vehicle could easily lead to a se- rious accident.

The ABS system does not always decrease stopping distance. You should always maintain a safe following distance from other vehicles.

When driving on badly surfaced roads, gravel roads, icy road, or over deep newly fallen snow, stopping distances may be longer for a vehicle with the ABS system than one without. When driving under these conditions, therefore, re- duce your speed and leave ample distance from other vehicles.

When you feel the ABS system operating, you should maintain constant brake pedal pres- sure. Do not pump the brake pedal since doing so may defeat the operation of the ABS system.

HS7012BA

7-34

Starting and operating

The ABS system prevents the lock-up of wheels which may occur during sudden braking or braking on slip- pery road surfaces. This helps prevent the loss of steering control and directional stability caused by wheel lock-up.

When the ABS system is operating, you may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal when the ABS operates.

The ABS system will not operate when the vehicle speed is below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

ABS system self-check You may feel a slight shock in the brake pedal and hear the operating sound of ABS from the engine com- partment just after the vehicle is started. This is caused by an automatic functional test of the ABS sys- tem being carried out and does not indicate any abnor- mal condition.

ABS warning light

The ABS warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and goes out after about two seconds. This is an indication that the ABS system is working properly.

If the warning light behaves as follows, the ABS system may not be working properly. When the warning light is on, the ABS function shuts down; however, the conventional brake system continues to operate normally.

UB4010GA

7-35

Starting and operating

CONTINUED

The warning light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

The warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, but it does not go out even when the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 8 mph (12 km/h).

The warning light comes on during driving. If these occur, have the ABS system repaired at the first available opportunity by your SUBARU dealer.

NOTE If the warning light behavior is as described be- low, the ABS system may be considered normal.

The warning light comes on right after the en- gine is started but goes out immediately, remain- ing off.

The warning light remains on after the engine has been started, but it goes out when the vehicle speed reaches about 8 mph (12 km/h).

The warning light comes on during driving, but it goes out immediately and remains off. When driving with an insufficient battery voltage such as when the engine is jump started, the ABS warning light may come on. This is due to the low battery volt- age and does not indicate a malfunction. When the

battery becomes fully charged, the light will go out.

7-36

Starting and operating

Parking your vehicle

Never leave unattended children or pets in the vehicle. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent oper- ation of the vehicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, the temperature in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to them.

Do not park the vehicle over flammable mate- rials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags, as they may burn easily if they come near hot en- gine or exhaust system parts.

Be sure to stop the engine if you take a nap in the vehicle. If engine exhaust gas enters the passenger compartment, occupants in the ve- hicle could die from carbon monoxide (CO) contained in the exhaust gas.

Never drive while the parking brake is set be- cause this will cause unnecessary wear on the brake linings. Before starting to drive, always

make sure that the parking brake has been fully released.

To set the parking brake, press the brake pedal firmly and hold it down while fully pulling up the parking brake lever.

To release the parking brake, pull the lever up slightly, press the release button, then lower the lever while keeping the button pressed. When the parking brake is set while the engine is run- ning, the parking brake warning light comes on. After starting the vehicle, be sure that the warning light has gone out before the vehicle is driven. Refer to the

UB4001BA

7-37

Starting and operating

CONTINUED

Warning and indicator lights section (chapter 3).

When parking your vehicle, always set the parking brake firmly and put the shift lever in the 1 (1st) for an upgrade or R (Reverse) for a downgrade for manual transmission vehicles, or in the P (Park) position for automatic transmission vehicles. Always set the park- ing brake firmly when parking your vehicle. Never rely on the transmission alone to hold the vehicle.

When parking on a hill, always turn the steering wheel. When the vehicle is headed up the hill, the front wheels should be turned away from the curb.

When facing downhill, the front wheels should be turned into the curb.

UB7033AA

UB7032AA

7-38

Starting and operating

Cruise control

Do not use the cruise control under any of the following conditions. This may cause loss of vehicle control:

driving up or down a steep grade driving on slippery or winding roads driving in heavy traffic

Cruise control enables you to maintain a constant ve- hicle speed without holding your foot on the accelera- tor pedal and it is operative when the vehicle speed is 25 mph (40 km/h) or more. Make sure the main switch is turned OFF when the cruise control is not in use to avoid unintentionally by setting the cruise control.

To set cruise control 0

UB7038BA

ACCRES CANCELSETCOAST

HS7018BA

7-39

Starting and operating

CONTINUED

1. Push the CRUISE main switch. The indicator light on the switch will come on. 2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the vehicle reaches the desired speed. 3. Push the control lever downward in the SET, COAST direction and release it. Then release the ac- celerator pedal. The vehicle will maintain the desired speed.

At this time, the indicator light is illuminated in the combination meter. Vehicle speed can be temporarily increased while driving with the cruise control activated. Simply de- press the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

When the accelerator pedal is released, the vehicle will return to and maintain the previous cruising speed.

To temporarily cancel the cruise con- trol

There are four ways to cancel the cruise control tem- porarily:

Depress the brake pedal. Pull the control lever in the CANCEL direction. (if

so equipped) Depress the clutch pedal (manual transmission ve-

hicles only). Shift the selector lever into the N position (auto-

matic transmission vehicles only). Shift the shift lever into neutral position (manual

transmission vehicles only).

The indicator light in the combination meter goes off when the cruise control is cancelled. To resume the cruise control after it has been tempo- rarily canceled and with vehicle speed of about 20 mph (32 km/h) or more, push the control lever upward in the ACCEL, RESUME direction to return to the original cruising speed automatically. The indicator light in the combination meter will automatically come on at this time.

UB4010KA

7-40

Starting and operating

To turn off the cruise control There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:

Push the main switch again. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position (but

only when the vehicle is completely stopped).

To change the cruising speed To increase the speed (by control lever)

Push the control lever upward in the ACCEL, RE- SUME direction and hold it until the vehicle reaches the desired speed. Then, release the control lever. The vehicle speed at that moment will be memorized and treated as the new set speed.

When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the set speed is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can be increased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the control lever upward in the AC- CEL, RESUME direction quickly.

To increase the speed (by accelerator pedal) 1. Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the ve- hicle to the desired speed. 2. Push the control lever downward in the SET, COAST direction once. Now the desired speed is set and the vehicle will keep running at that speed without

depressing the accelerator pedal.

NOTE If the difference between the actual vehicle speed when the control lever is pushed downward and the speed last time you set it is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the vehicle speed will be lowered by 1 mph (1.6 km/h). This occurs because the cruise control system unit regards this lever operation as that intended to decrease the vehicle speed.

To decrease the speed (by control lever) Push the control lever downward in the SET, COAST direction and hold it until the vehicle reaches the de- sired speed. Then, release the control lever. The vehi- cle speed at that moment will be memorized and treat- ed as the new set speed.

When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the set speed is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can be lowered 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the control lever downward in the SET, COAST direction quickly.

To decrease the speed (by brake pedal) 1. Depress the brake pedal to release cruise control temporarily. 2. When the speed decreases to the desired speed,

7-41

Starting and operating

CONTINUED

press the control lever downward in the SET, COAST direction once. Now the desired speed is set and the vehicle will keep running at that speed without depressing the accelerator pedal.

Cruise control set indicator light Non-turbo models

The light comes on when vehicle speed has been set.

Turbo models The Cruise set indicator light comes on when the igni- tion switch is turned to the ON position and goes out after about three seconds. The light comes on when vehicle speed has been set.

NOTE If you move the cruise control lever while turn-

ing the ignition switch ON, the cruise control function is deactivated and the cruise control set indicator light flashes. To reactivate the cruise control function, turn the ignition switch back to the ACC or LOCK position, and then turn it again to the ON position.

If this indicator light and the indicator light flash simultaneously during driving, have the vehicle checked by your nearest SUBARU dealer.

8-1

8

Driving tips

New vehicle break-in driving the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) ............................... 8-2

Fuel economy hints ...................................... 8-2 Engine exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) .... 8-3 Catalytic converter ........................................ 8-4 Periodic inspections ..................................... 8-6 Driving in foreign countries ......................... 8-6 Driving tips for AWD vehicles ...................... 8-7 Off road driving ............................................. 8-9 Winter driving ................................................ 8-11

Operation during cold weather ........................ 8-11 Driving on snowy and icy roads ...................... 8-13 Corrosion protection ........................................ 8-14 Snow tires .......................................................... 8-14 Tire chains ......................................................... 8-15 Rocking the vehicle .......................................... 8-16

Loading your vehicle .................................... 8-16 Vehicle capacity weight ................................... 8-18 GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........ 8-19 Trailer hitch (if equipped) ............................. 8-20

Connecting a trailer .......................................... 8-20 When you do not tow a trailer ......................... 8-24

Trailer towing ................................................ 8-24 Warranties and maintenance ........................... 8-24 Maximum load limits ........................................ 8-25 Trailer hitches ................................................... 8-30 Connecting a trailer .......................................... 8-30 Trailer towing tips ............................................. 8-33

8-2

Driving tips

Driving tipsNew vehicle break-in driving the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) The performance and long life of your vehicle are de- pendent on how you handle and care for your vehicle while it is new. Follow these instructions during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km):

Do not race the engine. And do not allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm except in an emergency.

Do not drive at one constant engine or vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or slow.

Avoid starting suddenly and rapid acceleration, ex- cept in an emergency.

Avoid hard braking, except in an emergency.

The same break-in procedures should be applied to a newly installed or overhauled engine or when brake pads or brake linings are replaced with new ones.

Fuel economy hints The following suggestions will help to save your fuel.

Select the proper gear position for the speed and road conditions.

Avoid sudden acceleration or deceleration. Always accelerate gently until you reach the desired speed. Then try to maintain that speed for as long as possible.

Do not pump the accelerator and avoid racing the engine.

Avoid unnecessary engine idling. Keep the engine properly tuned. Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure shown

on the tire placard, which is located under the door latch on the drivers side. Low pressure will increase tire wear and fuel consumption.

Use the air conditioner only when necessary. Keep the front and rear wheels in proper alignment. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or cargo.

8-3

Driving tips

CONTINUED

Engine exhaust gas (Carbon monox- ide)

Never inhale engine exhaust gas. Engine ex- haust gas contains carbon monoxide, a color- less and odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

Always properly maintain the engine exhaust system to prevent engine exhaust gas from en- tering the vehicle.

Never run the engine in a closed space, such as a garage, except for the brief time needed to drive the vehicle in or out of it.

Avoid remaining in a parked vehicle for a lengthy time while the engine is running. If that is unavoidable, then use the ventilation fan to force fresh air into the vehicle.

Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free from snow, leaves or other obstructions to ensure that the ventilation system always works properly.

If at any time you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, have the problem checked and corrected as soon as possible. If you must drive under these conditions, drive

only with all windows fully open.

NOTE Due to the expansion and contraction of the met- als used in the manufacture of the exhaust sys- tem, you may hear a crackling sound coming from the exhaust system for a short time after the en- gine has been shut off. This sound is normal.

8-4

Driving tips

Catalytic converter

Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive or park the vehicle anywhere near flammable materials (e.g. grass, paper, rags or leaves), because the catalytic converter operates at very high tem- peratures.

Keep everyone and flammable materials away from the exhaust pipe while the engine is running. The exhaust gas is very hot.

Non-turbo models

HS8002BA

8-5

Driving tips

CONTINUED

Turbo models

The catalytic converter is installed in the exhaust sys- tem. It serves as catalyst to reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.

To avoid damage to the catalytic converter: Use only unleaded gasoline. Even a small amount

of leaded gasoline will damage the catalytic converter. Never start the engine by pushing or pulling the ve-

hicle. Avoid racing the engine. Never turn off the ignition switch while the vehicle is

moving. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel the engine

running rough (misfiring, backfiring or incomplete combustion), have your vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

Do not apply undercoating or rust prevention treat- ment to the heat shield of catalytic converter and the exhaust system.

US8511BA

8-6

Driving tips

Periodic inspections To keep your vehicle in the best condition at all times, always have the recommended maintenance services listed in the maintenance schedule in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet performed at the specified time or mileage intervals.

Driving in foreign countries When planning to use your vehicle in another country:

Confirm the availability of the correct fuel. (Refer to the Fuel requirements section in chapter 7.)

Comply with all regulations and requirements of each country.

8-7

Driving tips

CONTINUED

Driving tips for AWD vehicles

Always maintain a safe driving speed accord- ing to the road and weather conditions in order to avoid having an accident on a sharp turn, during sudden braking or under other similar conditions.

Always use the utmost care in driving over- confidence because you are driving an all wheel drive vehicle could easily lead to a seri- ous accident.

All wheel drive distributes the engine power to all four wheels. AWD vehicles provide better traction when driving on slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. By shifting power between the front and rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also provide added traction during acceler- ation, and added engine braking force during deceler- ation. Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle may handle differently than an ordinary two wheel drive vehicle and it contains some features unique to AWD. For safety purposes as well as to avoid damaging the AWD system, you should keep the following tips in mind:

HS8003BA

8-8

Driving tips

An AWD vehicle is better able to climb steeper roads under snowy or slippery conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle. There is little difference in han- dling, however, during extremely sharp turns or sud- den braking. Therefore, when driving down a slope or turning corners, be sure to reduce your speed and maintain an ample distance from other vehicles.

When replacing a tire, make sure you use only the same size, circumference, construction, brand, and load range as the original tires listed on the tire plac- ard. Using other sizes, circumferences or construction may result in severe mechanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle and may affect ride, handling, braking, speedometer/odometer calibration, and clearance between the body and tires. It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control.

If you use a temporary spare tire to replace a flat tire, be sure to use the original temporary spare tire stored in the vehicle. Using other sizes may result in severe mechanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle.

Always check the cold tire pressure before starting to drive. The recommended tire pressure is provided on the tire placard, which is located under the door latch on the drivers side.

Tire chains should always be placed on the front wheels only.

There are some precautions that you must observe when towing your vehicle. For detail information, see Towing section in chapter 9.

8-9

Driving tips

CONTINUED

Off road driving

Always maintain a safe driving speed accord- ing to the road and weather conditions in order to avoid having an accident on a sharp turn, during sudden braking or under other similar conditions.

Always use the utmost care in driving over- confidence because you are driving an all wheel drive vehicle could easily lead to a seri- ous accident.

Because of the AWD feature and higher ground clear- ance, your SUBARU can be driven on ordinary roads or off-road. But please keep in mind that an AWD SUBARU is neither a conventional off-road vehicle nor an all-terrain vehicle. If you do take your SUBARU off- road, certain common sense precautions such as the following should be taken:

Make certain that you and all of your passengers are wearing seatbelts.

Carry some emergency equipment, such as a tow- ing rope or chain, a shovel, wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or citizens band radio.

Drive carefully. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in dangerous areas or over rough terrain.

Slow down and employ extra caution at all times. When driving off-road, you will not have the benefit of marked traffic lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and the like.

Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead, drive ei- ther straight up or straight down the slopes. A vehicle can much more easily tip over sideways than it can end over end. Avoid driving straight up or down slopes that are too steep.

Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, especially at higher speeds.

Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Instead drive with your fingers and thumbs on the outside of the rim.

If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check the depth of the water and the bottom of the stream bed for firmness and ensure that the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly and com- pletely through the stream. The water should be shal- low enough that it does not reach the vehicles under- carriage. Water entering the engine air intake or the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto electrical parts may damage your vehicle and may cause it to stall. Never attempt to drive through rushing water; regard-

8-10

Driving tips

less of its depth, it can wash away the ground from un- der your tires, resulting in possible loss of traction and even vehicle rollover.

Always check your brakes for effectiveness immedi- ately after driving in sand, mud or water. Do this by driving slowly and stepping on the brake pedal. Re- peat that process several times to dry out the brake discs and brake pads.

Do not drive or park over or near flammable materi- als such as dry grass or fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The exhaust system is very hot while the engine is running and right after engine stops. This could create a fire hazard.

After driving through tall grass, mud, rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones, sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the underbody. Clear off any such matter from the under- body. If the vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody, a mechanical breakdown or fire could occur.

Secure all cargo carried inside the vehicle and make certain that it is not piled higher than the seatbacks. During sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo could be thrown around in the vehicle and cause injury.

Do not pile heavy loads on the roof. Those loads raise the vehicles center of gravity and make it more prone to tip over.

Cargo should be evenly distributed over the cargo bed. Keep heavier items as low and far forward as possible. Loading the vehicle improperly can deterio- rate handling capability and contribute to loss of vehi- cle control.

Be sure the cargo is secured properly. Unsecured cargo in the cargo bed can be thrown around when driving on off-road. To prevent loose cargo from enter- ing the passenger compartment, always close the switchback door while driving off-road.

Always close the tailgate while driving off-road. Also remove the bed extender (if so equipped) to avoid damage.

If you must rock the vehicle to free it from sand or mud, depress the accelerator pedal slightly and move the selector lever back and forth between D and R repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the best pos- sible traction, avoid spinning the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.

When the road surface is extremely slippery, you can obtain better traction by starting the vehicle with the transmission in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT).

Never equip your vehicle with tires larger than those specified in this manual.

Wash the vehicles underbody after off-road driving. Suspension components are particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they need to be washed thoroughly.

8-11

Driving tips

CONTINUED

Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle under hard-driv- ing conditions such as rough roads or off roads will ne- cessitate more frequent replacement of engine oil, brake fluid and transmission oil than that specified in the maintenance schedule described in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet.

Remember that damage done to your SUBARU while operating it off-road and not using common sense pre- cautions such as those listed above is not eligible for warranty coverage.

Winter driving

Operation during cold weather Carry some emergency equipment, such as tire chains, a window scraper, a bag of sand, flares, a small shovel, and jumper cables.

Check the battery and cables. Cold temperatures re- duce battery capacity. The battery must be in good condition to provide enough power for cold winter starts.

Use an engine oil of proper grade and viscosity for cold weather. Heavy summer oil will cause harder

UB8046AA

8-12

Driving tips

starting. Keep the door locks from freezing by squirting them with deicer or glycerin.

Forcing a frozen door open may damage or separate the rubber weather strips around the door. If the door is frozen, use hot water to melt the ice, and afterwards thoroughly wipe the water away.

Use a windshield washer fluid that contains an anti- freeze solution. Do not use engine antifreeze or other substitutes because they may damage the paint of the vehicle.

Before driving your vehicle Before entering the vehicle, remove any snow or ice from your shoes because that could make the pedals slippery and dangerous.

While warming up the vehicle before driving, check that the accelerator pedal, brake pedal, and all other controls operate smoothly.

Clear away ice and snow that has accumulated under the fenders to avoid making steering difficult. During severe winter driving, stop when and where it is safe to do so and check under the fenders periodically.

Parking in cold weather

Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle if you park the vehicle in snow with the engine running.

Do not use the parking brake when parking for long periods in cold weather since it could freeze in that po- sition. Instead, observe the following: 1. Place the shift lever in 1 or R for manual trans- mission vehicles, and in P for automatic transmission vehicles. 2. Use tire stops under the tires to prevent the vehicle from moving.

When the vehicle is parked in snow or when it snows, raise the wiper blades off the glass to prevent damage to them. When the vehicle has been left parked after use on roads heavily covered with snow, or has been left parked during a snowstorm, icing may develop on the brake system, which could cause poor braking action. Check for snow or ice buildup on the suspension, disc brakes and brake hoses underneath the vehicle.

8-13

Driving tips

CONTINUED

If there is caked snow or ice, remove it, being careful not to damage the disc brakes and brake hoses and ABS harness.

Refueling in cold weather To help prevent moisture from forming in the fuel sys- tem and the risk of its freezing, use of an antifreeze ad- ditive in the fuel tank is recommended during cold weather. Use only additives that are specifically designed for this purpose. When an antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts longer if the tank is refilled whenever the fuel level reaches half empty.

If your SUBARU is not going to be used for an extend- ed period, it is best to have the fuel tank filled to capac- ity.

Driving on snowy and icy roads

Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads such as snowy or icy roads. This may cause loss of vehicle control.

To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid sudden brak-

ing, abrupt acceleration, high-speed driving, and sharp turning when driving on snowy or icy roads. Always maintain ample distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you to avoid the need for sud- den braking. To supplement the foot brake, use the engine brake effectively to control the vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear when necessary.) Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such behavior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly leading to loss of vehicle control.

An anti-lock brake system (ABS) enhances your vehi- cles braking performance on snowy and icy roads. Refer to the ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) section in chapter 7 for information on braking on slippery sur- faces.

Wiper operation when snowing Before driving in cold weather, make sure the wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield or rear window. If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield or rear window, use the defroster with the airflow control dial in the position and the temperature control dial set for maximum warmth until the wiper blades are completely thawed out. If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper deicer, it is helpful to thaw the windshield wiper blades.

8-14

Driving tips

When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts to stick on the surface of the windshield despite wiper operation, use the defroster with the airflow control dial in and the temperature control dial set for maximum warmth. After the windshield gets warmed enough to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away using the windshield washer.

Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the wiper from working effectively. If snow is stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to a safe place, then remove it. If you stop the vehicle at road side, use the hazard warning flasher to alert other drivers.

We recommend use of non-freezing type wiper blades (winter blades) during the seasons you could have snow and sub-zero temperatures. Blades of this type give superior wiping performance in snowy conditions. Be sure to use blades that are suitable for your vehi- cle.

Corrosion protection Refer to the Corrosion protection section (chapter 10).

Snow tires

When replacing original tires with winter (snow) tires, make sure you use only the same size and construction as recommended. Using other sizes and construction may affect speed- ometer/odometer calibration and clearance be- tween the body and tires. It also may be danger- ous and lead to loss of vehicle control.

You must install four winter tires that are of the same size, circumferences, construction, brand, and load range. Mixing other sizes, cir- cumferences or constructions may result in se- vere mechanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle and may affect ride, handling, braking and speedometer/odometer calibra- tion. It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control.

Do not use a combination of radial, belted bias or bias tires since it may cause dangerous handling characteristics and lead to an acci- dent.

Your vehicle is equipped with all season tires which are designed to provide an adequate measure of trac-

8-15

Driving tips

CONTINUED

tion, handling and braking performance in year-round driving. In winter, it may be possible to enhance per- formance through use of tires designed specifically for winter driving conditions. If you choose to install winter tires on your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire size and type. You must in- stall four winter tires that are of the same size, con- struction, brand and load range and you should never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires since this may re- sult in dangerous handling characteristics. When you choose a tire, make sure that there is enough clear- ance between the tire and vehicle body.

Remember to drive with care at all times regardless of the type of tires on your vehicle.

Your vehicle comes with P225/60R16 all season tires as original equipment. You should be aware that some winter tires with that same size designa- tion may actually be too large for the vehicle and may cause rubbing on sharp turns. Listed below is the winter tire size that we recommend.

Recommended winter (snow) tire size P215/60R16 Studless

Tire chains

Tire chains cannot be used on tires listed below because of lack of clearance between the tires and vehicle body.

P225/60R16 tires P215/60R16 winter (snow) tires

Driving on snowy grades or icy roads may require the use of tire chains, in which case put the chains on the front wheels only. Use only SAE class S type chains that are of the correct size for your tires so as not to damage the vehicle body or suspension. When driving with tire chains, drive at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h). When a temporary spare tire is on a front wheel, replace the temporary spare tire with the rear tire on the same side of the vehicle, and then fit chains on the front tires. Always use the utmost care when driving with tire chains overconfidence because you are driving with tire chains could easily lead to a serious accident.

8-16

Driving tips

Rocking the vehicle If you must rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand, or mud, depress the accelerator pedal slightly and move the selector lever back and forth between D and R repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the best possible traction, avoid spinning the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.

When the road surface is extremely slippery, you can obtain better traction by starting the vehicle with the transmission in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT).

Refer to the Automatic transmission section in chap- ter 7 for information on holding the transmission in 2nd position.

Loading your vehicle

Never allow passengers to ride on the folded rear seatback or in the cargo bed. Doing so may result in serious injury.

Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than the top of the seatback because it could tumble forward and injure passengers in the

HS8005BA

8-17

Driving tips

CONTINUED

event of a sudden stop or accident. Keep lug- gage or cargo low, as close to the floor as pos- sible.

When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can to prevent it from being thrown around inside the vehicle during sudden stops, sharp turns or in an accident.

Do not pile heavy loads on the roof. These loads raise the vehicles center of gravity and make it more prone to tip over.

Secure lengthy items properly to prevent them from shooting forward and causing seri- ous injury during a sudden stop.

Never exceed the maximum load limit. If you do, some parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause per- sonal injury. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.

Cargo should be evenly distributed over the cargo bed. Keep heavier items as low and far forward as possible. Loading the vehicle im- properly can deteriorate handling capability and contribute to loss of vehicle control.

Be sure the cargo is secured properly. Unse- cured cargo in the cargo bed can be thrown around during sudden braking, in a sharp turn

or during rapid acceleration, which could cre- ate a dangerous road hazard.

Do not carry spray cans, containers with flam- mable or corrosive liquids or any other danger- ous items inside the passenger compartment.

NOTE For better fuel economy, do not carry unneeded cargo.

8-18

Driving tips

Vehicle capacity weight The load capacity of your vehicle is determined by weight, not by available cargo space. The total weight you can carry in your vehicle is shown on the vehicle placard attached to the drivers side door jamb. Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on your vehicles placard. It includes the total weight of driver and all passengers and their belongings, any optional equipment such as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier, etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.

UB8031BA

UB8053BA

8-19

Driving tips

CONTINUED

GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating)

The certification label attached to the drivers side door shows GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating). The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the combined total of weight of the vehicle, fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any op- tional equipment and trailer tongue load. Therefore, the GVW changes depending on the situation.

In addition, the total weight applied to each axle (GAW) must never exceed the GAWR. The front and

rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocating luggage in- side the vehicle. Even if the total weight of your luggage is lower than the vehicle capacity weight, either front or rear GAW may exceed the GAWR, depending on the distribution of the luggage. When possible, the load should be evenly distributed throughout the vehicle. If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you should con- firm that GVW and front and rear GAWs are within the GVWR and GAWR by putting your vehicle on a vehi- cle scale, found at a commercial weighing station.

Do not use replacement tires with a lower load range than the originals because they may lower the GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a high- er load range than the originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations.

UB8043BA

8-20

Driving tips

Trailer hitch (if equipped)

Never exceed the maximum weight specified for the trailer hitch. Exceeding the maximum weight could cause an accident resulting in se- rious personal injuries. Permissible trailer weight changes depending on the situation. Re- fer to the next section Trailer towing for pos- sible recommendations and limitations.

Trailer brakes are required when the towing load exceeds 1,000 lbs (453 kg). Be sure your trailer has safety chains and that each chain will hold the trailers maximum gross weight. Towing trailers without safety chains could cre- ate a traffic safety hazard if the trailer separates from the hitch due to coupling damage or hitch ball damage.

Be sure to check the hitch pin and safety pin for positive locking placement before towing a trailer. If the ball mount comes off the hitch re- ceiver, the trailer could get loose and create a traffic safety hazard.

Use only the ball mount supplied with this hitch. Use the hitch only as a weight carrying hitch. Do not use with any type of weight dis-

tributing hitch.

The trailer hitch is designed to tow a Class 1 rated load. A maximum of 2,400 lbs (1,087 kg) gross trailer weight and a maximum of 200 lbs (90 kg) gross tongue weight are permissible for the trailer hitch. When you tow a trailer, follow the instructions in the next section Trailer towing.

Connecting a trailer

UB8047BA

8-21

Driving tips

CONTINUED

The license plate bracket will hit the hitch ball and may be damaged if the tailgate is opened and the license plate bracket is at the lowered/ open position. Close the tailgate and return the license plate bracket to its normal position flush against the tailgate itself whenever you tow a trailer or whenever a trailer is hitched to the vehicle.

1. Before connecting the ball mount to the hitch re- ceiver, close the tailgate and return the license plate bracket to its normal retracted position up against the tailgate. Refer to License plate bracket under the heading Tailgate in chapter 2 for more information on the function of the license plate bracket. 2. Remove the receiver cover from the hitch receiver tube. Then insert the ball mount into the hitch receiver tube.

3. Insert the hitch pin into the hole on the hitch receiv- er tube so that the pin passes through the ball mount.

UB8018BA

8-22

Driving tips

4. Insert the safety pin into the hitch pin securely. 5. Pull the ball mount to make sure it does not come off the hitch receiver.

1) Hitch ball installation point 2) Hooks for safety chains

6. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate for the ball mount and your trailer. The hitch ball must be securely installed on the ball mount. 7. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball. 8. Connect the trailer and the hitch with safety chains that will hold the trailers maximum gross weight. The chains should cross under the trailer tongue to prevent the tongue from dropping onto the ground in case it should disconnect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the chains taking tight-turn situations into ac- count; however, be careful not to let them drag on the

HS8012BA 1

2

UB8020BB

8-23

Driving tips

CONTINUED

ground.

Do not connect safety chains to part of the ve- hicle other than the safety chain hooks.

Hitch harness connector

9. Connect the hitch wire harnesss black four-pin wire connector to the towing trailers wire harness. 10.Confirm proper function of the hitch wire harness by individually activating the brake, right turn signal, left turn signal, stop, and parking lights on the trailer.

NOTE Always disconnect the trailer wire harness before launching or retrieving a watercraft.

UG8034BA

HS8015BA

8-24

Driving tips

When you do not tow a trailer

Remove the ball mount from the hitch receiver tube when the tailgate is open and the bed ex- tender is used. The rear license plate will not be visible because the license plate bracket can not be used at the lowered/open position when the ball mount is connected. In addition, the license plate bracket will hit the hitch ball and may be damaged if the tailgate is opened and the license plate bracket is at the lowered/open position.

Remove the ball mount from the hitch receiver tube and insert the receiver cover onto the hitch receiver tube.

Place the dust cap over the four-pin connector of the hitch wire harness to protect against possible damage.

Occasionally lubricate terminals of the four-pin con- nector using the terminal grease, and cover with the attached rubber cap.

Trailer towing Your vehicle is designed and intended to be used pri- marily to carry passengers and cargo. Towing a trailer puts additional loads on your vehicles engine, driv- etrain, brakes, tires and suspension and has an ad- verse effect on fuel economy. If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety and satis- faction depend upon proper use of correct equipment and cautious operation of your vehicle. Seek the ad- vice of your SUBARU dealer to assist you in purchas- ing a hitch and other necessary towing equipment ap- propriate for your vehicle. In addition, be sure to follow the instructions on correct installation and use provid- ed by the trailer and other towing equipment manufac- turers. SUBARU assumes no responsibility for injuries or ve- hicle damage that result from trailer towing equipment, or from any errors or omissions in the instructions ac- companying such equipment or for your failure to fol- low the proper instructions.

Warranties and maintenance SUBARU warranties do not apply to vehicle damage or malfunction caused by trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to tow a trailer, more frequent maintenance will be required due to the additional load. (Refer to Main-

8-25

Driving tips

CONTINUED

tenance schedule under severe driving conditions in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet.) Under no circumstances should a trailer be towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle with any new powertrain component (engine, transmission, differential, wheel bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of driving.

Maximum load limits

Never exceed the maximum load limits ex- plained below. Exceeding the maximum load limits could cause personal injury and/or vehi- cle damage.

Adequate size trailer brakes are required when the trailer and its cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg) total weight.

Before towing a trailer, check the trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs and tongue load. Make sure the load and its distribution in your vehicle

and trailer are acceptable.

Total trailer weight

Total trailer weight

The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo load) must never exceed the maximum weight shown in the following table.

HS8016AA

8-26

Driving tips

Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

Gross Vehicle Weight

The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the combined total of the weight of the vehicle, driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment installed on your vehicle. Therefore, the GVW changes depending on the situation. Determine the GVW each time before going on a trip by putting your vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.

Model Conditions Maximum total trailer

weight

MT models When towing a trailer with- out brakes.

1,000 lbs (453 kg)

When towing a trailer with brakes.

2,400 lbs (1,087 kg)

AT models When towing a trailer with- out brakes.

1,000 lbs (453 kg)

When towing a trailer with brakes.

2,400 lbs (1,087 kg)

When towing a trailer on a long uphill grade continu- ously for over 5 miles (8 km) with an outside temperature of 104F (40C) or above.

1,200 lbs (543 kg)

UB8038BA

8-27

Driving tips

CONTINUED

GVWR is shown on the certification label located on the drivers door of your vehicle.

Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

Gross Axle Weight

The total weight applied to each axle (GAW) must nev- er exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocating passengers and luggage inside the vehicle.

UB8043BA

UB8039BA

8-28

Driving tips

The front and rear GAWR are also shown on the cer- tification label. To check both GVWR and GAWR and to confirm that the total weight and weight distribution are within safe driving limits, you should have your vehicle and trailer weighed at a commercial weighing station. Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to prevent a change in weight distribution while driving.

Tongue load

Tongue load

If the trailer is loaded with more weight in the back of trailers axle than in the front, the load is taken off the rear axle of the towing vehicle. This may cause the rear wheels to skid, espe- cially during braking or when vehicle speed is reduced during cornering, resulting in over- steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.

UB8043BA

HS8019AA

8-29

Driving tips

CONTINUED

Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from 8 to 11 per- cent of the total trailer weight and does not exceed the maximum value of 200 lbs (90 kg).

1) Jack 2) Bathroom scale

The tongue load can be weighed with a bathroom scale as shown in the illustration below. When weigh- ing the tongue load, be sure to position the towing cou- pler at the height at which it would be during actual towing, using a jack as shown.

F: Front

The tongue load can be adjusted by proper distribution of the load in the trailer. Never load the trailer with more weight in the back than in the front; approximate- ly 60 percent of the trailer load should be in the front and approximately 40 percent in the rear. Also, distrib- ute the load as evenly as possible on both the left and right sides. Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to prevent a change in weight distribution while driving.

21

UB8040BB

F

60% 40% 50% 50%

HS8021BB

8-30

Driving tips

Trailer hitches

Never drill the frame or under-body of your ve- hicle to install a commercial trailer hitch. If you do, dangerous exhaust gas, water or mud may enter the passenger compartment through the drilled hole. Exhaust gas contains carbon mon- oxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled. Also, drill- ing the frame or under-body of your vehicle could cause deterioration of strength of your vehicle and cause corrosion around the drilled hole.

Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system, brake system, or other systems when installing a hitch or other trailer towing equipment.

Do not use axle-mounted hitches as they can cause damage to the axle housing, wheel bear- ings, wheels or tires.

The use of a genuine SUBARU trailer hitch is recom-

mended. A genuine SUBARU hitch is available from your SUBARU dealer. If use of a non-genuine hitch is unavoidable, be sure the hitch is suited to your vehicle and trailer. Consult with a professional hitch supplier to assist you in choosing an appropriate hitch for your vehicle. Be sure to follow all of the hitch manufacturers instructions for installation and use. Never use a hitch that mounts only to the rear bumper. The bumper is not designed to handle that type of load. For all types of hitches, regularly check that the hitch mounting bolts and nuts are tight.

Connecting a trailer Trailer brakes

Adequate size trailer brakes are required when the trailer and its cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg) total weight.

Do not directly connect your trailers hydrau- lic brake system to the hydraulic brake system in your vehicle. Direct connection would cause the vehicles brake performance to deteriorate

8-31

Driving tips

CONTINUED

and could lead to an accident.

If your trailers total weight (trailer weight plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs (453 kg), the trailer is re- quired to be equipped with its own brake system. Elec- tric brakes or surge brakes are recommended, and must be installed properly. Check that your trailers brakes conform with Federal, state/province and/or other applicable regulations. Your SUBARUs brake system is not designed to be tapped into the trailers hydraulic brake system. Please ask your SUBARU dealer and professional trailer supplier for more infor- mation about the trailers brake system.

Trailer safety chains

Always use safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer. Towing trailer without safety chains could create a traffic safety hazard if the trailer separates from the hitch due to coupling damage or hitch ball damage.

In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch ball should break or become disconnected, the trailer could get

loose and create a traffic safety hazard. For safety, always connect the towing vehicle and trailer with trailer safety chains. Pass the chains cross- ing each other under the trailer tongue to prevent the trailer from dropping onto the ground in case the trailer tongue should disconnect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the chains taking tight-turn situations into account; however, be careful not to let them drag on the ground. For more information about the safety chain connec- tion, refer to the instructions for your hitch and trailer.

Side mirrors

After hitching a trailer to your vehicle, check that the

UB8041BA

8-32

Driving tips

standard side mirrors provide a good rearward field of view without significant blind spots. If significant blind spots occur with the vehicles standard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that conform with Federal, state/ province and/or other applicable regulations.

Trailer lights

Direct splicing or other improper connection of trailer lights may damage your vehicles electri- cal system and cause a malfunction of your ve- hicles lighting system.

Connection of trailer lights to your vehicles electrical system requires modifications to the vehicles lighting circuit to increase its capacity and accommodate wir- ing changes. To ensure the trailer lights are connected properly, please consult your SUBARU dealer. Check for proper operation of the turn signals, the brake lights and parking lights each time you hitch up.

Tires

Never tow a trailer when the temporary spare

tire is used. The temporary spare tire is not de- signed to sustain the towing load. Use of the temporary spare tire when towing can result in failure of the spare tire and/or less stability of the vehicle.

Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle are properly inflated.

The recommended cold tire pressure is shown on the vehicle placard attached to the drivers side door jamb.

Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper infla- tion pressure should be in accordance with the trailer manufacturers specifications.

In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire when towing a trailer, ask a commercial road service to repair the flat tire.

If you carry a regular size spare tire in your vehicle or trailer as a precaution against getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare tire is firmly secured.

8-33

Driving tips

CONTINUED

Trailer towing tips

Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) when towing a trailer in hilly country on hot days.

When towing a trailer, steering, stability, stopping distance and braking performance will be different from normal operation. For safetys sake, you should employ extra caution when towing a trailer and you should never speed. You should also keep the following tips in mind:

Before starting out on a trip Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-hitch mount-

ing are in good condition. If any problems are appar- ent, do not tow the trailer.

Check that the vehicle sits horizontally with the trail- er attached. If the vehicle is tipped sharply up at the front and down at the rear, check the total trailer weight, GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then con- firm that the load and its distribution are acceptable.

Check that the tire pressures are correct. Check that the vehicle and trailer are connected

properly. Confirm that.

the trailer tongue is connected properly to the hitch ball. the trailer lights connector is connected properly and trailers brake lights illuminate when the vehi- cles brake pedal is pressed, and that the trailers turn signal lights flash when the vehicles turn signal lever is operated. the safety chains are connected properly. all cargo in the trailer is secured safety in position. the side mirrors provide a good rearward field of view without a significant blind spot. Sufficient time should be taken to learn the feel of

the vehicle/trailer combination before starting out on a trip. In an area free of traffic, practice turning, stopping and backing up.

Driving with a trailer You should allow for considerably more stopping

distance when towing a trailer. Avoid sudden braking because it may result in skidding or jackknifing and loss of control.

Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accelerations. If your vehicle has a manual transmission, always start out in first gear and release the clutch at moderate en- gine revolution.

Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and rapid lane changes.

Slow down before turning. Make a longer than nor-

8-34

Driving tips

mal turning radius because the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In a tight turn, the trailer could hit your vehicle.

Crosswinds will adversely affect the handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing sway. Crosswinds can be due to weather conditions or the passing of large trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly grip the steering wheel and slow down immediately but gradu- ally.

When passing other vehicles, considerable dis- tance is required because of the added weight and length caused by attaching the trailer to your vehicle.

1) Left turn 2) Right turn

Backing up with a trailer is difficult and takes prac- tice. When backing up with a trailer, never accelerate or steer rapidly. When turning back, grip the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand and turn it to the left for a left turn, and turn it to the right for a right turn.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing the trailer and have repairs performed immediately by the nearest SUBARU deal- er.

Driving on grades Before going down a steep hill, slow down and shift

into lower gear (if necessary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the engine braking effect and prevent overheat- ing of your vehicles brakes. Do not make sudden downshifts.

When driving uphill in hot weather, the air condition- er may turn off automatically to protect the engine from overheating.

When driving uphill in hot weather, pay attention to the water temperature gauge pointer (for all vehicles) and AT OIL TEMP warning light (for AT vehicles) since the engine and transmission are relatively prone to overheating under these conditions. If the water tem- perature gauge pointer approaches the OVERHEAT zone or the AT OIL TEMP warning light illuminates, immediately switch off the air conditioner and stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place. Refer to the Engine

1 2

HS8023BB

8-35

Driving tips

CONTINUED

overheating section in chapter 9, and Warning and indicator lights section in chapter 3.

NOTE (Turbo models only) In a vehicle that has an automatic transmission, the engine is less likely to overheat with the D range selected than it is with the manual mode se- lected.

If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, avoid using the accelerator pedal to stay stationary on an uphill slope instead of using the parking brake or foot brake. That may cause the transmission fluid to over- heat.

Non-turbo models only: If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission, avoid driving with the gear selector lever in D when towing a heavy trailer to prevent fluid overheating. A lower gear should be used.

Parking on a grade Always block the wheels under both vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly. You should not park on a hill or slope. But if parking on a hill or slope cannot be avoided, you should take the following steps: 1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal down. 2. Have someone place wheel blocks under both the

vehicle and trailer wheels. 3. When the wheel blocks are in place, release the regular brakes slowly until the blocks absorb the load. 4. Apply the regular brakes and then apply the park- ing brake; slowly release the regular brakes. 5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (manual transmission) or P (automatic transmission) and shut off the en- gine.

9-1

9

In case of emergency

If you park your vehicle in an emergency .. 9-2 Jack and tools ............................................... 9-3

Location of jack and tools ............................... 9-3 Removing jack and tool bag ............................ 9-3 Restoring jack and tools .................................. 9-5

Spare tire ....................................................... 9-7 Removing the spare tire ................................... 9-7 Re-storage of spare tire ................................... 9-9

Temporary spare tire .................................... 9-10 Using the temporary spare tire ........................ 9-10

Flat tires ......................................................... 9-12 Changing a flat tire ........................................... 9-12

Jump starting ................................................ 9-18 How to jump start ............................................. 9-19

Engine overheating ....................................... 9-21 If steam is coming from the engine

compartment .................................................. 9-21 If no steam is coming from the engine

compartment .................................................. 9-21 Towing ........................................................... 9-22

Towing and tie-down hooks ............................ 9-23 Using a flat-bed truck ....................................... 9-27 Towing with all wheels on the ground ............ 9-27

Moonroof if the moonroof cannot be closed ......................................................... 9-28

9-2

In case of emergency

In case of emergencyIf you park your vehicle in an emer- gency

The hazard warning flasher should be used in day or night to warn other drivers when you have to park your vehicle under emergency conditions. Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.

The hazard warning flasher can be activated regard- less of the ignition switch position. Turn on the hazard warning by pushing the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it off by pushing the switch again.

NOTE When the hazard warning flasher is on, the turn signals do not work.

UB8002BA

9-3

In case of emergency

CONTINUED

Jack and tools The jack supplied with the vehicle is designed only for changing a tire. Before using the jack, see the Flat tires section in this chapter for instructions and precautions.

Location of jack and tools

The jack and tool bag are located in the left side rear quarter pocket at the back side of the rear seatback.

A wheel nut wrench, jack drive tube, tire holding rod, tire holding retainer, screwdriver, moonroof wrench and two belts are included in the tool bag.

Removing jack and tool bag

Before folding down the seatback, check that there is nothing in the seatback pocket. If there is something in the pocket, it could be damaged or cause damage to the seatback and rear cen- ter console when the seatback is folded.

UB9091BA

UB9079AA

9-4

In case of emergency

0

1) Red A) LOCK B) UNLOCK

1. Pull the rear seatback locks up and fold down the rear seatback to gain access to the rear quarter pock- ets at both sides.

2. Open the left hand pocket lid by turning the knob. 3. Take the tool bag out of the pocket.

1

A B

UB1109BB UB9074BA

9-5

In case of emergency

CONTINUED

4. Loosen the jack holding screw by turning counter- clockwise and remove the jack from the pocket.

NOTE Be careful not to lose the jack holding screw af-

ter removing it. Make sure the jack is well lubricated before us-

ing it.

Restoring jack and tools 0

1. Strap the wheel nut wrench, jack drive tube, and tire holding rod together using the two belts, then re- turn them to the tool bag together with the other tools. 2. Contract the jack by turning the jack screw counter- clockwise to the end.

UB9075BA

UB9082BA

9-6

In case of emergency

3. Place the jack onto the bracket in the pocket.

4. Securely fix the jack with the jack holding screw by turning it clockwise. 5. Install the left hand pocket lid and lock it by turning the knob.

NOTE Confirm no looseness exists after securing the jack. Looseness may cause a rattle while the vehi- cle is moving.

After the jack and the tool bag have been re- stored in the rear quarter pocket, make sure that the rear seatback has been securely locked. When securely locked, the red marks on the locking knobs are no longer visible.

UB9076BA

UB9075CA

9-7

In case of emergency

CONTINUED

Spare tire

The spare tire is stored in the spare tire holder located under the rear of the cargo bed. The spare tire holder has a hoist mechanism that can lower and raise the spare tire easily. The spare tire holder is designed to carry only the temporary spare tire that comes with your vehicle. Before using the temporary spare tire, see the Tem- porary spare tire section in this chapter for instruc- tions and precautions.

Removing the spare tire 1. Take the wheel nut wrench out of the tool bag. Re- fer to the Jack and tools section in this chapter for its storage location.

2. Open the tailgate and remove the rubber cap from the cargo bed. Pull up the RELEASE portion of the cap when removing it. 3. Locate the hex-headed hoist shaft end inside the hole.

UB9053BA

UB9054BA

9-8

In case of emergency

4. Turn the hoist shaft end counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench until the temporary spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle.

Do not put your fingers into the center hole of the temporary spare tire while you pulling it out, because they might be pinched in between the wheel and the retainer.

5. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the center of the temporary spare tire. 6. After the temporary spare tire is removed from the cable, the cable must be wound up completely by turn- ing the hoist nut shaft clockwise until you hear a click- ing sound. Also visually inspect the cable to make cer- tain that there is no longer any slack present.

When using the spare tire hoist: After the temporary spare tire is removed from the cable, wind the cable up completely until the retainer at end of the cable sits against the

UB9055BA UB9056AA

9-9

In case of emergency

CONTINUED

underside of the vehicle. Driving with the cable not retracted fully could result in damage to the adjacent under floor parts and lead to a serious accident.

The spare tire holder is designed to carry only the smaller temporary spare tire. Never store a full size tire (flat or otherwise) in the spare tire holder. Doing so can result in dam- age to adjacent under floor parts and can lead to a serious accident.

When using the spare tire hoist: Do not use air tools or power tools to turn the spare tire hoist shaft end. If you do, it could re- sult in severe mechanical damage to the spare tire hoist.

Re-storage of spare tire 1. Turn the spare tire hoist shaft end counterclock- wise with the wheel nut wrench to loosen the cable sufficiently enough to allow the cable end retainer go through center hole of the temporary spare tire. 2. Insert the retainer through the center hole of the

temporary tire (with the outside of the tire facing up). 3. Turn the hoist shaft end clockwise with the wheel nut wrench to wind the cable up completely until you hear a few clicking sounds. Confirm that the temporary spare tire holding cable has been wound up complete- ly by shaking the temporary tire.

If the temporary spare tire is not stored secure- ly, it could damage adjacent areas of the vehi- cle and make an abnormal noise.

4. Put the rubber cap on the hoist shaft end hole. 5. Place the wheel nut wrench back into the tool bag and store the jack and tool bag in their storage loca- tions.

9-10

In case of emergency

Temporary spare tire

Using the temporary spare tire

Never tow a trailer when the temporary spare tire is used. The temporary spare tire is not de- signed to sustain the towing load. Use of the temporary spare tire when towing can result in failure of the spare tire and/or less stability of the vehicle and may lead to an accident.

Never use any temporary spare tire other than the original. Using other sizes may result in se- vere mechanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle.

The temporary spare tire is smaller and lighter than a conventional tire and is designed for emergency use only. Remove the temporary spare tire and re-install the conventional tire as soon as possible because the spare tire is designed only for temporary use.

Check the inflation pressure of the temporary spare tire periodically to keep the tire ready for use. The cor- rect pressure is 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2). When using the temporary spare tire, note the follow- ing:

Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). Do not put a tire chain on the temporary spare tire.

Because of the smaller tire size, a tire chain will not fit properly.

Do not use two or more temporary spare tires at the same time.

Do not drive over obstacles. This tire has a smaller diameter, so road clearance is reduced.

9-11

In case of emergency

CONTINUED

1) Tread wear indicator bar 2) Indicator location mark

When the wear indicator appears on the tread, re- place the tire.

1) Spare fuse 2) FWD connector

NOTE [Automatic transmission vehicles except Turbo vehicle] Before driving your vehicle with the tem- porary spare tire, put a spare fuse inside the FWD connector located in the engine compartment and confirm that the AWD warning light comes on. The all wheel drive capability of the vehicle has now been deactivated. After re-installing the conven- tional tire, remove the spare fuse from the FWD connector in order to reactivate all wheel drive.

1

2

UG0106

1 2

UB8003BC

9-12

In case of emergency

Flat tires If you get a flat tire while driving, never brake sudden- ly; keep driving straight ahead while gradually reduc- ing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe place.

Changing a flat tire

Do not jack up the vehicle on an incline or a loose road surface. The jack can come out of the jacking point or sink into the ground and this can result in a serious accident.

Use only the jack provided with your vehicle. The jack supplied with the vehicle is designed only for changing a tire. Never get under the ve- hicle while supporting the vehicle with this jack.

Always turn the engine off before raising the flat tire off the ground using the jack. Never swing or push the vehicle supported with the jack. The jack can come out of the jacking point due to a jolt and this can result in a serious ac- cident.

Never place a tire or tire changing tools in the passenger compartment after changing

wheels. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike occupants and cause injury. Store the tire and all tools in the proper place.

1. Park on a hard, level surface, whenever possible, then stop the engine. 2. Set the parking brake securely and shift a manual transmission vehicle into reverse or an automatic transmission vehicle into the P (Park) position. 3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher and have ev- eryone get out of the vehicle.

4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear of the tire di-

HS9003BA

9-13

In case of emergency

CONTINUED

agonally opposite the flat tire. 5. Take out the spare tire, jack, and wheel nut wrench.

Refer to the sections Spare tire and Jack and tools in this chapter for their location, instructions and pre- cautions. After the spare tire is removed from the spare tire hold- er, the cable must be wound up completely by turning the hoist nut shaft clockwise until you hear a clicking sound. Also visually inspect the cable to make certain that there is no longer any slack present.

Removing the flat tire and installing the spare tire

0

1. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel nut wrench

but do not remove the nuts.

1) Jack up point mark

2. Place the jack under the side sill at the front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat tire. Jack-up points are

US9008BA

1

UB9088BB

9-14

In case of emergency

indicated by arrow marks on the side of the side sill skirt.

3. Turn the jackscrew by hand until the groove of the jack head engages firmly into the jack-up point.

4. Insert the jack drive tube into the jackscrew and at- tach the wheel nut wrench into the jack drive tube, and turn the handle until the tire clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle higher than necessary. 5. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat tire.

UB9089BA

UB9060BA

9-15

In case of emergency

CONTINUED 6. Before putting the spare tire on, clean the mounting

surface of the wheel and hub with a cloth. 7. Put on the spare tire. Replace the wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.

Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts when the spare tire is installed. This could cause the nuts to become loose and lead to an accident.

8. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the vehicle.

HS9011BA

UB9220BA

1

4 2

5 3

UB9078BB

9-16

In case of emergency

9. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque, following the tight- ening order in the illustration. The torque for tightening the nuts is 74 to 89 lbfft (100 to 120 Nm, 10 to 12 kgfm). This torque is equivalent to applying about 88 to 110 lbs (40 to 50 kg) at the top of the wheel nut wrench provided to your vehicle. Never use your foot on the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension on the wrench because you may exceed the specified torque. Have the wheel nut torque checked at the nearest au- tomotive service facility.

Storage of the flat tire

Secure the flat tire in the cargo bed (with the outer side of the wheel facing up) by using the designated tire holding rod and retainer. If the flat tire is not properly secured, it may fall out and create a dangerous road hazard that could lead to a serious accident.

Do not store the flat tire under the floor. Do- ing so could damage the underside of the vehi- cle.

1. Take the tire holding rod and retainer out of the tool

bag.

2. Remove the rubber cap from the cargo bed. Store the rubber cap in a safe place. Pay attention not to lose the rubber cap after removal.

UB9077BA

9-17

In case of emergency

CONTINUED

1) Holding rod 2) Retainer

3. Place the flat tire in the cargo bed with the outer side of the wheel facing up. For an aluminum wheel, remove the center cap before placing it in the cargo bed. 4. Place the retainer on the center hole of the wheel as illustrated and put the tire holding rod into the re- tainer. If the flat tire is separated from its wheel completely, the retailer should be placed upside down on the wheel.

5. Secure the flat tire by tightening the tire holding rod.

The tire holding rod and retainer are designed solely to secure a flat tire in emergency. Do not use them for another purpose such as securing cargo.

6. Store the jack and wheel nut wrench in their stor- age locations. 7. Put the rubber cap back in its original position after everything has been restored.

Driving with the temporary spare tire Your spare tire is only a temporary spare which is de- signed for temporary emergency use only. When driv- ing with the temporary spare tire, follow the instruc-

1

2

UB9062BB UB9063BA

9-18

In case of emergency

tions and precautions described in the Temporary spare tire section in this chapter. Replace the temporary spare tire with a conventional tire as soon as you can.

Jump starting

Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID. Do not let it come in contact with the eyes, skin, clothing or the vehicle. If battery fluid gets on you, thoroughly flush the exposed area with water immediately. Get med- ical help if the fluid has entered your eyes. If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, imme- diately drink a large amount of milk or water, and obtain immediate medical help. Keep everyone including children away from the battery.

The gas generated by a battery explodes if a flame or spark is brought near it. Do not smoke or light a match while jump starting.

Never attempt jump starting if the discharged battery is frozen. It could cause the battery to burst or explode.

Whenever working on or around a battery, al- ways wear suitable eye protectors, and remove metal objects such as rings, bands or other metal jewelry.

Be sure the jumper cables and clamps on them do not have loose or missing insulation.

9-19

In case of emergency

CONTINUED

Do not jump start unless cables in suitable con- dition are available.

A running engine can be dangerous. Keep your fingers, hands, clothing, hair and tools away from the cooling fan, belts and any other moving engine parts. Removing rings, watches and ties is advisable.

When your vehicle does not start due to a run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle may be jump started by connecting your battery to another battery (called the booster battery) with jumper cables.

Jump starting is dangerous if it done incorrectly. If you are unsure about the proper procedure for jump start- ing, consult a competent mechanic.

How to jump start 1. Make sure the booster battery is 12 volts and the negative terminal is grounded. 2. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch. 3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and accessories. 4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in the sequence illustrated.

9-20

In case of emergency

A) Booster battery B) Engine lifting bracket

_ _ + +4 1

2 3

A

B

UB8007BC

1)Connect one jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal on the dis- charged battery. 2)Connect the other end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) ter- minal of the booster battery. 3)Connect one end of the other cable to the negative () terminal of the booster battery. 4)Connect the other end of the ca- ble to the engine lifting bracket.

Make sure that the cables are not near any moving parts and that the cable clamps are not in contact with any other metal.

9-21

In case of emergency

CONTINUED

5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the booster bat- tery and run it at moderate speed. Then start the en- gine of the vehicle that has the discharged battery. 6. When finished, carefully disconnect the cables in exactly the reverse order.

Engine overheating

Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until the engine has been shut off and has fully cooled down. When the engine is hot, the cool- ant is under pressure. Removing the cap while the engine is still hot could release a spray of boiling hot coolant, which could burn you very seriously.

If the engine overheats, pull off the road safely and stop the vehicle in a safe place.

If steam is coming from the engine compartment

Turn the engine off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down.

If no steam is coming from the engine compartment

1. Keep the engine running at idling speed. 2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine compart- ment.

9-22

In case of emergency

Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If the fan is not turning, immediately turn the engine off and contact your authorized dealer for repair. 3. After the engine coolant temperature has dropped, turn off the engine. If the temperature gauge stays at the overheated zone, turn the engine off. 4. After the engine has fully cooled down, check the coolant level in the reserve tank. If the coolant level is below the MIN mark, add cool- ant up to the MAX mark. 5. If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, add cool- ant to the reserve tank. Then remove the radiator cap and fill the radiator with coolant.

If you remove the radiator cap from a hot radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the radiator cap, then turn the cap counterclockwise slowly without pressing down until it stops. Release the pressure from the ra- diator. After the pressure has been fully released, re- move the cap by pressing down and turning it.

Towing

Never tow AWD vehicles (both AT and MT) with the front wheels raised off the ground while the rear wheels are on the ground, or with the rear wheels raised off the ground while the front wheels are on the ground. This will cause the vehicle to spin away due to the operation or de- terioration of the center differential.

If towing is necessary, it is best done by your SUBARU

UB9064BA

9-23

In case of emergency

CONTINUED

dealer or a commercial towing service. Observe the following procedures for safety.

Towing and tie-down hooks The towing hooks should be used only in an emergen- cy (e.g., to free a stuck vehicle from mud, sand or snow).

Use only specified towing hooks and tie- down hooks. Never use suspension parts or other body parts for towing or tie-down purpos- es.

Never use the tie-down hook closest to the muffler under the vehicle for towing purposes.

To prevent deformation to the front bumper and the towing hook, do not apply excessive lateral load to the towing hooks.

1) Towing hook cover 2) Towing hook

The front towing hook is located on the inside of the towing hook cover below the right hand headlight.

2

1

UB9065BB

9-24

In case of emergency

1) Tie-down hook 1) Tie-down hook 2) Towing and tie-down hook

1 UB9070BB

2 1 UB9066CB

9-25

In case of emergency

CONTINUED

Vehicle with trailer hitch (if equipped) 1) Tie-down hook

Towing hook cover removal procedure The towing hook cover is secured by tabs that fit into corresponding slots in the vehicle body. To remove the cover:

1. Free the tabs on the towing hook cover by firmly pressing the point indicated by an arrow with the palm of your hand.

1 UB9010BB

UB9083BA

9-26

In case of emergency

2. Pull off the towing hook cover.

Towing hook cover installation procedure

To reinstall the towing hook cover, push it in on both sides while pushing it back to its original position. Make certain that the tabs at the end of the cover are securely inserted into the corresponding slots in the vehicles body.

UB9084BA

UB9069BA

9-27

In case of emergency

CONTINUED

Using a flat-bed truck

This is the best way to transport your vehicle. Use the following procedures to ensure safe transportation. 1. Shift the selector lever into the P position for au- tomatic transmission vehicles or 1st for manual transmission vehicles. 2. Pull up the parking brake lever firmly. 3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier properly with safety chains. Each safety chain should be equally tightened and care must be taken not to pull the chains so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.

Towing with all wheels on the ground

Never turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position while the vehicle is being towed be- cause the steering wheel and the direction of the wheels will be locked.

Remember that the brake booster and power steering do not function when the engine is not running. Because the engine is turned off, it will take greater effort to operate the brake pedal and steering wheel.

UB9072AA UB9071AA

9-28

In case of emergency

If transmission failure occurs, transport your vehicle on a flat-bed truck.

Do not run the engine while the vehicle is be- ing towed using this method. Transmission damage could result if the vehicle is towed with the engine running.

For vehicles with automatic transmission, the traveling speed must be limited to less than 20 mph (30 km/h) and the traveling distance to less than 30 miles (50 km). For greater speeds and distances, transport your vehicle on a flat- bed truck.

1. Check the transmission and differential oil levels and add oil to bring it to the upper level if necessary. 2. Release the parking brake and put the transmis- sion in neutral. 3. The ignition switch should be in the ACC position while the vehicle is being towed. 4. Take up slack in the towline slowly to prevent dam- age to the vehicle.

Moonroof if the moonroof cannot be closed If the moonroof cannot be closed with the moonroof switch, you can close the moonroof manually. 1. Take out the moonroof wrench and screwdriver from the tool bag.

UB9006BA

9-29

In case of emergency

CONTINUED

1) Screws

2. Remove the map light lens by prying the edge of the lens with a flat-head screwdriver, then remove the switch body retaining screws and take off the moon- roof switch.

3. Insert the wrench in the end of the motor shaft.

To lower the moonroof, turn the wrench clockwise. To close the moonroof, turn the wrench counter-

clockwise.

Have your vehicle checked by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

1 UB9007BB UB9008BA

10-1

10

Appearance care

Exterior care .................................................. 10-2 Washing ............................................................. 10-2 Waxing and polishing ....................................... 10-3 Cleaning aluminum wheels .............................. 10-4 Cleaning fog light lens ..................................... 10-4

Corrosion protection .................................... 10-5 Most common causes of corrosion ................ 10-5 To help prevent corrosion ............................... 10-5

Cleaning the interior ..................................... 10-6 Seat fabric ......................................................... 10-6 Leather seat materials ...................................... 10-6 Synthetic leather upholstery ........................... 10-7 Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument

panel, console panel, switches, combination meter, and other plastic surfaces ................. 10-7

10-2

Appearance care

Appearance careExterior care

Washing

When washing the vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a result, the brake stopping dis- tance will be longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.

Do not wash the engine compartment and ar- eas adjacent to it. If water enters the engine air intake, electrical parts or the power steering flu- id reservoir, it will cause engine trouble or faulty power steering respectively.

The best way to preserve your vehicles beauty is fre- quent washing. Wash the vehicle at least once a month to avoid contamination by road grime.

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of luke- warm or cold water. Do not wash the vehicle with hot water and in direct sunlight.

Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot and bird droppings should be washed off by using a light detergent, as re-

quired. If you use a light detergent, make certain that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use strong soap or chemical detergents. All cleaning agents should be promptly flushed from the surface and not allowed to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the remaining water off with a chamois or soft cloth.

NOTE Before having your vehicle washed in an auto-

matic car wash, retract the pillar mounted antenna or remove the roof mounted antenna to prevent it from being damaged.

When having your vehicle washed in an auto- matic car wash, make sure beforehand that the car wash is of suitable type. If the vehicle is equipped with a rear/roof spoiler, it may be damaged by car wash brushes or other equipment.

Washing the underbody Chemicals, salts and gravel used for deicing road sur- faces are extremely corrosive, accelerating the corro- sion of underbody components, such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders, and suspension. Thoroughly flush the underbody and inside of the fenders with lukewarm or cold water at frequent inter- vals to reduce the harmful effects of such agents.

10-3

Appearance care

CONTINUED

Mud and sand adhering to the underbody components may accelerate their corrosion. After driving off-road or muddy or sandy roads, wash the mud and sand off the underbody. Carefully flush the suspension and axle parts, as they are particularly prone to mud and sand buildup. Do not use a sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud.

NOTE Be careful not to damage brake hoses, sensor har- nesses, and other parts when washing suspen- sion components.

Using a warm water washer Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm) or more be-

tween the washer nozzle and the vehicle. Do not wash the same area continuously. If a stain will not come out easily, wash by hand.

Some warm water washers are of the high tempera- ture, high pressure type, and they can damage or de- form the resin parts such as mouldings, or cause wa- ter to leak into the vehicle.

Waxing and polishing Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing and polishing. Use a good quality polish and wax and apply them ac-

cording to the manufacturers instructions. Wax or pol- ish when the painted surface is cool.

Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim, as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of wax on a painted surface leads to loss of the original luster and also quickens the deterioration of the surface. It is recommended that a coat of wax be applied at least once a month, or whenever the surface no longer repels water.

If the appearance of the paint has diminished to the point where the luster or tone cannot be restored, lightly polish the surface with a fine-grained com- pound. Never polish just the affected area, but include the surrounding area as well. Always polish in only one direction. A No. 2000 grain compound is recom- mended. Never use a coarse-grained compound. Coarser grained compounds have a smaller grain-size number and could damage the paint. After polishing with a compound, coat with wax to restore the original luster. Frequent polishing with a compound or an in- correct polishing technique will result in removing the paint layer and exposing the undercoat. When in doubt, it is always best to contact your SUBARU deal- er or an auto paint specialist.

NOTE Be careful not to damage brake hoses, sensor har- nesses, and other parts when washing suspen-

10-4

Appearance care

sion components.

Cleaning aluminum wheels Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels clean of any

kind of grime or agent. If dirt is left on too long, it may be difficult to clean off.

Do not use soap containing grit to clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly with water. Do not clean the wheels with a stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed washing device.

Clean the vehicle (including the aluminum wheels) with water as soon as possible when it has been splashed with sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or driven on roads treated with salt or other agents.

Cleaning fog light lens 1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. 2. Stop the engine and turn off the fog lights.

1) Counter-clockwise 2) Light lens horizontal center line

3. Check that the fog lights are not hot. Then, grasp the protector and turn it approximately 10 counter- clockwise. 4. Pull the protector off the fog light. 5. Wash the lens with water. 6. Apply the protector to the lens at an angle of ap- proximately 10 from the fog lights horizontal center line. Then, turn the protector clockwise until it stops. Finally, check that the protectors horizontal bars are parallel with the fog lights horizontal center line.

1

2

10

UBA017BB

10-5

Appearance care

CONTINUED

Corrosion protection Your SUBARU has been designed and built to resist corrosion. Special materials and protective finishes have been used on most parts of the vehicle to help maintain fine appearance, strength, and reliable oper- ation.

Most common causes of corrosion The most common causes of corrosion are: 1. The accumulation of moisture retaining dirt and de- bris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas. 2. Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor accidents.

Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle when: 1. It is exposed to road salt or dust control chemicals, or used in coastal areas where there is more salt in the air, or in areas where there is considerable industrial pollution. 2. It is driven in areas of high humidity, especially when temperatures range just above freezing. 3. Dampness in certain parts of the vehicle remains for a long time, even though other parts of the vehicle may be dry. 4. High temperatures will cause corrosion to parts of the vehicle which cannot dry quickly due to lack of

proper ventilation.

To help prevent corrosion Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent corrosion of the body and suspension components. Also, wash the ve- hicle promptly after driving on any of the following sur- faces:

roads that have been salted to prevent them from freezing in winter

mud, sand, or gravel coastal roads

After the winter has ended, it is recommended that the underbody be given a very thorough washing.

Before the beginning of winter, check the condition of underbody components, such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, suspension, steer- ing system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of them are found to be rusted, they should be given an appropri- ate rust prevention treatment or should be replaced. Contact your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind of maintenance and treatment if you need assistance.

Repair chips and scratches in the paint as soon as you find them.

Check the interior of the vehicle for water and dirt ac-

10-6

Appearance care

cumulation under the floor mats because that could cause corrosion. Occasionally check under the mats to make sure the area is dry.

Keep your garage dry. Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. In such a garage, cor- rosion can be caused by dampness. If you wash the vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle into the garage when wet or covered with snow, that can cause damp- ness.

If your vehicle is operated in cold weather and/or in ar- eas where road salts and other corrosive materials are used, the door hinges and locks, trunk lid lock, and hood latch should be inspected and lubricated period- ically.

Cleaning the interior Use a vacuum cleaner to get rid of the dust and dirt. Wipe the vinyl areas with a clean, damp cloth.

Seat fabric Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the fabric or hard to re- move with a vacuum cleaner, use a soft blush then vacuum it. Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe using a solution of mild soap and lukewarm water then dry thoroughly.

If the stain does not come out, try a commercially- available fabric cleaner. Use the cleaner on a hidden place and make sure it does not affect the fabric ad- versely. Use the cleaner according to its instructions.

Leather seat materials The leather used by SUBARU is a high quality natural product which will retain its distinctive appearance and feel for many years with proper care. Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the surface can cause the material to become brittle and to wear pre-

10-7

Appearance care

CONTINUED

maturely. Regular cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber cloth should be performed monthly, taking care not to soak the leather or allow water to penetrate the stitched seams. A mild detergent suitable for cleaning woolen fabrics may be used to remove difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If your SUBARU is to be parked for a long time in bright sun- light, it is recommended that the seats and headrests be covered, or the windows shaded, to prevent fading or shrinkage. Minor surface blemishes or bald patches may be treat- ed with a commercial leather spray lacquer. You will discover that each leather seat section will develop soft folds or wrinkles, which is characteristic of genu- ine leather.

Synthetic leather upholstery The synthetic leather material used on the SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap or detergent and wa- ter, after first vacuuming or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic leather materials may be used when necessary.

NOTE Strong cleaning agents such as solvents, paint thinners, window cleaner or gasoline must never be used on leather or synthetic interior materials.

Climate control panel, audio panel, in- strument panel, console panel, switch- es, combination meter, and other plas- tic surfaces

Gently wipe away contamination using a clean, soft cloth moistened with cold or lukewarm water.

NOTE Do not use organic solvents such as paint thin- ners or gasoline, or strong cleaning agents that contain those solvents.

11-1

11

Maintenance and service

Maintenance schedule ................................. 11-3 Maintenance precautions ............................ 11-3

Before checking or servicing in the engine compartment .................................................. 11-4

When you do checking or servicing in the engine compartment while the engine is running ............................................................ 11-5

Engine hood .................................................. 11-5 Engine compartment overview ................... 11-8

Non-turbo models ............................................. 11-8 Turbo models .................................................... 11-9

Engine oil ...................................................... 11-10 Checking the oil level ....................................... 11-10 Changing the oil and oil filter .......................... 11-12 Recommended grade and viscosity ................ 11-15 Recommended grade and viscosity under

severe driving conditions .............................. 11-16 Cooling system ............................................. 11-17

Hose and connections ...................................... 11-18 Engine coolant .................................................. 11-18

Air cleaner element ...................................... 11-23 Replacing the air cleaner element ................... 11-23

Spark plugs ................................................... 11-25 Recommended spark plugs ............................. 11-26

Drive belts ..................................................... 11-26 Manual transmission oil ............................... 11-27

Checking the oil level ....................................... 11-27 Recommended grade and viscosity ................ 11-28

Automatic transmission fluid ...................... 11-29

Checking the fluid level .................................... 11-29 Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-31

Front differential gear oil (AT vehicles) ...... 11-32 Checking the oil level ....................................... 11-32 Recommended grade and viscosity ............... 11-32

Rear differential gear oil ............................... 11-33 Checking the gear oil level .............................. 11-33 Recommended grade and viscosity ............... 11-35

Power steering fluid ...................................... 11-36 Checking the fluid level .................................... 11-36 Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-37

Brake fluid ..................................................... 11-38 Checking the fluid level .................................... 11-38 Recommended brake fluid ............................... 11-39

Clutch fluid (MT vehicles) ............................ 11-39 Checking the fluid level .................................... 11-39 Recommended clutch fluid .............................. 11-40

Brake booster ................................................ 11-41 Brake pedal .................................................... 11-41

Checking the brake pedal free play ................ 11-41 Checking the brake pedal reserve distance ... 11-42

Clutch pedal (Manual transmission vehicles) ............... 11-42 Checking the clutch function .......................... 11-42 Checking the clutch pedal free play ............... 11-43

Replacement of brake pad and lining ......... 11-43 Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings .... 11-44

Parking brake stroke .................................... 11-45 Tires and wheels ........................................... 11-45

11-2

Maintenance and service

Types of tires .................................................... 11-45 Tire inspection .................................................. 11-46 Tire pressures and wear .................................. 11-46 Wheel balance ................................................... 11-49 Wear indicators ................................................. 11-49 Tire rotation ....................................................... 11-50 Tire replacement ............................................... 11-50 Wheel replacement ........................................... 11-51

Aluminum wheels ......................................... 11-52 Windshield washer fluid .............................. 11-52 Replacement of windshield wiper blades .. 11-53 Battery ........................................................... 11-56 Fuses ............................................................. 11-57 Main fuse ....................................................... 11-60 Installation of accessories .......................... 11-60 Replacing bulbs ............................................ 11-61

Headlight ........................................................... 11-64 Front fog light ................................................... 11-68 Front turn signal light, parking light and side

marker light .................................................... 11-69 Rear combination lights ................................... 11-70 Tail light (on the tailgate) ................................. 11-72 License plate light ............................................ 11-74 Map light, dome light and door step light ...... 11-76 High mount stop and cargo light assembly ... 11-77 Sport activity lights (if equipped) .................... 11-79

11-3

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

Maintenance and serviceMaintenance schedule The scheduled maintenance items required to be ser- viced at regular intervals are shown in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet.

For details of your maintenance schedule, read the separate Warranty and Maintenance Booklet.

Maintenance precautions When maintenance and service are required, it is rec- ommended that all work be done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

If you perform maintenance and service by yourself, you should familiarize yourself with the information provided in this section on general maintenance and service for your SUBARU.

Incorrect or incomplete service could cause improper or unsafe vehicle operation. Any problems caused by improper maintenance and service performed by you are not eligible for warranty coverage.

Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehicle must NEVER be performed on a single two-wheel dy- namometer or similar apparatus. Attempting to do so will result in transmission damage and in uncontrolled vehicle movement and may cause an accident or injuries to persons nearby.

Always select a safe area when performing maintenance on your vehicle.

Always be very careful to avoid injury when working on the vehicle. Remember that some of

11-4

Maintenance and service

the materials in the vehicle may be hazardous if improperly used or handled, for example, bat- tery acid.

Your vehicle should only be serviced by per- sons fully competent to do so. Serious person- al injury may result to persons not experienced in servicing vehicles.

Always use the proper tools and make certain that they are well maintained.

Never get under the vehicle supported only by a jack. Always use a safety stands to sup- port the vehicle.

Never keep the engine running in a poorly ventilated area, such as a garage or other closed areas.

Do not smoke or allow open flames around the fuel or battery. This will cause a fire.

Because the fuel system is under pressure, replacement of the fuel filter should be per- formed only by your SUBARU dealer.

Wear adequate eye protection to guard against getting oil or fluids in your eyes. If something does get in your eyes, thoroughly wash them out with clean water.

Do not tamper with the wiring of the SRS air- bag system or seatbelt pretensioner system, or attempt to take its connectors apart, as that

may activate the system or it can render it inop- erative. The wiring and connectors of these systems are yellow for easy identification. NEV- ER use a circuit tester for these wiring. If your SRS airbag or seatbelt pretensioner needs service, consult your nearest SUBARU dealer.

Before checking or servicing in the en- gine compartment

Always stop the engine and set the parking brake firmly to prevent the vehicle from mov- ing.

Always let the engine cool down. Engine parts become very hot when the engine is run- ning and remain hot for some time after the en- gine is stopped.

Do not spill engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid or any other fluid on hot engine compo- nents. This may cause a fire.

Always remove the key from the ignition switch. When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the cooling fan may operate suddenly

11-5

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

even when the engine is stopped.

When you do checking or servicing in the engine compartment while the en- gine is running

A running engine can be dangerous. Keep your fingers, hands, clothing, hair and tools away from the cooling fan, belts and any other mov- ing engine parts. Removing rings, watches and ties is advisable.

Engine hood 0

To open the hood: 1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the windshield, re- turn them to their original positions. 2. Pull the hood release knob under the instrument panel.

UBB008EA

11-6

Maintenance and service

3. Release the secondary hood release located under the front grille by moving the lever toward the left.

4. Lift up the hood, release the hood prop from its re- tainer and put the end of the hood prop into the slot in the hood.

To close the hood: 1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood and return the prop to its re- tainer. 2. Lower the hood until it approaches about 6 in (15 cm) from the closed position and let it drop. 3. After closing the hood, be sure the hood is securely locked.

If this does not close the hood, release it from a slightly higher position. Do not push the hood forcibly to close

UBB094BA UBB003BA

11-7

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

it. It could deform the metal.

Always check that the hood is properly locked before you start driving. If it is not, it might fly open while the vehicle is moving and block your view, which may cause an accident and serious bodily injury.

11-8

Maintenance and service

Engine compartment overview

Non-turbo models

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8910111213 UBB106BB

1) Manual transmission oil level gauge (MT) (page 11-27) or Dif- ferential gear oil level gauge (AT) (page 11-32)

2) Air cleaner element (page 11- 23)

3) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11- 39)

4) Automatic transmission fluid lev- el gauge (page 11-29)

5) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11- 38)

6) Windshield washer tank (page 11-52)

7) Fuse box (page 11-57) 8) Battery (page 11-56) 9) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-10) 10) Engine coolant reservoir (page

11-18) 11) Radiator cap (page 11-18) 12) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-

10) 13) Power steering fluid reservoir

(page 11-36)

11-9

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

Turbo models

1

11 10 9 81213

2 3 4 5 6 7

UBB098CB

1) Air cleaner element (page 11- 23)

2) Manual transmission oil level gauge (MT) (page 11-27) or Dif- ferential gear oil level gauge (AT) (page 11-32)

3) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11- 39)

4) Automatic transmission fluid lev- el gauge (page 11-29)

5) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11- 38)

6) Windshield washer tank (page 11-52)

7) Fuse box (page 11-57) 8) Battery (page 11-56) 9) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-10) 10) Engine coolant reservoir (page

11-18) 11) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-

10) 12) Radiator cap (page 11-18) 13) Power steering fluid reservoir

(page 11-36)

11-10

Maintenance and service

Engine oil

Checking the oil level Check the engine oil level at each fuel stop. 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the en- gine.

Non-turbo models

Turbo models

2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and insert it again. 3. Be sure the dipstick is correctly inserted until it stops with the graphic symbol on its top appear- ing as shown in the illustration.

UBB004MA

HGB056BA

11-11

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

Non-turbo models 1) Notch 2) Upper level 3) Lower level

Turbo models 1) Notch 2) Upper level 3) Lower level

4. Pull out the dipstick again and check the oil level on it. If it is below the lower level, add oil to bring the level up to the upper level.

Use only engine oil with the recommended grade and viscosity.

1

2

3

UGB081BB

1

2

3

UGB082BB

11-12

Maintenance and service

If you check the oil level just after stopping the engine, wait a few minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan before checking the level. To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do not add any additional oil above the upper level when the engine is cold.

The dipstick has a notch above the upper level. Just after driving or while the engine is warm, the en- gine oil level reading may be in a range between the upper level and the notch mark. This is caused by ther- mal expansion of the engine oil.

Changing the oil and oil filter Change the oil and oil filter according to the mainte- nance schedule in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet. The engine oil and oil filter must be changed more fre- quently than listed in the maintenance schedule when driving on dusty roads, when short trips are frequently made, or when driving in extremely cold whether.

1. Warm up the engine by letting the engine idle for about 10 minutes to ease draining the engine oil. 2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the en- gine. 3. Remove the oil filler cap.

1) Drain plug

4. Drain out the engine oil by removing the drain plug while the engine is still warm. The used oil should be drained into an appropriate container and disposed of properly.

Be careful not to burn yourself with hot engine oil.

1

UBB005BB

11-13

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

1) Sealing washer 2) Drain plug

5. Wipe the seating surface of the drain plug with a clean cloth and tighten it securely with a new sealing washer after the oil has completely drained out.

6. Remove three clips at the front of the cover under the oil filter.

1

2 UBB051BB UBB054BA

11-14

Maintenance and service

7. Slide the cover toward the vehicle front to remove it. 8. Remove the oil filter with an oil filter wrench. 9. Before installing a new oil filter, apply a thin coat of engine oil to the seal. 10.Clean the rubber seal seating area of the bottom of engine and install the oil filter by hand turning. Be careful not to twist or damage the seal. 11.Tighten the oil filter by the amount indicated in the following table after the seal makes contact with the bottom of engine.

Never over tighten the oil filter because that can result in an oil leak.

12.Reinstall the cover under the oil filter. 13.Pour engine oil through the filler neck.

Oil capacity (Guideline): 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)

UBB055BA

Model Oil filter color Part number Amount of rotation

Non-turbo models

Black 15208AA080 1 rotation

Light blue 15208AA024 2/3 3/4 rotationWhite

15208AA09A

15208AA060

Turbo models

Black 15208AA080 1 rotation

White 15208AA09A 2/3 3/4 rotation

11-15

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

The oil quantity indicated above is only a guideline. The necessary quantity of oil depends on the quantity of oil that has been drained. The quantity of drained oil differs slightly depending on the temperature of the oil and the time the oil is left flowing out. After refilling the engine with oil, therefore, you must use the dipstick to confirm that the level is correct. 14.Start the engine and make sure that no oil leaks ap- pear around the filters rubber seal and drain plug. 15.Run the engine until it reaches the normal operat- ing temperature. Then stop the engine and wait a few minutes to allow the oil drain back. Check the oil level again and if necessary, add more engine oil.

Recommended grade and viscosity

Use only engine oil with the recommended grade and viscosity.

Oil grade: ILSAC GF-3, which can be identified with the new API certification mark (Starburst mark) or API classification SL with the words ENERGY CONSERVING (if you cannot obtain the oil with

SL grade, you may use SJ grade ENERGY CON- SERVING oil).

These recommended oil grades can be identified by looking for either or both of the following marks dis- played on the oil container.

New API Certification Mark (Starburst Mark)

AM ER

IC AN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE

CERTIFIED HSB023AA

11-16

Maintenance and service

API Service label 1) Indicates the oil quality by API designations 2) Indicates the SAE oil viscosity grade 3) Indicates that the oil has fuel saving capabilities

In choosing an oil, you want the proper quality and vis- cosity, as well as one that will add to fuel economy. The following table lists the recommended viscosities and applicable temperatures. When adding oil, different brands may be used togeth- er as long as they are the same API classification and SAE viscosity as those recommended by SUBARU.

SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature *: 5W-30 is preferred.

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity provide better fuel economy. However, in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is re- quired to properly lubricate the engine.

Recommended grade and viscosity under severe driving conditions

If the vehicle is used in desert areas, in areas with very high temperatures, or used for heavy-duty applica- tions such as towing a trailer, use of oil with the follow- ing grade and viscosities is recommended.

API SERVICE SL

E N

ERGY CONSERVIN G

SAE 5W 30

1

2

3 HSB022BB

5W-30*

10W-30, 10W-40

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40

-20 0 6020 80 10040

HSB024BA

11-17

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

API classification SL (or SJ): SAE viscosity No.:

30, 40, 10W-50, 20W-40, 20W-50

Cooling system

Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until the engine has been shut off and has cooled down completely. Since the coolant is under pressure, you may suffer serious burns from a spray of boiling hot coolant when the cap is re- moved.

The cooling system has been filled at the fac- tory with a high quality, corrosion-inhibiting, year-around coolant which provides protection against freezing down to 33F (36C). For adding, use genuine SUBARU coolant or an equivalent: a mixture of 50% soft water and 50% ethylene-glycol basis coolant. Use of improper coolants may result in corrosion in the cooling system. It is important to maintain protection against freezing and corrosion, even if freezing temperatures are not expected. Never mix dif- ferent kinds of coolant.

Do not splash the engine coolant over paint-

11-18

Maintenance and service

ed parts. The alcohol contained in the engine coolant may damage the paint surface.

Hose and connections Your vehicle employs an electric cooling fan which is thermostatically controlled to operate when the engine coolant reaches a specific temperature. If the radiator cooling fan does not operate even when the engine coolant temperature gauge exceeds the normal operating range, the cooling fan circuit may be defective. Check the fuse and replace it if necessary. If the fuse is not blown, have the cooling system checked by your SUBARU dealer.

If frequent addition of coolant is necessary, there may be a leak in the engine cooling system. It is recom- mended that the cooling system and connections be checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.

Engine coolant Checking the coolant level

1) FULL level mark 2) LOW level mark

Check the coolant level at each fuel stop. 1. Check the coolant level on the outside of the reser- voir while the engine is cool. 2. If the level is close to or lower than the LOW level mark, add coolant up to the FULL level mark. If the reserve tank is empty, remove the radiator cap and re- fill as required.

FULL

LOW

1

2

UBB004FB

11-19

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

1) Rubber gaskets

3. After refilling the reserve tank and the radiator, re- install the caps and check that the rubber gaskets in- side the radiator cap are in the proper position.

Changing the coolant Always add genuine SUBARU cooling system condi- tioner whenever the coolant is replaced. Change the engine coolant and add genuine SUBARU cooling system conditioner using the following proce- dures according to the maintenance schedule in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet. 1. Remove the under cover.

Non-turbo models

1

HSB026BB UBB006CA

11-20

Maintenance and service

Turbo models

2. Place a proper container under the drain plug and loosen the drain plug.

Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until the engine has been shut off and has cooled down completely. Since the coolant is under pressure, you may suffer serious burns from a spray of boiling hot coolant when the cap is re- moved.

3. Loosen the radiator cap to drain the coolant from the radiator. Then drain the coolant from the reserve tank. Tighten the drain plug securely.

NOTE (Turbo models) The cap (without tabs) on top of the radiator does not need to be removed. To add coolant, remove the cap (with tabs) on the coolant tank on top of the engine.

Non-turbo models 1) Filler neck 2) Fill up to here

UBB104BA 1

2

UBB007CB

11-21

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

Turbo models 1) Filler neck 2) Fill up to here

4. Slowly pour the coolant and fill up to just below the filler neck, allowing enough room to add genuine SUBARU cooling system conditioner in the radiator. Add genuine SUBARU cooling system conditioner un- til the coolant level reaches the filler neck. Do not pour the coolant too quickly, as this may lead to insufficient air bleeding and trapped air in the system.

Coolant capacity (Guideline): Non-turbo models:

MT. 7.2 US qt (6.8 liters, 6.0 Imp qt) AT. 7.1 US qt (6.7 liters, 5.9 Imp qt)

Turbo models: MT. 8.1 US qt (7.7 liters, 6.8 Imp qt) AT. 8.0 US qt (7.6 liters, 6.7 Imp qt)

Be careful not to spill engine coolant when adding it. If coolant touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire.

Do not splash the engine coolant over paint- ed parts. The alcohol contained in the engine coolant may damage the paint surface.

1

2 USB518BB

11-22

Maintenance and service

1) FULL level mark 2) LOW level mark

5. Pour the coolant and fill to the reservoir tanks FULL level mark.

1) Rubber gaskets

6. Put the radiator cap back on and tighten firmly. At this time, make sure that the rubber gasket in the radi- ator cap is correctly in place. 7. Start and run the engine for more than five minutes at 2,000 to 3,000 rpm. 8. Stop the engine and wait until the coolant cools down (122 to 140F [50 to 60C]). If there is any loss of coolant, add coolant to the radiators filler neck and to the reserve tanks FULL level. 9. Put the radiator cap and reservoir cap back on and tighten firmly.

FULL

LOW

1

2

UBB004FB

1

HSB026BB

11-23

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

Air cleaner element

Do not operate the engine with the air cleaner element removed. The air cleaner element not only filters intake air but also stops flames if the engine backfires. If the air cleaner element is not installed when the engine backfires, you could be burned.

The air cleaner element functions as a filter screen. When the element is perforated or removed, engine wear will be excessive and engine life shortened.

The air cleaner element is a viscous type. It is unnec- essary to clean or wash the element.

Replacing the air cleaner element Non-turbo models

Replace the air cleaner element according to the maintenance schedule in the Warranty and Mainte- nance Booklet. Under extremely dusty conditions, re- place it more frequently. It is recommended that you always use genuine SUBARU parts.

0

1) Bolt

1. Remove the bolt securing the rear air cleaner ele- ment case. 2. Unsnap the three clamps holding the rear air clean- er element case.

1

UBB063BB

11-24

Maintenance and service

1) Air cleaner element

3. Separate the rear air cleaner element case from the front air cleaner element case and remove the air cleaner element. 4. Clean the inside of the front and rear air cleaner el- ement cases with a damp cloth and install a new air cleaner element. 5. Insert the four projections on the rear air cleaner el- ement case into the slits on the front air cleaner ele- ment case and snap the three clamps on the rear air cleaner element case and then tighten the bolt.

Turbo models

1. Unsnap the two clamps holding the air cleaner case cover.

1

UBB064BB

USB521BA

11-25

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

1) Air cleaner case cover 2) Air cleaner element

2. Open the air cleaner case cover and remove the air cleaner element. 3. Clean the inside of the air cleaner cover and case with a damp cloth and install a new air cleaner ele- ment.

To install the air cleaner case cover, insert two projec- tions on the air cleaner case into the slits on the air cleaner case cover and then snap the two clamps on the air cleaner case cover.

Spark plugs

When disconnecting the spark plug cables, always grasp the spark plug cap, not the ca- bles.

Make sure the cables are replaced in the cor- rect order.

It may be difficult to replace the spark plugs. It is rec- ommended that you have the spark plugs replaced by your SUBARU dealer.

2

1

USB522BB

HSB032BA

11-26

Maintenance and service

The spark plugs should be replaced according to the maintenance schedule in the Warranty and Mainte- nance Booklet.

Recommended spark plugs

Non-turbo models: RC10YC4 (Champion) BKR6E-11 (NGK) BKR5E-11 (NGK)

Turbo models: ILFR6B (NGK)

Drive belts The alternator, power steering pump, and air condi- tioner compressor depend on drive belts. Satisfactory performance requires that belt tension be correct.

1) Power steering pump pulley 2) Air conditioner compressor pulley 3) Crank pulley

2

3

A B

1

HSB033BB

11-27

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

in (mm)

To check belt tension, place a straightedge (ruler) across two adjacent pulleys and apply a force of 22 lbs (98 N, 10 kg) midway between the pulleys by using a spring scale. Belt deflection should be the amount specified.

Manual transmission oil

Checking the oil level 0

Non-turbo models 1) Yellow handle

Deflection

New belt Used belt

A 0.28 0.35 (7.0 9.0) 0.35 0.43 (9.0 11.0)

B 0.30 0.33 (7.5 8.5) 0.35 0.40 (9.0 10.0) 1

UBB004DB

11-28

Maintenance and service

Turbo models

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the en- gine. 2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and insert it again.

1) Upper level 2) Lower level

3. Pull out the dipstick again and check the oil level on it. If it is below the lower level, add oil through the dip- stick hole to bring the level up to the upper level.

Recommended grade and viscosity Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and addi- tives. Never use different brands together.

Oil grade: API classification GL-5

UGB001JA

L F F

L

1

2

1

2

USB526BB

11-29

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature

Automatic transmission fluid

Checking the fluid level The automatic transmission fluid expands largely as its temperature rises; the fluid level differs according to fluid temperature. Therefore, there are two different scales for checking the level of hot fluid and cold fluid on the dipstick.

Though the fluid level can be checked without warm- ing up the fluid on the COLD range, we recommend checking the fluid level when the fluid is at operating temperature.

Checking the fluid level when the fluid is hot Check the fluid level monthly. 1. Drive the vehicle several miles to raise the temper- ature of the transmission fluid up to normal operating temperature; 158 to 176F (70 to 80C) is normal. 2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the park- ing brake. 3. First shift the selector lever in each position. Then shift it in the P position, and run the engine at idling speed.

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40

-20 0 6020

80W

75W/90

80 10040

85W

90

HSB036BA

11-30

Maintenance and service

1) Yellow handle 1) Yellow handle

1

UBB004KB HSB018MB

1

11-31

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

A) HOT range B) COLD range 1) Upper level 2) Lower level

4. Pull out the dipstick and check the fluid level on the gauge. If it is below the lower level on the HOT range, add the recommended automatic transmission fluid up to the upper level.

Checking the fluid level when the fluid is cold When the fluid level has to be checked without time to warm up the automatic transmission, check to see that the fluid level is between the lower level and upper lev- el on the COLD range. If it is below that range, add

fluid up to the upper level. Be careful not to overfill.

Recommended fluid

Dexron III Type Automatic Transmission Fluid

L F

L F

1

2

1

2

B

A

HGB061BB

11-32

Maintenance and service

Front differential gear oil (AT vehi- cles)

Checking the oil level

1) Yellow

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the en- gine. 2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and insert it again.

1) Upper level 2) Lower level

3. Pull out the dipstick again and check the oil level on it. If it is below the lower level, add oil to bring the level up to the upper level.

Recommended grade and viscosity Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and addi- tives. Never use different brands together.

Oil grade: API classification GL-5

1

UBB004EB

L F

1

2

HSB040BB

11-33

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature

Rear differential gear oil

Checking the gear oil level

If the vehicle requires frequent refilling, there may be an oil leak. If you suspect a problem, have the vehicle checked at your SUBARU deal- er.

Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear differential protector. The differential protector provides protec- tion to the rear differential assembly during off-road use. Removal of the rear differential protector is not re- quired when checking the oil level.

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40

-20 0 6020

80W

75W/90

80 10040

85W

90

HSB036BA

11-34

Maintenance and service

Non-turbo AT 1) Filler plug 2) Drain plug

1) Filler hole 2) Drain hole 3) Oil level

1

2 OM-U0213

1

2

3

OM-U0214

11-35

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

Others 1) Filler plug 2) Drain plug

1) Filler hole 2) Drain hole 3) Oil level

Remove the plug from the filler hole and check the oil level. The oil level should be kept even with the bottom of the filler hole. If the oil level is below the bottom edge of the hole, add oil through the filler hole to raise the level.

Recommended grade and viscosity Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and addi- tives. Never use different brands together.

2

1

HSB042BB

3 1

2 HSB043BB

11-36

Maintenance and service

Oil grade: API classification GL-5

SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature

Power steering fluid

Checking the fluid level

1) Reservoir tank

Be careful not to burn yourself because the flu- id may be hot.

When power steering fluid is being added,

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40

-20 0 6020

80W

75W/90

80 10040

85W

90

HSB036BA

1

UBB030BB

11-37

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

use only clean fluid, and be careful not to allow any dirt into the tank. And never use different brands together.

Avoid spilling fluid when adding it in the tank.

The power steering fluid expands greatly as its tem- perature rises; the fluid level differs according to fluid temperature. Therefore, the reservoir tank has two dif- ferent checking ranges for hot and cold fluids.

Check the power steering fluid level monthly. 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and stop the en- gine.

1) Specified range

2. Check the fluid level of the reservoir tank. When the fluid is hot after the vehicle has been run: Check that the oil level is between HOT MIN and HOT MAX on the surface of the reservoir tank. When the fluid is cool before the vehicle is run: Check that the oil level is between COLD MIN and COLD MAX on the surface of the reservoir tank. 3. If the fluid level is lower than the applicable MIN line, add the recommended fluid as necessary to bring the level between the MIN and MAX line.

If the fluid level is extreme low, it may indicate possible leakage. Consult your SUBARU dealer for an inspec- tion.

Recommended fluid

Dexron III Type Automatic Transmission Fluid

1 1

HSB045BB

11-38

Maintenance and service

Brake fluid

Checking the fluid level

Never let brake fluid contact your eyes be- cause brake fluid can be harmful to your eyes. If brake fluid gets in your eyes, immediately flush them thoroughly with clean water. For safety, when performing this work, wearing eye protection is advisable.

Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air. Any absorbed moisture can cause a dangerous loss of braking performance.

If the vehicle requires frequent refilling, there may be a leak. If you suspect a problem, have the vehicle checked at your SUBARU dealer.

Never use different brands of brake fluid to- gether.

When adding brake fluid, be careful not to al- low any dirt into the reservoir.

Never splash the brake fluid over painted sur-

faces or rubber parts. Alcohol contained in the brake fluid may damage them.

Check the fluid level monthly.

1) MAX level mark 2) MIN level mark

Check the fluid level on the outside of the reservoir. If the level is below MIN, add the recommended brake fluid to MAX. Use only brake fluid from a sealed container.

MAX

MIN

1

2

UBB004GB

11-39

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

Recommended brake fluid

FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or 4 brake fluid

Clutch fluid (MT vehicles)

Checking the fluid level

Never let clutch fluid contact your eyes be- cause clutch fluid can be harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid gets in your eyes, immediately flush them thoroughly with clean water. For safety, when performing this work, wearing eye protection is advisable.

Clutch fluid absorbs moisture from the air. Any absorbed moisture can cause improper clutch operation.

If the vehicle requires frequent refilling, there may be a leak. If you suspect a problem, have the vehicle checked at your SUBARU dealer.

Never use different brands of clutch fluid to- gether.

When clutch fluid is added, be careful not to allow any dirt into the tank.

11-40

Maintenance and service

1) MAX level mark 2) MIN level mark

1) MAX level mark 2) MIN level mark

Check the fluid level on the outside of the reservoir. If the level is below MIN level mark, add the recom- mended clutch fluid to MAX level mark. Use only clutch fluid from a sealed container.

Recommended clutch fluid

FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid

MAX

M I N

1

2

UBB004HB

2

1

UBB004LB

11-41

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

Brake booster If the brake booster does not operate as described be- low, have it checked by your SUBARU dealer. 1. With the engine off, depress the brake pedal sever- al times, applying the same pedal force each time. The distance the pedal travels should not vary. 2. With the brake pedal depressed, start the engine. The pedal should move slightly down to the floor. 3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop the engine and keep the pedal depressed for 30 seconds. The pedal height should not change. 4. Start the engine again and run for about one minute then turn it off. Depress the brake pedal several times to check the brake booster. Brake booster operates properly if the pedal stroke decreases with each de- pression.

Brake pedal Check the brake pedal free play and reserve distance according to the maintenance schedule in the War- ranty and Maintenance Booklet.

Checking the brake pedal free play

1) 0.04 0.12 in (1.0 3.0 mm)

Stop the engine and firmly depress the brake pedal several times. Lightly press the brake pedal down with one finger to check the free play with a force of less than 2 lbs (10 N, 1 kg). If the free play is not within proper specification, con-

1

HSB049BB

11-42

Maintenance and service

tact your SUBARU dealer.

Checking the brake pedal reserve dis- tance

1) More than 2.56 in (65 mm)

Depress the pedal with a force of approximately 66 lbs (294 N, 30 kg) and measure the distance between the upper surface of the pedal pad and the floor. When the measurement is smaller than the specifica- tion, or when the pedal does not operate smoothly, contact with your SUBARU dealer.

Clutch pedal (Manual transmission vehicles) Check the clutch pedal free play and reserve distance according to the maintenance schedule in the War- ranty and Maintenance Booklet.

Checking the clutch function Check the clutch engagement and disengagement. 1. With the engine idling, check that there are no ab- normal noises when the clutch pedal is depressed, and that shifting into 1st or reverse feels smooth. 2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal slowly to check that the engine and transmission smoothly cou- ple without any sign of slippage.

1

HSB050BB

11-43

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

Checking the clutch pedal free play

1) 0.16 0.51 in (4.0 13.0 mm)

Lightly press the clutch pedal down with your finger until you feel resistance, and check the free play. If the free play is not within proper specification, con- tact your SUBARU dealer.

Replacement of brake pad and lining

If you continue to drive despite the scraping noise from the audible brake pad wear indica- tor, it will result in the need for costly brake ro- tor repair or replacement.

The right front disc brake and the right rear disc brake have an audible wear indicators on the brake pads. If the brake pads wear close to their service limit, the wear indicator makes a very audible scraping noise

1

HSB049BB

HS7012BA

11-44

Maintenance and service

when the brake pedal is applied.

If you hear this scraping noise each time you apply the brake pedal, have the brake pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

Breaking-in of new brake pads and lin- ings

When replacing the brake pad or lining, use only gen- uine SUBARU parts. After replacement, the new parts must be broken in as follows:

Brake pad and lining While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40 mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more times.

Parking brake lining

A safe location and situation should be select- ed for break-in driving.

Pulling the parking brake lever too forcefully

may cause the rear wheels to lock. To avoid this, be certain to pull the lever up slowly and gently.

1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of about 22 mph (35 km/h). 2. With the parking brake release button pushed in, pull the parking brake lever SLOWLY and GENTLY. (Pulling with a force of approximately 33 lbs [147 N, 15 kg].) 3. Drive the vehicle for about 220 yards (200 meters) in this condition. 4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking brake to cool down. Repeat this procedure. 5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the parking brake stroke is out of the specified range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut located on the parking brake lever.

Parking brake stroke: 7 8 notches / 44 lbs (196 N, 20 kg)

11-45

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

Parking brake stroke Check the parking brake stroke according to the main- tenance schedule in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet. When the parking brake is properly adjusted, braking power is fully applied by pulling the lever up seven to eight notches gently but firmly (about 44 lbs [196 N, 20 kg]). If the parking brake lever stroke is not within the specified range, have the brake system checked and adjusted at your SUBARU dealer.

Tires and wheels

Types of tires You should be familiar with type of tires present on your vehicle.

All season tires The factory-installed tires on your new vehicle are all season tires. All season tires are designed to provide an adequate measure of traction, handling and braking perfor- mance in year-round driving including snowy and icy road conditions. However all season tires do not offer as much traction performance as winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow or on icy roads. All season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/ or M+S (Mud & Snow) on the tire sidewall.

Summer tires Summer tires are high-speed capability tires best suit- ed for highway driving under dry conditions. Summer tires are inadequate for driving on slippery roads such as on snow-covered or icy roads. If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered or icy roads, we strongly recommend the use of winter (snow) tires. When installing winter tires, be sure to replace all four tires.

UG7509CA

11-46

Maintenance and service

Winter (snow) tires Winter tires are best suited for driving on snow-cov- ered and icy roads. However winter tires do not per- form as well as summer tires and all season tires on roads other than snow-covered and icy roads.

Tire inspection Check on a daily basis that the tires are free from se- rious damage, nails, and stones. At the same time, check the tires for abnormal wear. Contact your SUBARU dealer immediately if you find any problem.

NOTE When the wheels and tires strike curbs or are

subjected to harsh treatment as when the vehicle is driven on a rough surface, they can suffer dam- age that cannot be seen with the naked eye. This type of damage does not become evident until time has passed. Try not to drive over curbs, pot- holes or on other rough surfaces. If doing so is un- avoidable, keep the vehicles speed down to a walking pace or less, and approach the curbs as squarely as possible. Also, make sure the tires are not pressed against the curb when you park the vehicle.

If you feel unusual vibration while driving or find

it difficult to steer the vehicle in a straight line, one of the tires and/or wheels may be damaged. Drive slowly to the nearest authorized SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle inspected.

Tire pressures and wear Maintaining the correct tire pressures helps to maxi- mize the tires service lives and is essential for good running performance. Check and, if necessary, adjust the pressure of each tire (including the spare) at least once a month and before any long journey.

Check the tire pressures when the tires are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the

UB8053BA

11-47

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

values shown on the tire placard. The tire placard is lo- cated on the door pillar on the drivers side. Driving even a short distance warms up the tires and increases the tire pressures. Also, the tire pressures are affected by the outside temperature. It is best to check tire pressure outdoors before driving the vehi- cle.

When a tire becomes warm, the air inside it expands, causing the tire pressure to increase. Be careful not to mistakenly release air from a warm tire to reduce its pressure.

NOTE The air pressure in a tire increases by approxi-

mately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm2) when the tire becomes warm.

The tires are considered cold when the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or has been driven less than one mile (1.6 km).

Do not let air out of warm tires to adjust pres- sure. Doing so will result in low tire pressure.

Incorrect tire pressures detract from controllability and ride comfort, and they cause the tires to wear abnor-

mally.

Correct tire pressure (tread worn evenly)

Roadholding is good, and steering is responsive. Roll- ing resistance is low, so fuel consumption is also low- er.

HSB052AA

11-48

Maintenance and service

Abnormally low tire pressure (tread worn at shoulders)

Rolling resistance is high, so fuel consumption is also higher.

Abnormally high tire pressure (tread worn in cen- ter)

Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire magnifies the ef- fects of road-surface bumps and dips, possibly result- ing in vehicle damage.

Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire pressures can cause the tires to deform severe- ly and to rapidly become hot. A sharp increase in temperature could cause tread separation, and destruction of the tires. The resulting loss

HSB053AA HSB054AA

11-49

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

of vehicle control could lead to an accident.

Wheel balance Each wheel was correctly balanced when your vehicle was new, but the wheels will become unbalanced as the tires become worn during use. Wheel imbalance causes the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at certain vehicle speeds and detracts from the vehicles straight-line stability. It can also cause steering and suspension system problems and abnormal tire wear. If you suspect that the wheels are not correctly bal- anced, have them checked and adjusted by your SUBARU dealer. Also have them adjusted after tire re- pairs and after tire rotation.

NOTE Loss of correct wheel alignment* causes the tires to wear on one side and reduces the vehicles run- ning stability. Contact your SUBARU dealer if you notice abnormal tire wear. *: The suspension system is designed to hold each wheel at a certain alignment (relative to the other wheels and to the road) for optimum straight-line stability and cornering perfor- mance.

Wear indicators

A) New tread B) Worn tread 1) Tread wear indicator

Each tire incorporates a tread wear indicator, which becomes visible when the depth of the tread grooves decreases to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A tire must be re- placed when the tread wear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread.

When a tires tread wear indicator becomes vis-

A 1 B

HSB055BB

11-50

Maintenance and service

ible, the tire is worn beyond the acceptable limit and must be replaced immediately. With a tire in this condition, driving at high speeds in wet weather can cause the vehicle to hydroplane. The resulting loss of vehicle control can lead to an accident.

NOTE For safety, inspect the tire tread regularly and re- place the tires before their tread wear indicators become visible.

Tire rotation

Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel. To maximize the life of each tire and ensure that the tires wear uniform- ly, it is best to rotate the tires every 7,500 miles (12,500 km). Rotating the tires involves switching the front and rear tires on the right hand side of the vehicle and similarly switching the front and rear tires on the left hand side of the vehicle. (Each tire must be kept on its original side of the vehicle.) Replace any damaged or unevenly worn tire at the time of rotation. After tire rotation, adjust the tire pres- sures and make sure the wheel nuts are correctly tightened.

After driving approximately 600 miles (1,000 km), check the wheel nuts again and retighten any nut that has become loose.

Tire replacement The wheels and tires are important and integral parts of your vehicles design; they cannot be changed arbi- trarily. The tires fitted as standard equipment are opti- mally matched to the characteristics of the vehicle and were selected to give the best possible combination of running performance, ride comfort, and service life. It is essential for every tire to have a size and construc- tion matching those shown on the tire placard and to have a speed symbol and load index matching thoseHSB056BA

11-51

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

shown on the tire placard.

Using tires of a non-specified size detracts from con- trollability, ride comfort, braking performance, speed- ometer accuracy and odometer accuracy. It also cre- ates incorrect body-to-tire clearances and inappropri- ately changes the vehicles ground clearance.

All four tires must be the same in terms of manufactur- er, brand (tread pattern), construction, and size. You are advised to replace the tires with new ones that are identical to those fitted as standard equipment.

For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU recommends re- placing all four tires at the same time.

All four tires must be the same in terms of manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), construc- tion, degree of wear, speed symbol, load index and size. Mixing tires of different types, sizes or degrees of wear can result in damage to the ve- hicles power train. Use of different types or siz- es of tires can also dangerously reduce control- lability and braking performance and can lead to an accident.

Use only radial tires. Do not use radial tires together with belted bias tires and/or bias-ply

tires. Doing so can dangerously reduce control- lability, resulting in an accident.

Wheel replacement When replacing wheels due, for example, to damage, make sure the replacement wheels match the specifi- cations of the wheels that are fitted as standard equip- ment. Replacement wheels are available from SUBARU dealers.

Use only those wheels that are specified for your vehicle. Wheels not meeting specifica- tions could interfere with brake caliper opera- tion and may cause the tires to rub against the wheel well housing during turns. The resulting loss of vehicle control could lead to an acci- dent.

11-52

Maintenance and service

Aluminum wheels Aluminum wheels can be scratched and damaged easily. Handle them carefully to maintain their appear- ance, performance, and safety.

When any of the wheels is removed and replaced for tire rotation or to change a flat, always check the tightness of the wheel nuts after driving approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose, tighten it to the specified torque.

Never apply oil to the threaded parts, wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the wheel.

Never let the wheel rub against sharp protrusions or curbs.

Be sure to fit tire chains on uniformly and completely around the tire, otherwise the chains may scratch the wheel.

When wheel nuts, balance weights, or the center cap is replaced, be sure to replace them with genuine SUBARU parts designed for aluminum wheels.

Windshield washer fluid

Never use engine coolant as washer fluid be- cause it could cause paint damage.

Check the level of the washer fluid at each fuel stop. If the level is low, fill the fluid up to the neck of the reser- voir. Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield washer fluid is unavailable use clean water. In areas where water freezes in winter, use an anti-

UBB004IA

11-53

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

freeze type windshield washer fluid. SUBARU Wind- shield Washer Fluid contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5% surfactant, by volume. Its freezing temper- ature varies according to how much it is diluted, as in- dicated in the following table.

Replacement of windshield wiper blades Grease, wax, insects, or other materials on the wind- shield or the wiper blade results in jerky wiper opera- tion and streaking on the glass. If you cannot remove the streaks after operating the windshield washer or if the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer surface of the windshield (or rear window) and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning, rinse the wind- shield and wiper blades with clean water. The wind- shield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield with water.

Do not clean the wiper blades with gasoline or a solvent, such as paint thinner or benzene. This will cause deterioration of the wiper blades.

If you cannot eliminate the streaking even after follow- ing this method, replace the wiper blades using the fol- lowing procedures: 1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.

Washer Fluid Concentration Freezing Temperature

30% 10.4F (12C)

50% 4F (20C)

100% 49F (45C)

11-54

Maintenance and service

1) Stopper

2. Remove the wiper blade assembly by holding its pivot area and pushing it in the direction shown by the arrow while depressing the wiper blade stopper.

1) Metal support

3. Grasp the locked end of the blade rubber assembly and pull it firmly until the stoppers on the rubber are free of the metal support.

1

UGB133BB

1

HSB059BB

11-55

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

1) Metal spines

4. If the new blade rubber is not provided with two metal spines, remove the metal spines from the old blade rubber and install them in the new blade rubber.

5. Align the claws of the metal support with the grooves in the rubber and slide the blade rubber as- sembly into the metal support until it locks.

1

HSB060BB HSB061BA

11-56

Maintenance and service

1) Stopper

6. Be sure to position the claws at the end of the metal support between the stoppers on the rubber as shown. If the rubber is not retained properly, the wiper blade may scratch the windshield. 7. Install the wiper blade assembly to the wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place. 8. Lower the wiper arm slowly while holding it with your hand.

Battery

Before beginning work on or near any bat- tery, be sure to extinguish all cigarettes, match- es, and lighters. Never expose a battery to an open flame or electric sparks. Batteries give off a gas which is highly flammable and explosive.

For safety, in case an explosion does occur, wear eye protection or shield your eyes when working near any battery. Never lean over a bat- tery.

Do not let battery fluid contact eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint because battery fluid is a cor- rosive acid. If battery fluid gets on your skin or in your eyes, immediately flush the area with water thoroughly. Seek medical help immedi- ately if acid has entered the eyes. If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, imme- diately drink a large amount of milk or water, and seek medical attention immediately.

To lessen the risk of sparks, remove rings, metal watchbands, and other metal jewelry. Never allow metal tools to contact the positive battery terminal and anything connected to it WHILE you are at the same time in contact with

1

HSB062BB

11-57

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

any other metallic portion of the vehicle be- cause a short circuit will result.

Keep everyone including children away from the battery.

Charge the battery in a well-ventilated area. Battery posts terminals and related accesso-

ries contain lead and lead compounds, chemi- cals known to the State of California to case cancer and reproductive harm. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. Wash hands after handling.

It is unnecessary to periodically check the battery fluid level or periodically refill with distilled water.

Never use more than 10 amperes when charg- ing the battery because it will shorten battery life.

Fuses

Never replace a fuse with one having a higher rating or with material other than a fuse be- cause serious damage or a fire could result.

The fuses are designed to melt during an overload to prevent damage to the wiring harness and electrical equipment. The fuses are located in two fuse boxes. One is located under the instrument panel behind the coin tray on the drivers seat side.

UBB008DA

11-58

Maintenance and service

The other one is housed in the engine compartment. 1) Fuse puller 2) Spare fuses

The fuse puller and spare fuses are stored in the main fuse box cover in the engine compartment.

HSB065BA

1

2 HSB066BB

11-59

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

A) Good B) Blown

If any lights, accessories or other electrical controls do not operate, inspect the corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown, replace it. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and turn off all electrical accessories. 2. Remove the cover. (For behind the coin tray: open the coin tray and pull it horizontally to remove it.) 3. Determine which fuse may be blown. The back side of each fuse box cover and the Fuses and circuits section in chapter 12 in this manual show the circuit for

each fuse.

1) Fuse puller

4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller. 5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown, replace it with a spare fuse of the same rating. 6. If the same fuse blows again, this indicates that its system has a problem. Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.

A B

HSB067BB

1

HSB068BB

11-60

Maintenance and service

Main fuse

Main fuse box

The main fuses are designed to melt during an over- load to prevent damage to the wiring harness and electrical equipment. Check the main fuses if any elec- trical component fails to operate (except the starter motor) and other fuses are good. A melted main fuse must be replaced. Use only replacements with the same specified rating as the melted main fuse. If a main fuse blows after it is replaced, have the electrical system checked by your nearest SUBARU dealer.

Installation of accessories Always consult your SUBARU dealer before installing fog lights or any other electrical equipment in your ve- hicle. Such accessories may cause the electronic sys- tem to malfunction if they are incorrectly installed or if they are not suited for the vehicle.

UB8003CA

11-61

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

Replacing bulbs

7 6

1 42 3

5 UBF047CB

11-62

Maintenance and service

Wattage Bulb No. 1) Headlight

BAJA-S 12V-65/ 55W

9007 (HB5)

BAJA, BAJA-B Low beam 12V-55W H1 High beam 12V-60W 9005

(HB3) 2) Front turn signal 12V-27W 1156NA

(Amber) 3) Map light 12V-8W 4) Dome light 12V-8W 5) Door step light 12V-3.4W 6) Front turn signal light/

parking and front side marker light

12V-27/ 8W

1157NA (Amber)

7) Front fog light 12V-51W 9006 (HB4)

11-63

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

14 1213

8 9 10 11

UBB100BB

11-64

Maintenance and service

Headlight

Halogen headlight bulbs become very hot while in use. If you touch the bulb surface with bare hands or greasy gloves, finger prints or grease on the bulb surface will develop into hot spots and cause the bulb to break. If there are finger prints or grease on the bulb surface, wipe them away with a soft cloth moistened with alcohol.

NOTE If headlight aiming is required, consult your SUBARU dealer for proper adjustment of the head- light aim.

Wattage Bulb No. 8) License plate light 12V-5W 168 9) Cargo light 12V-13W 912 10) High mount stop light 12V-13W 912 11) Backup light 12V-21W 7440 12) Brake rear turn signal/

tail light 12V-21/ 5W

7443

13) Tail light 12V-5W 168 14) Sports activity lights 12V-55W H3

11-65

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

BAJA-Sport

1) Electrical connector 2) Push

1. Disconnect the electrical connector while pressing the lock release tab.

2. Remove the bulb holder from the headlight assem- bly by turning it counterclockwise. 3. Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly. 4. Install the new bulb. 5. Install the bulb holder in the headlight assembly by turning it clockwise until it locks. 6. Remove the electrical connector.

1

2

UBB045BB

UBB046BA

11-66

Maintenance and service

BAJA, BAJA-Turbo

1) Low beam light bulb 2) High beam light bulb

Remove the headlight bulb cover, by turning it coun- terclockwise.

UBB039BA

1

2 UBB040BB

11-67

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

Low beam light bulbs 0

1) Electrical connector 2) Red cable 3) Black cable

1. Disconnect the electrical connector for the black cable.

2. Remove the retainer spring. 3. Replace the bulb, then set the retainer spring se- curely. 4. Reconnect the electrical connector for black cable. 5. Install the headlight bulb cover.

1

2

3

UBB041BB

UBB042BA

11-68

Maintenance and service

High beam light bulbs 0

1) Push

1. Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb. 2. Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly by turning it counterclockwise. 3. Replace the bulb with new one. 4. Reconnect the electrical connector. At this time, use care not to touch the bulb surface. 5. To install the bulb to the headlight assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks. 6. Install the headlight bulb cover.

Front fog light It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. Have your

UBB043BA

1

UBB044BB

11-69

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

SUBARU dealer replace the bulbs if necessary.

Front turn signal light, parking light and side marker light

The headlight assembly must be removed before the front turn signal light and parking light bulbs can be re- placed. When the headlight assembly has been re- moved and then reinstalled, it may become necessary to make a headlight aiming adjustment. After a bulb has been replaced, it is recommended that the head- light aiming adjustment be made at a SUBARU dealer.

1. Remove the headlight assembly mounting screws located at the top of and the front of the headlight as-

sembly using a Phillips screwdriver or an open-end wrench. 2. Move the headlight assembly forward.

1) Front turn signal light bulb 2) Front turn signal light bulb/parking and front side

marker light bulb

3. Remove the bulb socket from the headlight assem- bly by turning it counterclockwise.

UBB016BA

1

2 UBB039CB

11-70

Maintenance and service

4. Remove the bulb from the socket by pushing it and turning counterclockwise. Install a new bulb in the socket. 5. Set the bulb socket into the headlight assembly and turn it clockwise until it locks. 6. Set the headlight assembly into the vehicle body. Tighten the mounting screws.

Rear combination lights Rear combination lights are composed of the rear turn signal/brake/tail light and back up lights.

Rear turn signal/Brake/Tail and Back up lights The rear turn signal/brake/tail light is one bulb with two

filament types. If any one of them malfunctions, replace the bulb with a new one. 1. Open the tailgate.

2. Pry the cover from the side of the rear combination light.

UBB020BA

UBB083BA

11-71

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

3. Remove the rear combination light mounting bolts. Then, slide the rear combination light assembly to the rear and remove it from the vehicle.

1) Back up light bulb 2) Brake/turn/tail/light bulb

4. Remove the bulb socket from the rear combination light assembly by turning it counterclockwise. 5. Remove the bulb from the socket by pulling it. 6. Install a new bulb into the socket by pushing it. 7. Set the bulb socket into the rear combination light assembly and turn it clockwise until it stops. 8. Mount the rear combination light assembly into the vehicle body with two mounting bolts. 9. Install the cover by inserting the knobs into the places.

UBB084BA 2

1

UBB085BB

11-72

Maintenance and service

Tail light (on the tailgate) 1. Open the tailgate.

2. Remove the tailgate trim by loosening the installa- tion screws.

3. Remove the tail light cover by loosening the instal- lation screws.UBB086BA

UBB087BA

11-73

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

4. Remove the bulb socket from the tail light by turn- ing it counterclockwise.

5. Remove the bulb from the socket by pulling it. 6. Install a new bulb into the socket by pushing it. 7. Install the bulb socket into the tail light by turning it clockwise until it stops. 8. Install the tail light cover and the tailgate trim.

UBB088BA UBB048BA

11-74

Maintenance and service

License plate light 0

1. Push two release buttons and pull the license plate bracket up until it clicks.

2. Remove the two cover installation screws. 3. Push the license plate bracket back to the original position.

UBB096BA

UBB097BA

11-75

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

4. Remove the screw from the side of the cover. 5. Remove the cover.

6. Remove the bulb socket from the license plate bracket by turning it counterclockwise. 7. Pull the bulb out of the socket. 8. Install a new bulb in the socket by pushing it. 9. Install the bulb socket into the license plate bracket. 10.Install the covers by reversing procedures for re- moval.

UBB092BA UBB093BA

11-76

Maintenance and service

Map light, dome light and door step light

Map light

Dome light UBB068BA

HSB088BA

11-77

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

Door step light

1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of the lens with a flat-head screwdriver. 2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a new bulb. 3. Reinstall the lens.

High mount stop and cargo light as- sembly

1. Remove the high mount stop light mounting screws.

UBS037AA

UBB089BA

11-78

Maintenance and service

1) Cargo lights 2) High mount stop lights

2. Remove the bulb socket from the light assembly by turning it counterclockwise.

3. Remove the bulb from the socket by pulling it. 4. Install a new bulb in the socket by pushing it. 5. Set the socket into the light assembly and turn it clockwise until it clicks. 6. Mount the light assembly with the mounting screws.

1

2 UBB090BB UBB048BA

11-79

Maintenance and service

CONTINUED

Sport activity lights (if equipped)

1. Remove front lamp screw and remove the lens and reflector.

2. Disconnect the two wires from the lamp electrical connector. 3. Squeeze the bulb retainer spring to remove. 4. Replace the bulb, then reset the retainer spring se- curely. 5. Reconnect the bulb wire to the electrical connector. 6. Install the lens and reflector in the housing and se- cure with the screw.

NOTE Other bulbs may be difficult to replace. Have your SUBARU dealer replace these bulbs if necessary.

UBB081BA

UBB082BA

12-1

12

Specifications

Specifications ................................................ 12-2 Dimensions ....................................................... 12-2 Engine ................................................................ 12-2 Electrical system .............................................. 12-3 Capacities .......................................................... 12-3 Tires ................................................................... 12-4 Wheel alignment ............................................... 12-4

Fuses and circuits ........................................ 12-5 Fuse panel located behind the coin tray ........ 12-5 Fuse panel located in the engine

compartment .................................................. 12-6 Bulb chart ...................................................... 12-8 Vehicle identification .................................... 12-9

12-2

Specifications

SpecificationsSpecifications These specifications are subject to change without notice.

Dimensions in (mm)

Engine

Model BAJA, BAJA-Sport BAJA-Turbo Overall length 199.3 (4,910) Overall width 70.1 (1,780) Overall height 62.1 (1,760) 62.6 (1,775) Wheelbase 104.3 (2,650) Tread Front 57.7 (1,465)

Rear 57.7 (1,465) Ground clearance 8.4 (213)

Item Non-turbo Turbo Engine model EJ251 EJ255 Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4 stroke gasoline engine Displacement cc (cu-in) 2,457 (150) Bore Stroke in (mm) 3.92 3.11 (99.5 79.0) Compression ratio 10.0 : 1 8.2 : 1 Firing order 1 - 3 - 2 - 4

12-3

Specifications

CONTINUED

Electrical system

Capacities

Battery type and capacity (5HR) MT 55D23L (12-48AH) AT 75D23L (12-52AH)

Alternator 12V-90A Spark plugs Non-turbo RC10YC4 (Champion)

BKR6E-11 (NGK) BKR5E-11 (NGK)

Turbo ILFR6B (NGK)

Fuel tank 16.9 US gal (64 liters, 14.1 Imp gal) Engine oil 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt) Transmission oil (MT) 3.7 US qt (3.5 liters, 3.1 Imp qt) Transmission fluid (AT) 9.8 US qt (9.3 liters, 8.2 Imp qt) AT differential gear oil 1.3 US qt (1.2 liters, 1.1 Imp qt) Rear differential gear oil 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt) Power steering gear fluid 0.7 US qt (0.7 liters, 0.6 Imp qt) Engine coolant Non-turbo MT 7.2 US qt (6.8 liters, 6.0 Imp qt)

AT 7.1 US qt (6.7 liters, 5.9 Imp qt) Turbo MT 8.1 US qt (7.7 liters, 6.8 Imp qt)

AT 8.0 US qt (7.6 liters, 6.7 Imp qt)

12-4

Specifications

Tires

Wheel alignment

Type Steel belted radial, Tubeless Tire size P225/60R16 97H Wheel size 16 61/2JJ Pressure Front 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)

Rear 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2) Temporary spare tire Size T145/80R16

Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)

Toe Front 0 in (0 mm) Rear 0 in (0 mm)

Camber Front 040 Rear 005

12-5

Specifications

CONTINUED

Fuses and circuits

Fuse panel located behind the coin tray

19

18

17

16

20

15

14

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

13

UBC001BB

Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit

1 15A Heater fan

2 15A Heater fan

3 15A Power door lock Keyless entry

4 20A Mirror heater Cigarette lighter Remote controlled rear view mirrors

5 10A Tail light Parking light

6 15A SRS airbag

7 15A Front fog light

8 30A ABS solenoid

9 15A Radio Clock

10 15A Trailer

11 15A Engine ignition system SRS airbag

12-6

Specifications

Fuse panel located in the engine com- partment

A) FWD socket B) Main fuse

12 10A Illumination brightness control

13 15A Fuel pump

14 10A Rear window wiper and washer

15 30A Windshield wiper and washer

16 20A Brake light

17 15A Air conditioner

18 15A Backup light Cruise control ABS control

19 20A Wiper deicer Sports activity light Cargo lamp

20 20A Accessory power outlet Seat heater

Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit

A

B

1 2

3 4 5 6

7

8

9

10 11 12

UBC003BB

12-7

Specifications

CONTINUED

Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit

1 20A Radiator cooling fan (Main)

2 20A Radiator cooling fan (Sub)

3 30A ABS motor

4 20A Rear window defogger

5 15A Hazard warning flasher Horn

6 15A Meter SRS airbag system warning light

7 10A Automatic transmis- sion control unit ABS UNIT

8 10A Alternator

9 15A Headlight (right side)

10 15A Headlight (left side)

11 20A Lighting switch

12 15A Clock Interior light

Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit

12-8

Specifications

Bulb chart

Description Wattage Bulb No. Headlight

S models 12V-65/55W 9007 (HB5) Except S models

Low beam 12V-55W H1 High beam 12V-60W 9005 (HB3)

Front turn signal 12V-27W 1156NA (Amber)

Spot light 12V-8W Dome light 12V-8W Door step light 12V-3.4W Parking and front side marker light

12V-27/8W 1157NA (Amber)

Front fog light 12V-51W 9006 (HB4) Backup light 12V-21W 7440 High mount stop light 12V-13W 912 BrakeRear turn sig- nal light/Tail light

12V-21/5W 7443

Rear finisher light 12V-5W 168 License plate light 12V-5W 168 Cargo light 12V-13W 912 Sports activity light 12V-55W H3

12-9

Specifications

CONTINUED

Vehicle identification

2

1

7 6 5

4

3

UBC010BB

1) Emission control label 2) Vehicle identification number 3) Radio noise label (Canada mod-

el) 4) Tire inflation pressure label 5) Certification and bar code label 6) Vehicle identification number

plate 7) Model number plate

13-1

13

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Tire information ............................................. 13-2 Tire labeling ....................................................... 13-2 Recommended tire inflation pressure ............ 13-5 Glossary of tire terminology ............................ 13-6 Tire care maintenance and safety

practices ......................................................... 13-8 Vehicle load limit how to determine ............. 13-8 Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle

load capacities ............................................... 13-13 Adverse safety consequences of overloading

on handling and stopping and on tires ........ 13-13 Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit ..... 13-13

Uniform tire quality grading standards ....... 13-14 Treadwear .......................................................... 13-14 Traction AA, A, B, C .......................................... 13-15 Temperature A, B, C ......................................... 13-15

Reporting safety defects (USA) ................... 13-16

13-2

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Consumer information and Reporting safety defectsFor U.S.A. The following information has been compiled accord- ing to Code of Federal Regulations Title 49, Part 575.

Tire information

Tire labeling Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire Identification Number or TIN) are placed on the sidewall of a tire by tire manufacturers. These marking can provide you with useful information on the tire.

Tire size Your vehicle comes equipped with P-Metric tire size. It is important to understand the sizing sys- tem in selecting the proper tire for your vehicles. Here is a brief review of the tire sizing system with a breakdown of its individual elements.

P Metric With the P-Metric system, Section Width is mea- sured in millimeters. To convert millimeters into inches, divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio (Sec- tion Height divided by Section Width) helps pro-

vide more dimensional information about the tire size.

Example:

(1) P = Certain tire type used on light duty vehi- cles such as passenger cars (2) Section Width in millimeters (3) Aspect Ratio (= section height section width). (4) R = Radial Construction (5) Rim diameter in inches

Load and Speed Rating Descriptions The load and speed rating descriptions will ap- pear following the size designation. They provide two important facts about the tire. First, the number designation is its load index. Second, the letter designation indicates the tires speed rating.

P 225 / 60 R 16 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

13-3

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

CONTINUED

Example:

(6) Load Index: A numerical code which speci- fies the maximum load a tire can carry at the speed indicated by its speed symbol, at maxi- mum inflation pressure. For example, 97 means 1,609 lbs (730 kg)

Load indices apply only to the tire, not to the vehicle. Putting a load rated tire on any vehicle does not mean the vehicle can be loaded up to the tires rated load.

(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical system de- scribing a tires capability to travel at established and predetermined speeds. For example, H means 130 mph (210 km/h)

Speed ratings apply only to the tire, not to the vehicle. Putting a speed rated tire on any vehicle does not mean the vehicle can be operated at the tires rated speed.

The speed rating is void if the tires are worn out, damaged, repaired, retreaded, or otherwise altered from their original condi- tion. If tires are repaired, retreaded, or oth- erwise altered, they may not be suitable for original equipment tire designed loads and speeds.

Tire Identification Number (TIN) Tire Identification Number (TIN) is marked on the intended outboard sidewall. The TIN is com- posed of four groups. Here is a brief review of the TIN with a breakdown of its individual elements.

(1) Manufacturers Identification Mark

P 225 / 60 R 16 97 H Size designation (6) (7)

DOT XX XX XXX XXXX (1) (2) (3) (4)

13-4

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

(2) Tire Size (3) Tire Type Code (4) Date of Manufacture The first two figures identify the week, starting with 01 to represent the first full week of the cal- endar year; the second two figures represent the year. For example, 0101 means the 1st week of 2001.

Other markings The following makings are also placed on the sidewall.

Maximum permissible inflation pressure The maximum cold inflation pressure to which this tire may be inflated. For example, 300 kpa (44 PSI) MAX. PRESS

Maximum load rating The load rating at the maximum permissible weight load for this tire. For example, MAX. LOAD 730 kg (1609 LBS) @ 300 kpa (44 PSI) MAX. PRESS.

Maximum load rating applies only to the tire, not to the vehicle. Putting a load rated tire on any vehicle does not mean the vehi- cle can be loaded up to the tires rated load.

Construction type Applicable construction of this tire. For example, TUBELESS STEEL BELTED RA- DIAL

Construction The generic name of each cord material used in the plies (both sidewall and tread area) of this tire. For example, PLIES: TREAD 2 STEEL + 2 POLYESTER + 1 NYLON SIDEWALL 2 POLY- ESTER

Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG) For details, refer to Uniform tire quality grading standards in this chapter.

13-5

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

CONTINUED

Recommended tire inflation pressure Recommended cold tire inflation pressure

Recommended cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicles tires is as follows,

Vehicle placard

The vehicle placard is affixed to the drivers side B-pillar.

Tire size P225/60 R16 97H

Wheel size 16 6 1/2JJ

Pressure Front 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)

Rear 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)

Temporary spare tire

Size T145/80R16

Pres- sure

60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)

UB8053BA

13-6

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Example:

The vehicle placard shows original tire size, rec- ommended cold tire inflation pressure on each tire at maximum loaded vehicle weight, seating capacity and loading information.

Adverse safety consequences of under-in- flation

Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire pressures can cause the tires to flex severely and to rapidly become hot. A sharp increase in temperature could cause tread separation, and failure of the tire(s). Possible resulting loss of ve-

hicle control could lead to an accident.

Measuring and adjusting air pressure to achieve proper inflation

Check and, if necessary, adjust the pressure of each tire (including the spare) at least once a month and before any long journey. Check the tire pressures when the tires are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the specific values. Driving even a short distance warms up the tires and increases the tire pres- sures. Also, the tire pressures are affected by the outside temperature. It is best to check tire pres- sure outdoors before driving the vehicle. When a tire becomes warm, the air inside it expands, causing the tire pressure to increase. Be careful not to mistakenly release air from a warm tire to reduce its pressure.

Glossary of tire terminology Cold tire pressure

The pressure in a tire that has been driven less than 1 mile or has been standing for three hours or more.

Maximum inflation pressure

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION

SEE OWNERS MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

SEATING CAPACITY

ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE COLD TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE

COLD TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE

FRONT

REAR

230 kPa,33 PSI

230 kPa,33 PSI

420 kPa,60 PSI

COMPACT SPARE TIRE

T145/80R16

P225/60R16

The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 363kg or 800 lbs.

TOTAL 4 FRONT 2 REAR 2

UBD004AA

13-7

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

CONTINUED

The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated.

Recommended inflation pressure The cold inflation pressure recommended by a vehicle manufacturer.

Intended outboard sidewall 1)The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or 2)The outward facing sidewall of an asymmet- rical tire that has a particular side that must al- ways face outward when mounting on a vehi- cle. Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of those stan- dard items which may be replaced) of floor mats, leather seats, cross bars and cargo bed extender to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not).

Curb weight The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fu-

el, oil, and coolant and air conditioning. Maximum loaded vehicle weight

The sum of curb weight, accessory weight, vehi- cle capacity weight and production options weight.

Normal occupant weight 150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of occupants (2 occupants).

Occupant distribution Distribution of occupants in a vehicle, 2 in front.

Production options weight The combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in excess of those standards items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight.

Vehicle capacity weight The total weight of cargo, luggage and occu- pants that can be added to the vehicle.

Vehicle maximum load on a tire Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maxi- mum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two.

Vehicle normal load on a tire Load on an individual tire that is determined by

13-8

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight and dividing by two.

Tire care maintenance and safety practices

Check on a daily basis that the tires are free from serious damage, nails, and stones. At the same time, check the tires for abnormal wear.

Inspect the tire tread regularly and replace the tires before their tread wear indicators become visible. When a tires tread wear indicator be- comes visible, the tire is worn beyond the ac- ceptable limit and must be replaced immediately. With a tire in this condition, driving at even low speeds in wet weather can cause the vehicle to hydroplane. Possible resulting loss of vehicle control can lead to an accident.

To maximize the life of each tire and ensure that the tires wear uniformly, it is best to rotate the tires every 7,500 miles (12,500 km). Rotating the tires involves switching the front and rear tires on the right hand side of the vehicle and similarly switching the front and rear tires on the

left hand side of the vehicle. (Each tire must be kept on its original side of the vehicle.) Replace any damaged or unevenly worn tire at the time of rotation. After tire rotation, adjust the tire pres- sures and make sure the wheel nuts are correct- ly tightened. A tightening torque specification and a tightening sequence specification for the wheel nuts can be found Flat tires in Chapter 9.

Vehicle load limit how to determine The load capacity of your vehicle is determined by weight, not by available cargo space. The load limit of your vehicle is shown on the vehicle placard attached to the drivers side B-pillar. Lo- cate the statement The combined weight of oc- cupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on your vehicles placard. The vehicle placard also shows seating capacity of your vehicle. The total load capacity includes the total weight of driver and all passengers and their belong- ings, any cargo, any optional equipment such as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier, etc., and the tongue load of a trailer. Therefore cargo ca-

13-9

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

CONTINUED

pacity can be calculated by the following method.

Cargo capacity = Load limit (total weight of oc- cupants + total weight of optional equipment + tongue load of a trailer (if applicable))

For towing capacity information and weight lim- its, refer to Trailer towing in Chapter 8.

Calculating total and load capacities vary- ing seating configurations

Calculate the available load capacity as shown in the following examples:

Example 1A

Vehicle capacity weight of the vehicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which is indicated on the vehicle plac- ard with the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 363 kg or 800 lbs.

For example, if the vehicle has one occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg) plus cargo weighing 551 lbs (250 kg).

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load capacity by sub- tracting the total weight from the vehicle capacity weight of 800 lbs (363 kg).

UBD005BA

Total weight

= 154 lbs (70 kg) + 551 lbs (250 kg)

= 705 lbs (320 kg) (Occupant) (Cargo)

13-10

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

3. The result of step 2 shows that a further 95 lbs (43 kg) of cargo can be carried.

Example 1B

For example, if a person weighing 176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the same vehicle (bringing the

number of occupants to two), the calculations are as follows:

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load capacity.

3. The total weight now exceeds the capacity weight by 81 lbs (37 kg), so the cargo weight must be reduced by 81 lbs (37 kg) or more.

Available Load Capacity

= 800 lbs (363 kg) 705 lbs (320 kg)

= 95 lbs (43 kg)

(Vehicle capacity weight)

(Total weight)

UB8055BA

Total weight

= 154 lbs (70 kg) + 176 lbs (80 kg)

+ 551 lbs (250 kg)

= 881 lbs (400 kg)

(Occupant)

(Cargo)

Available Load Capacity

= 800 lbs (363 kg) 881 lbs (400 kg)

= 81 lbs ( 37 kg)

(Vehicle capacity weight)

(Total weight)

13-11

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

CONTINUED

Example 2A

Vehicle capacity weight of the vehicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which is indicated on the vehicle plac- ard with the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 363 kg or 800 lbs.

For example, the vehicle has one occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg) plus cargo weighing 265 lbs (120 kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs (10 kg), to which is attached a trailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800kg). 10% of the trailer weight is applied to

the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue load = 176 lbs (80 kg)).

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load capacity.

3. The result of step 2 shows that a further 172 lbs (78 kg) of cargo can be carried.

UBD006BA

Total weight

= 165 lbs (75 kg) + 265 lbs (120 kg)

+ 22 lbs (10 kg) + 176 lbs (80 kg)

= 628 lbs (285 kg)

(Occupant) (Cargo)

(Trailer hitch) (Tongue load)

Available Load Capacity

= 800 lbs (363 kg) 628 lbs (285 kg)

= 172 lbs (78 kg)

(Vehicle capacity weight)

(Total weight)

13-12

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Example 2B

For example, if a person weighing 143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing 40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same vehicle (bringing the number of occu- pants to three), and a child restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5 kg) is installed in the vehicle for the child to use, the calculations are as fol- lows:

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load capacity.

3. The total weight now exceeds the capacity weight by 22 lbs (10 kg), so the cargo weight must be reduced by 22 lbs (10 kg) or more.

UBD007BA

Total weight

= 165 lbs (75 kg) + 143 lbs (65 kg) + 40 lbs (18 kg)

+ 11 lbs (5 kg) + 265 lbs (120 kg)

+ 22 lbs (10 kg) + 176 lbs (80 kg)

= 822 lbs (373 kg)

(Occupant)

(Cargo)

(Trailer hitch)

(Child restraint)

(Tongue load)

Available Load Capacity

= 800 lbs (363 kg) 822 lbs (373 kg)

= 22 lbs ( 10 kg)

(Vehicle capacity weight)

(Total weight)

13-13

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

CONTINUED

Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle load capacities

The sum of four tires maximum load ratings must exceed the maximum loaded vehicle weight (GVWR). In addition, sum of the maxi- mum load ratings of two front tires and of two rear tires must exceed each axles maximum loaded capacity (GAWR). Original equipment tires are designed to fulfill those conditions. The maximum loaded vehicle weight is referred to Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). And each axles maximum loaded capacity is referred to Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The GVWR and each axles GAWR are shown on the vehicle certification label affixed to the drivers door. The GVWR and front and rear GAWRs are de- termined by not only the maximum load rating of tires but also loaded capacities of the vehicles suspension, axles and other body parts. Therefore, this means that the vehicle cannot necessarily be loaded up to the tires maximum load rating on the tire sidewall.

Adverse safety consequences of over- loading on handling and stopping and on tires

Overloading could affect vehicle handling, stop- ping distance, vehicle and tire as shown below. This could lead to an accident and possibly result in severe personal injury.

Vehicle stability will deteriorate. Heavy and/or high-mounted loads could in-

crease the risk of rollover. Stopping distance will increase. Brakes could overheat and fail. Suspension, bearings, axles and other body

parts could break or experience accelerated wear that will shorten vehicle life.

Tires could fail. Tread separation could occur. Tire could separate from its rim.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

1. Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds on your vehicles placard.

13-14

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg). and there will be five- 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail- able cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 750 (5 150) = 650 lbs.) 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available car- go and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehi- cle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Uniform tire quality grading stan- dards This information indicates the relative perfor- mance of passenger car tires in the area of treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance. This is to aid the consumer in making an in- formed choice in the purchase of tires. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The quality grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger cars. However, they do not apply to deep tread, winter type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 12 inches or less, or to some limited production tires.

All passenger car tires must confirm to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

13-15

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

CONTINUED

based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov- ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1-1/2) times as well on the govern- ment course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as mea- sured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and con- crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction

tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature A, B, C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tires resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces- sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor- mance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- dards No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

The temperature grade for this tire is es- tablished for a tire that is properly inflated

13-16

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

and not overloaded. Excessive speed, un- derinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Reporting safety defects (USA)

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause in- jury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Admin- istration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Subaru of America, Inc. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Subaru of America, Inc. To con- tact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the Washington D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.

14-1 14

Index

14-2

Index

A ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ........................... 7-33

Warning light ................................................. 3-12 Accessories .............................................. 5-4, 11-60 Air cleaner element ......................................... 11-23 Air conditioner operation ................................... 4-10 Air filtration system ............................................ 4-13 All-Wheel Drive warning light ............................ 3-14 Aluminum wheels ............................................ 11-52 Antenna system .................................................. 5-2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ........................... 7-33 Ashtray .............................................................. 6-12 AT OIL TEMPerature warning light ................... 3-12 Audio set ............................................................. 5-4 Auto-dimming mirror/compass .......................... 3-29 Automatic transmission ............................ 7-15, 7-21

Capacities ..................................................... 12-3 Fluid ............................................................ 11-29 Selector lever ....................................... 7-16, 7-22 Shift lock release ................................. 7-20, 7-30 SPORTSHIFT mode Turbo models ........... 7-21 Temperature warning light ............................ 3-12

Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR) .......................................................... 1-16

AWD warning light ............................................. 3-14

B Battery ............................................................. 11-56

Jump starting ................................................ 9-18 Replacement (Remote keyless entry

system) ...................................................... 2-10 Bed extender ..................................................... 6-17 Brake

Booster ....................................................... 11-41 Fluid ............................................................ 11-38 Pad and lining ............................................. 11-43 Pedal .......................................................... 11-41

Brake pedal Free play .................................................... 11-41 Reserve distance ........................................ 11-42

Brake system .................................................... 7-32 Warning light ................................................ 3-13

Braking .............................................................. 7-32 Breaking-in of new brake pads and

linings ....................................................... 11-44 Tips ............................................................... 7-32

Bulb Chart ............................................................. 12-8 Replacing ................................................... 11-61

C Capacities ......................................................... 12-3

14-3

Index

Cargo Bed ............................................................... 6-16 Lamp ............................................................. 6-20 Lamp indicator light ...................................... 3-16 Net hooks ..................................................... 6-13 Tie-down hooks ............................................ 6-17

Catalytic converter ............................................... 8-4 Center

Console .......................................................... 6-5 Ventilators ....................................................... 4-2

Changing Flat tire .......................................................... 9-12 Oil and oil filter ............................................ 11-12

Charge warning light ......................................... 3-11 CHECK ENGINE warning light/

Malfunction indicator lamp ............................. 3-10 Checking

Brake pedal free play .................................. 11-41 Brake pedal reserve distance ..................... 11-42 Clutch function ............................................ 11-42 Clutch pedal free play ................................. 11-43 Engine oil level ........................................... 11-10 Fluid level ................. 11-29, 11-36, 11-38, 11-39 Gear oil level .................................... 11-27, 11-33

Child restraint systems ...................................... 1-28 Installation with seatbelt ............................... 1-32 Lower and tether anchorages ....................... 1-40

Child safety ............................................................. 5 Locks ............................................................ 2-21

Chime Key ................................................................. 3-4 Seatbelt ................................................. 1-17, 3-9

Cigarette lighter socket ........................................ 6-9 Cleaning

Aluminum wheels ......................................... 10-4 Fog light lens ................................................ 10-4 Interior .......................................................... 10-6 Ventilator grille .............................................. 4-11

Clock ................................................................. 3-17 Clutch fluid ....................................................... 11-39 Clutch pedal .................................................... 11-42 Coat hook .......................................................... 6-13 Coin compartment ............................................... 6-6 Convenience hook ............................................. 6-13 Cooling system ................................................ 11-17 Corrosion protection .......................................... 10-5 Cover

Soft bed ........................................................ 6-21 Cruise control .................................................... 7-38

Set indicator light .......................................... 3-16 Cup holder ........................................................... 6-7

D Daytime running light system ............................ 3-20

14-4

Index

Differential gear oil Front ........................................................... 11-32 Rear ............................................................ 11-33

Dimensions ........................................................ 12-2 Disarming the system ............................... 2-17, 2-19 Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ............ 7-33 Dome light ................................................ 6-2, 11-76 Door ajar warning lights ..................................... 3-14 Door locks ........................................................... 2-3 Drive belts ....................................................... 11-26 Driving

Car phone/mobile phone ................................... 8 Drinking ............................................................. 7 Drugs ................................................................. 7 Foreign countries ............................................ 8-6 Pets ................................................................... 8 Snowy and icy roads .................................... 8-13 Tips ..................................... 7-14, 7-19, 7-29, 8-7 Tired or sleepy ................................................... 8

E Electrical system ............................................... 12-3 Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ................. 1-16 Engine

Compartment overview ................................. 11-8 Coolant ....................................................... 11-18 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) .................... 8-3

Hood ............................................................. 11-5 Oil ............................................................... 11-10 Overheating .................................................. 9-21 Starting ........................................................... 7-9 Stopping ....................................................... 7-12

Exterior care ...................................................... 10-2

F Flat tires ............................................................ 9-12 Floor mat ........................................................... 6-15 Fluid level

Automatic transmission .............................. 11-29 Brake .......................................................... 11-38 Clutch ......................................................... 11-39 Power steering ........................................... 11-36

Fog light button ................................................. 3-23 Folding down the rear seat ................................ 1-10 Front

Differential gear oil ..................................... 11-32 Fog light ...................................................... 11-68 Seatbelt pretensioners ................................. 1-24 Seats .............................................................. 1-2 Turn signal light, parking light and

side marker light ....................................... 11-69 Fuel ..................................................................... 7-2

Economy hints ................................................ 8-2 Filler door and cap .......................................... 7-4

14-5

Index

Gauge ............................................................. 3-8 Requirements ................................................. 7-2

Fuses ............................................................... 11-57 Fuses and circuits ............................................. 12-5

G GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) ................... 8-19 Glove box ............................................................ 6-5 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) .............. 8-19

H Hazard warning flasher ....................................... 3-5 Head restraint adjustment (Front) ........................ 1-6 Headlight flasher ............................................... 3-19 Headlights .............................................. 3-18, 11-64 Heater operation .................................................. 4-7 High beam indicator light ................................... 3-16 High mount stop and cargo light assembly ...... 11-77 Horn ................................................................... 3-34 Hose and connections ..................................... 11-18

I Ignition switch ...................................................... 3-2 Illuminated entry .................................................. 2-9 Illumination brightness control ........................... 3-21

Indicator light High beam .................................................... 3-16 Selector lever position .................................. 3-15 Turn signal .................................................... 3-16

Inside mirror ...................................................... 3-28 Interior light .......................................................... 6-2

J Jack and tools ..................................................... 9-3 Jump starting ..................................................... 9-18

K Key

Interlock release ............................................. 3-4 Number ........................................................... 2-2 Reminder chime ............................................. 3-4

Keys .................................................................... 2-2

L Leather seat materials ....................................... 10-6 License plate bracket ........................................ 2-26 License plate light ............................................ 11-74 Light control switch ............................................ 3-18 Limited slip differential (LSD) ............................ 7-31 Loading your vehicle ......................................... 8-16 Lower tether anchorages ................................... 1-40

14-6

Index

LSD (Limited slip differential) ............................ 7-31

M Main fuse ......................................................... 11-60 Maintenance

Precautions .................................................. 11-3 Schedule ...................................................... 11-3 Seatbelt ........................................................ 1-21

Malfunction indicator lamp (Check Engine light) ...................................... 3-10

Manual transmission ......................................... 7-12 Manual transmission oil ................................... 11-27 Map light .............................................................. 6-3 Maximum load limits .......................................... 8-25 Meters and gauges ............................................. 3-6 Mirrors ............................................................... 3-28 Moonroof .................................................. 2-31, 9-28

N New vehicle break-in driving

the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) ....................... 8-2

O Odometer/Trip meter ........................................... 3-6 Off road driving .................................................... 8-9

Oil level Engine ........................................................ 11-10 Front differential (AT vehicles) ................... 11-32 Manual transmission .................................. 11-27 Rear differential .......................................... 11-33

Oil pressure warning light .................................. 3-12 Outside mirrors .................................................. 3-30 Overheating engine ........................................... 9-21

P Parking

Brake ............................................................ 7-36 Brake stroke ............................................... 11-45 Light switch ................................................... 3-22

Periodic inspections ............................................ 8-6 Power

Door locking switches ..................................... 2-5 Steering ........................................................ 7-31 Steering fluid .............................................. 11-36 Windows ....................................................... 2-22

R Rear

Center console ............................................... 6-6 Combination lights ...................................... 11-70 Differential gear oil ..................................... 11-33 Seats .............................................................. 1-9

14-7

Index

Rear seat Folding down ................................................ 1-10

Rear window Defogger button ............................................ 3-26

Recommended Automatic transmission fluid ....................... 11-31 Brake fluid ................................................... 11-39 Clutch fluid .................................................. 11-40 Oil grade and viscosity ....... 11-15, 11-16, 11-28,

11-32, 11-35 Power steering fluid .................................... 11-37 Spark plugs ................................................. 11-26

Remote keyless entry system .............................. 2-7 Replacement

Brake pad and lining ................................... 11-43 Windshield wiper blades ............................. 11-53

Replacing Air cleaner element ..................................... 11-23 Battery (remote keyless entry system) ......... 2-10 Lost transmitters (keyless entry system) ...... 2-11

Replacing bulbs ............................................... 11-61 Cargo light assembly .................................. 11-77 Dome light .................................................. 11-76 Front fog light .............................................. 11-68 Front turn signal light .................................. 11-69 Headlight .................................................... 11-64 High mount stop light assembly .................. 11-77

License plate light ....................................... 11-74 Map light ..................................................... 11-76 Parking light ................................................ 11-69 Rear combination lights .............................. 11-70 Tail light ...................................................... 11-72

Rocking the vehicle ........................................... 8-16 Roof rail and crossbar ....................................... 6-24

S Seat

Fabric ............................................................ 10-6 Heater ............................................................. 1-7

Seatbelt .................................................................. 4 Maintenance ................................................. 1-21 Pretensioners ............................................... 1-24 Safety tips ..................................................... 1-14 Warning light and chime ............................... 1-17

Seatbelts ........................................................... 1-14 Security system ................................................. 2-15 Selector lever ........................................... 7-16, 7-22

Position indicator .......................................... 3-15 Shift lock release ...................................... 7-20, 7-30 Side ventilators .................................................... 4-2 Snow tires .......................................................... 8-14 Soft bed cover ................................................... 6-21 Sounding a panic alarm .............................. 2-9, 2-18 Spark plugs ..................................................... 11-25

14-8

Index

Specifications .................................................... 12-2 Speedometer ....................................................... 3-6 Sport activity lights ................................. 6-30, 11-79 SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint

System airbag) .......................................... 4, 1-47 SRS airbag system monitors ............................. 1-60 SRS airbag system servicing ............................ 1-61 SRS airbag system warning light ...................... 3-10 SRS frontal airbag ............................................. 1-52 Starting the engine .............................................. 7-9 State emission testing (U.S. only) ....................... 7-7 Stopping the engine .......................................... 7-12 Storage compartments ........................................ 6-4 Sun shades ....................................................... 2-33 Sun visors ........................................................... 6-3 Supplemental Restraint System airbag

(SRS) ......................................................... 4, 1-47 Switchback door ................................................ 2-27 Switchback door indicator light ................. 2-31, 3-14 Synthetic leather upholstery .............................. 10-7

T Tachometer ......................................................... 3-7 Tail light ........................................................... 11-72 Tailgate ............................................................. 2-25 Temperature gauge ............................................. 3-8 Temporary spare tire ......................................... 9-10

Tie-down hooks ................................................. 9-23 Tilt steering wheel ............................................. 3-33 Tire

Chains .......................................................... 8-15 Information ................................................... 13-2 Inspection ................................................... 11-46 Pressures and wear ................................... 11-46 Replacement .............................................. 11-50 Rotation ...................................................... 11-50

Tires .................................................................. 12-4 Types .......................................................... 11-45

Tires and wheels ............................................. 11-45 Top tether anchorages ...................................... 1-40 Towing ............................................................... 9-22

All wheels on the ground .............................. 9-27 Flat-bed truck ............................................... 9-27 Hooks ........................................................... 9-23

Trailer Hitch ............................................................. 8-20 Hitches ......................................................... 8-30 Towing .......................................................... 8-24 Towing tips ................................................... 8-33

Turn signal Indicator lights .............................................. 3-16 Lever ............................................................ 3-20

14-9

Index

V Valet mode ........................................................ 2-18 Vanity mirror ........................................................ 6-4 Vehicle

Capacity weight ............................................ 8-18 Identification ................................................. 12-9

Ventilator ............................................................. 4-2

W Warning and indicator lights ................................ 3-9 Warning lights

ABS .............................................................. 3-12 All-Wheel Drive ............................................. 3-14 Anti-lock Brake System ................................. 3-12 AT OIL TEMPerature .................................... 3-12 Brake system ................................................ 3-13 Charge .......................................................... 3-11 CHECK ENGINE .......................................... 3-10 Door ajar ....................................................... 3-14 Oil pressure .................................................. 3-12 Seatbelt ................................................. 1-17, 3-9 SRS airbag system ....................................... 3-10

Warranties and maintenance ............................ 8-24 Washing ............................................................ 10-2 Waxing and polishing ........................................ 10-3 Wear indicators ............................................... 11-49

Wheel Alignment ...................................................... 12-4 Balance ....................................................... 11-49 Replacement .............................................. 11-51

Windows ............................................................ 2-22 Windshield

Washer fluid ................................................ 11-52 Wiper and washer switches .......................... 3-25 Wiper deicer ................................................. 3-27

Winter driving .................................................... 8-11 Wiper and washer ............................................. 3-23

10

9 876

5

4

3

11

12

13

HSF028AA

GAS STATION REFERENCE

Fuel: Non-turbo models

Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rat- ing of 87 AKI or higher.

Turbo models Use premium unleaded gasoline with an oc- tane rating of 91 AKI or higher. If premium un- leaded gasoline is not available, regular un- leaded gasoline with octane rating of 87 AKI or higher may be temporarily used. For optimum engine performance and driveability, it is re- quired that you use premium grade unleaded gasoline.

Fuel octane rating This octane rating is the average of the Re- search Octane and Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti Knock In-

dex (AKI). Refer to Fuel section in this manu- al.

Fuel capacity: 16.9 US gal (64 liters, 14.1 Imp gal)

Engine oil: Use only API classification SL with the words ENERGY CONSERVING and the New API certification mark (starburst mark) displayed on the container (ILSAC GF-3).

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Baja Subaru works, you can view and download the Subaru Baja Sport 2005 Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Subaru Baja as well as other Subaru manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Subaru Baja. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Subaru Baja Sport 2005 Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Subaru Baja Sport 2005 Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Subaru Baja Sport 2005 Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Subaru Baja Sport 2005 Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Subaru Baja Sport 2005 Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.